Professional Documents
Culture Documents
DEVANAGARI
FOR S T U D E N T S
SCRIPT
OF
INTRODUCTION T O THE
DEVANAGARI SCRIPT
FOR
STUDENTS
SANSKRIT,
HINDI,
GUJARATI
OF .
MARATHI
AND
BENGALI
BY
H. M. L A M B E R T, M.A.Cantab.
Senior Lecturer in Marathi
in the School of Oriental
WITH
PROFESSOR
J.
(Maharaja
and African
A
R.
Gaekwad's
Studies,
F O R E W O R D
FIRTH,
Lectureship)
University
of London
BY
O.B.E.,
in the University
M.A.
of London
GEOFFREY C U M B E R L E G E
OXFORD
UNIVERSITY
PRESS
WELLINGTON
First
published
1953
IBADAN
University
FOREWORD
vi
F O R E W O RD
means it has been found possible to make a systematic statement of the various c o n v e n tions governing the use of the Sanskritic writing system for the m o d e r n languages.
T h e Sanskrit and H i n d i sections are published separately in one v o l u m e since they
employ one script and will presumably be more generally required, b u t the appeal of the
entire w o r k is to those w h o s e interests range from India through F u r t h e r India to the
Indonesian Islands following the Sanskritic system of writing.
I have been acquainted w i t h Mis s L a m b e r t ' s work in Indian studies since 1937, first
in Western India and later as a colleague in L o n d o n . It gave m e great pleasure to be
asked to write this brief foreword to her work on a subject w h i c h I have always held to
be of high importance and the results of w h i c h are n o w offered to students of Sanskrit
and the four principal Sanskritic languages of India.
J. R. F I R T H
PREFACE
G O O D writing, the understanding of the w r i t i n g system and the formation of a good
hand, is as important a part of the study of th e written language as good pronunciation
is of the study of the spoken language. Y e t too little time is usually given to the teaching of
writing to students of Sanskrit and of the m o d e r n Indian languages; writing is generally
left for the student to teach himself as b e s t he can. T h e result is that many students
neither have an adequate understanding of th e w r i t i n g system and the difference between
a syllabic and an alphabetic method of representation, nor k n o w h o w the characters of
the script are written and wha t features are important for the formation of a cultured
literate hand. It is hoped that this b o o k will p r o v i d e not only a guide to students learning to write the scripts w h i c h are described in each section, but will also give them a
fuller understanding of the special nature o f the scripts a n d the adjustments w h i c h are
made in the Sanskrit system in order to use it for writing the modern languages of
northern India.
T h e notation used for the transcription of the scripts in this work is the A l l - I n d i a
Roman Alphabet devised b y Professor J. R . F i r t h of the School of Oriental and African
Studies, University of L o n d o n , and u s e d already in several publicationsA. H . Harley,
Colloquial Hindustani, T . G r a h a m e B a i l e y , Teach Yourself Hindustani, and m y o w n
Marathi Language Course. T h e use of this transcription necessitates the use of certain
conventions, particularly that of the representation of the 'inherent v o w e l ' , in final
characters w h e n listing the contents of e a c h section of the w o r k . T h e transcription of
the Sanskrit terms in the Sanskrit section is entirely systematic; but owing to the varying
realization of the characters of the script i n certain positions in word s in the modern
languages, it has been necessary to use in t h e C o n t e n t s of the other sections certain conventions which are discussed in the t e x t . A n e x a m p le of such conventions occurs in the
writing of such Sanskrit terms, used b y grammarians in the modern languages, as
'antasth' and 'uusm', in w h i c h the realization of the 'inherent v o w e l ' of the final character
varies from a short glide-vowel to a full syllable. A s it is b e y o n d the scope of this work
to make a fine analysis of the v a r y i n g realization of such final characters, it is necessary
to establish certain conventions w i t h regard to the transcription of them. T h e s e conventions are of necessity anticipated in the C o n t e n t s .
Some degree of repetition has b e e n inevitable in order to preserve the basic unity of
the description of the Devanagari s y s t e m of w r i t i n g while allowing for specialization
viii
PREFACE
in each of the languages. W h i l e this repetition may at times seem irksome to the reader,
it has the advantage of facilitating comparison of one section w i t h another.
T h e words given in each section to illustrate the writing and reading of the various
scripts have been selected in order to provide examples of every character or combination of characters w h i c h occurs in the language under consideration. S o m e characters
occur only in colloquial forms o r in loanwords from other languages, including English.
I n order to illustrate the use of all the characters, examples are drawn, therefore, from
the whole range of vocabulary, from colloquial forms occurring in m o d e r n speech to
learned Sanskrit loanwords occurring only in literary texts. A n y w o r d w h i c h occurs in
a standard dictionary is a w o r d w h i c h the student may have to read and illustrates the
use of the characters of the script.
T h i s study of the D e v a n a g a r i script owes its inspiration to the suggestion and encouragement of Professor F i r t h , to w h o m m y thanks are first due. B u t a w o r k of this
nature could not have b e e n accomplished without reference to experts in the languages
discussed, and I am greatly indebted to m y colleagues of both the D e p a r t m e n t of India,
Pakistan and C e y l o n , and the D e p a r t m e n t of Phonetics and Linguistics, of the School, for
their co-operation and g u i d a n c e . I am especially indebted to M i s s G . M . S u m m e r s ,
formerly L e c t u r e r in Bengali in this School, for her collaboration in the Bengali section,
without w h i c h the study of the Bengali script could not have been included in this w o r k .
T h e t w o scribes w h o have written the script portions of the book, M i s s W . Westover
and M r . P . Pritchard, mus t also b e given recognition for their careful and accurate w o r k .
Finally I wish to express m y appreciation of the great generosity of the School of
Oriental and African S tudie s for their subvention towards the publication of this b o o k ;
and of the help and advice g i v e n b y the Oxford University Press on all matters concerning its production.
H. M . L.
CONTENTS
page
v
vii
Foreword
Preface
Introduction: The Devanagari Script
Notation
Calligraphy
SANSKRIT
1
2
5
SECTION
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 5
1.
2.
3.
1+.
5
6.
Consonant Characters
i Characters of the vargiiya group
ii. Characters of the antahstna group
iii. Characters of the uusman group, and Vedic \o
Vowel Characters and Vowel Signs
i. Vowel characters
ii. Vowel signs
Modifiers
i. anusvaran
ii. visargah
The Complete Syllabary
Numerals
Punctuation
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
5
6
8
9
1
1
3
6
6
0
1
2
2
3 3
5 1
C O N T E N T S
HINDI SECTION
Chapter 1. Arrangement of the Syllabary
Hindi syllabary in roman notation
Chapter 2. Characters of the Syllabary
1. Consonant Characters
Realisation of akar consonant characters
i. Characters of the vargiiy group
ii. Characters of the antasth group
iii. Characters of the uusm group
2. Vowel Characters and Vowel Signs
i. Vowel Characters
ii. Vowel Signs
Realisation of characters in special contexts
3 . Modifiers
i. anusvar and candr-bindu
ii. visarg
1+. The Complete Syllabary
5. Numerals
6. Punctuation
Chapter 3 Conjunct Characters
1. Contexts of Conjunct Characters in Hindi
2. Realisation of Conjunct Characters in Hindi
3 . Classes of Conjunct Characters
Class 1. Two similar characters joined
Class 2. Two vargiiy characters joined
Class 3 . Characters joined with antasth characters
i. with following ya
ii. with following va
iii. with preceding or following ra
iv. with preceding or following la
Class 1+. vargiiy characters joined with preceding
or following uusm characters
i. with J" a , sa and sa
ii. with ha
page
57
59
6l
61
6 2
63
61+
65
67
67
67
69
70
70
73
73
71+
71+
75
75
76
76
77
78
79
79
80
80
81
82
82
83
81+
85
C O N T E N T S
xi
MARATHI SECTION
page
91
92
9k
1.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
9 5
9 6
9 6
99
0 0
0 2
0 2
0 3
0 3
0 5
106
0 8
108
1 1
112
1 2
1 2
1 3
118
1 1 8
119
1 1 9
1 2 0
1 2 1
1 2 2
1 2 2
1 2 3
12k
1 2 6
1 2 7
1 2 7
128
129
1 3 0
CONTENTS
xii
GUJARATI
SECTION
page
1 3 5
1 3 6
1 3 8
Consonant Characters
Realisation of akar consonant characters
i. Characters of the vargiiy group
ii. Characters of the antasth group
iii. Characters of the uusm group, and \Q
2 . Vowel Characters and Vowel Signs
i. Vowel Characters
ii. Vowel Signs
Realisation of vowels ' e' and ' o'
Realisation of characters in special contexts
Realisation of ' c^a' and ' qha'
Orthography of 'i* and 'u'
3 . Modifiers
i. anusvar
ii. visarg
1+. The Complete Syllabary
5 . Numerals
6 . Punctuation
Rules of Gujarati Orthography
1.
1 3 8
1 3 9
1 1 + 0
1 1 + 2
1 1 + 3
11+1+
11+1+
1 1 + 5
1 1 + 6
1 1 + 8
1 5 0
1 5 0
1 5 2
1 5 2
1 5 1 +
1 5 5
1 5 6
1 5 6
1 5 6
1 5 7
5 7
5 8
5 9
5 9
6 0
6 l
6 l
6 2
6 2
161+
6 5
6 5
6 6
1 6 7
1 6 8
CONTENTS
BENGALI
xiii
SECTION
page
173
17k
175
177
179
1. Consonant Characters
i. Characters of the vargiiya group
181
Realisation of akar consonant characters
183
ii. Characters of the antastha group
186
iii. Characters of the uusma group
188
Realisation of akar consonant characters in
verbal forms
190
2. Vowel Characters and Vowel Signs
192
i. Vowel Characters
192
ii. Vowel Signs
191+
Realisation of consonant and vowel characters
in special contexts
195
a. Realisation of akar consonant characters
195
b. Realisation of vowel characters in
special contexts
197
Realisation of antastha ya
199
3. Modifiers
201+
i. candra-bindu and anus vara
2 0 1 +
ii. visarga
2 0 6
1 + . The Complete Syllabary
2 0 6
5. Numerals
2 0 7
6. Punctuation
207
Chapter 3. Conjunct Characters
2 0 8
2 2 5
2 2 6
INTRODUCTION
Tne Devanagari Script
The script traditionally referred to as the Devanagari Script
is used in writing Sanskrit and, of the modern, languages of northern
India, Hindi, Marathi and Nepali. The script used in writing Gujarati
is a slightly modified form of the Devanagari script, and the scripts
used in writing Bengali and Panjabi are related to the Devanagari
script, though this relation is apparent in only some of the characters. The writing system, based on the character representing the syllable, is the same for all these languages. However, in order to use
this system for writing the modern languages, which have each developed in their own particular way from the original Sanskrit, a number
of conventions have become necessary in reading from the script, conventions which vary with the special features of each language. The
realisation of the characters as they are used for writing Hindi,
Bengali, Marathi and Gujarati, and the conventions which have become
established in each language, are described in the various sections
of this work.
I N T R O D U C T I O N
this system is adapted for writing Bengali have much in common with
the conventions used in the other modern languages.
An examination
The shorter
preted.
('short' i) and
of the vowels
and
uu
and
rrj instead of
ii
('short' u )
and
u .
1.
See Preface.
in the diphthong
in the diphthong ay ,
av , thus: ay , av .
INTRODUCTION
s-y
and
and
Modifiers :
1
i
r
ii
rr
uu
ay
ov
Consonants:
kh
gh
ch
jh
ji
t*
<i
th
dh
ph
bh
v ;
J*
and
rh
representing
and
I N T R O D U C T I O N
and
c[ .
and
e , o
and
se are used.
1.
2.
I N T R O D U C T I O N
Callig^P^Z
The writing of the Devanagari characters should he practised at
first with a reed or bamboo pen. Such pens are still in use in manyparts of India, and in many schools Indian children are taught first
to write on a large scale with a broadly cut bamboo pen. Writing in
this way will train the eye to recognise easily details of difference
and will train the hand to write a standard form of the characters
with the broad and thin strokes in the right place and proportion.
These pens are cut in the same way as a quill pen, except that the
point is cut to slant in the opposite direction from that of the
quill used for English writing with the tilted axis. The English pen,
when cut for the tilted axis, looks like this from the back:
writing thus:
The pen cut for the Devanagari script looks like this from the back:
writing thus:
The pen should be neld in such a way that the thin line, made by the
cut edge, falls from left to right at an angle of k5 degrees from a
line drawn horizontally across the page. The broad stroke then forms
a right-angle with the thin stroke and crosses the horizontal line of
the page at an angle of i+5 degrees. Care must be taken not to change
the angle of the pen during the writing of curved or rounded strokes,
as this will change the shape and balance of the character.
Some of the typical strokes of the script should be practised
Until good control of the pen, held at the right angle, is established before the characters themselves are written. For example.:
I N T R O D U C T I O N
The use of the broad, pen should be continued until a good style
of handwriting is formed; the introduction of writing with an
ordinary pen, and without sufficient attention to the details of line
and form, often interferes with the formation of a good hand.
In the illustrations given below, which may be used as writing
exercises, the characters are grouped so as to show different combinations of strokes, and to draw attention tosimilarities and to small
but important differences. It will be seen that some of the characters
have an upright stroke, others are curved or rounded, without an upright stroke; but all have the head-stroke, though it is not always
written right across the top of the character. The alignment of the
characters is made by this head-stroke, that is, by the top of the
character, though there is an invisible alignment also by the bottom
of the character. For this reason, it is well to practice writing at
first between two lines; if one line is used, the characters should
be written from the line downwards, not on the line.
The general method of writing the characters is this:
first,
I N T R O D U C T I O N
SANSKRIT
SECTION
C H A P T E R
ARRANGEMENT
OP
THE
SYLLABARY
, are
arranged in the traditional order, they constitute a series of syllables which may be regarded as the basis of the Sanskrit phonological
system. Each character represents a syllable, and is called -*A"ql
(gksorom).
3"*$HloHl
oEn3p=JJT
o .
This vowel,
12
S A N S K R I T
S E C T I O N
^fl^TTT
(kara); for
As the consonant
CD
i>
0s
Voiced
CQ
Voiceless
CONSONANTS with
1
Velar
2
Palatal
3
Cacuminal
5
Labial
Unaspirated
kg
ca
.t?
ta
pa
Aspirated
kha
cha
tha
tha
pha
da
ba
Unaspirated
Aspirated
Nasal
gha
jha
dha
dha
bha
rja
jia
na
ma
ys
ra
la
va
sa
sa
Semi-vowels
Fricatives
Aspirate
ha
Lateral
MODIFIERS
k
Dental
I
a
Nasal
ii
ay
-m
rr
.1
Aspirated
11
-h
uu
av
A R R A N G E M E N T OF T H E SYLLABARY
The character represented "by va
13
Sanskrit.
The following
characters
^-q(spar/ah,'touch')j
(talavya, 'palatal');
T^j[Z=Zf
(muurdhanya,' cacuminal'!) ;
cTToToZT
cfl ^"U.
Labio-dental
(dantavs^hya).
1. This term refers to the area of the roof of the mouth with which
contact is made by the tongue. Consonants of this class are also described as 'cerebral'. As the retroflexion of the tongue is an important feature in the pronunciation of consonants of this class in the
modern languages, the class is described as 'retroflex' in the roman
tables of those languages. Cf. Hindi, p. 5 9 .
SANSKRIT
14
SECTION
(aghosa ),
voiceless, aspirated
- SfJ^STfar
(aghosa),
voiced, unaspirated
- "^TtWrT
(ghosavat^),
voiced, aspirated
nasal
1.
2.
3.'
h.
5.
y(alpaprana )
^TtTcr^ (ghosavat) ,
H^l VI 1^1
CM
(alpaprana)
^T^TTfW
(mahaprana)
^ T ^ l l fo^5 (anunasika 5) ,
(mahapra:na3)
C H A P T E R
CHARACTERS
OP
THE
2
SYLLABARY
a . Conson-
are described as ^ c f t K
16
S A N S K R I T
S E C T I O N
(vergah), representing
the five positions of 'contact', ^Cf^f: (sparJsh), used in the articulation of the plosive consonants.
k9-v9rg9h
35
3>
k9
kh9
gh9
C9
Ch9
Dh9
J19
th9
3h9
dhg
n9
ca-varggh
-|;9-V9rg9h
9
t9-varg9h
t9
r
th9
d9
ph9
b9
*r
pg-varggh
P9
7^
bh9
jhg
mo
The Bombay
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
form of the character for
no
is
17
characters are used in Hindi writing, but the Hindi forms are not
used in Marathi writing, or in Sanskrit books printed in Bombay.
Calligraphy.
All the characters in the above table are written in the way
described in the introductory notes on calligraphy, except the
following three characters:
jh9
*J
*b
jo
*R
to
\>
1
r
\r
\j|
\jf
ri
rT
The writing of the viramoh to indicate the realisation of a consonant character as a consonant without the vowel
is illustrated
by these characters:
<*5
k-
^
t~
c-
^
t-
p-
below, words which are usually written with the modifier known as
fof^'f:
Verbal
roots, in the form in which they are given in grammars and dictionaries, are included in the examples in order to illustrate the writing
of characters with the viramoh.
SANSKRIT
18
SECTION
Reading examples
1. One character words
**<5
^FT
xbti
vrfs
TfiZ
"W
^fcT
^"T
TO^T
3*T
TTUT
3.
TTTT5R
^PTrT
xTCPR
HSR
TcT5F)
cfi-qe
3qv3foR
7Turop5
3^*1
-<Tc5cfi
cf^xf
TT^OFI
"B^rTxr
M^^fflT
'TCTT
cRSFR
*T*TH*T
"q3^*T
eFPTO
* W * B * i r R
^
ya
ra
vSFTCR
^ " ^ ^ r p r
group ( *5yrl*.)
^jJJ*
la
SRFR
Bombay form
va
la
Calligraphy
la : Hindi form ^
Bombay form
^ ^ ^
^7>
and
ii
and rr^"
and 11
of
> va, associated with the pa-vargah, and the vowels u and uu
1. Transcription of examples is given on p.51.
2 . 'standing between.' 3 . This stroke is written from right to left.
U. See below, under 2 . Vowel Characters.
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
These characters are all described as
cf
olpgprang
and
ghossvet.
19
3[-<^|
(dantovsthys).
5f
*T
rT
^TM
cRf
qoT
3.
WtT
c=5^T
STc5
TC
TO
^^*
^5
c*opJT
*T*T^
TSfc55
5*13
^f5T
S^TT
WW
cTC*T
cT^R
*P*cT
Z(V(cl^
*RcT*T
J9
S9
SFPTSoWW
tT$^*??T
group (\53"5EpT )
S9
h9
Calldgraphy
Jg : Hindi form
ha : i.
An older form of
$|
|>
Bombay form
or
is
5j
ii.
41
IT
f
This form is illustrated
2.
3l
1 .
<$
2o
S A N S K R I T
S E C T I O N
thus:
9 , and are
, 89 , with the T 9 - v 9 r g 9 h ;
The character
|T
and
, \B
9 .
Calligraphy of 55
OO
Reading examples
Or
06
55
Tsre
^sr
^Rr
PI
^TST
^7rT
T^r
1#
^ C T
n
5R
^TOcS
opre
H^ST
*pt*t
ttrst
$*5f5
t p ^
-*sth
^ T ^ H
=ToTSr^P*>lT
TfSR"^
H ^ T ^ R ^
5p>^"H
"STTFT^
^TT^T^^T
^TcTTT^
^*m?T*T
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
21
Vowel Characters.
There are fourteen vowel characters in the V9rr|9mala:
w 5
o
3 in
ii
%
Syllabic
The character
form, ^Tf
uu
% K
rr
11
ay
9v
, Wl" and
of
and
S R ^ R ^ ^
r
8v
rr
11
55ft
, o , is 3* .
1
*>
*>
oy
*
5
M\
An older form of
ii
1
22
S A N S K R I T
S E C T I O N
11
, (diirgha).
derived words, and the joining of final and initial vowels in consecutive words in a phrase or sentence, the vowels are grouped thus:
Simple vowels
TJUT'*
(gunah)
(vrddhih)
Examples :
2
^rpri^
ii
uu
rr
ar
al
ay
av
ar
al
nagaram
'TI^Tf^oB
nagarika
cftio/HpJof)
kalpanika
diva
bhuuti
?5
kr
kip
1.
2.
op><v^HI
kalpana
See above, Ch.l., and below,3. i. for the modifier represented by rrj.
See below, ii, for the vowel signs used in these examples.
CHARACTERS OF T H E
SYLLABARY
23
TJ
5\
35
ne character
51
^ft
^ ^ ^sr
if 3^r
3<T
w
-STt^
i^i
3$^
3Tc5
a , has a correspond-
ing vowel sign which may he added to a consonant character to represent a syllable consisting of an initial consonant followed by one
of the vowels
a - av .
As the vowel
5RT
f
% %
ka
ki
kii
ku
kr
krr
kl
kll
ke
kay
ko
kav
oft , are:
kuu
'
SANSKRIT
24
SECTION
Calligraphy
The order of writing the strokes when a vowel sign is added to a
consonant character is illustrated in the following examples:
ka
cb
cbl
ku
cb
kii
cb
3>
<*>l
bhi
ko
oh
ki
!<*>
dhi
I'M
fa
ft
ke
ft
obi
they are written below the mid-point of the lowest curve, thus:
chu
pxn
d^u
djiuu
du
huu
Special forms
ru
ruu
An older form of
is
if
with ^
used to represent
"5^
dr
Jr
^-, and of
^
hr
is
The character
5fJ
, as in
Pis+^irl
, nirrti .
2
Mark of 'separation'.
When an initial
or sflT
See C h . 2 , l o i i i .
2. See C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s 3.iii a-
(avagrohah)^ is
3
'separation'.
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
25
written after the vowel in which the final and initial vowels are coalesced, to indicate the presence of two words in the piece.
The mark
*5T , and
yo - ay am
^\
te - api
yo-yam
, as in these examples:
te- pi
sada - atman
sada
Reading examples^
1. One character words
*'
ft
X
2. Two character words
V*
ft? ^
3Tt
3.
fcT
fa^to
^Tf^r
5*nfr
f^TTcI
t?or
sttct
^ft^R
5u^t=T
facj^T
^ftcr
^fre^r
^ r e
^rf^
irtW
^ff^SBT
|o5cl"
1.
{jfttofc^r
^frf^^T
?5^TTftf5F
^ f i ^ ^ T
a f o ^ T ^
f^"^f%oHT
OTjftf^SFjT
hUiP|F>
*sfa^ftl'+>
SANSKRIT
26
SECTION
3. Modifiers
The two modifiers, known as
^ T * J iPfl I T :
They may,
io
I
orrj
arr)
#>
kQirj
kairj
irrj
iirrj
urrj
kirrj
kiirrj
kurrj
orrj
uurrj
em
eyrrj
kuurrj
kerrj
koyrrj
avrrj
% % #
korrj
kevrrj
Calligraphy
The Qnusvareh is generally added to the character after the vowel
sign has been written and before the headstroke is written to complete
the character.
over the last upright stroke if there is one, and to the right side of
any superscribed vowel sign, for example;
kgrrj
oh
Ob
eft
gang
4||
4jj
itf
dhirrj
1.
f$
'after-sound'.
3
girrj
\i\
bhirrj \M
ftj
R
hsnj
fSf
gerrj
rorrj
|T
Jj
Jf
*i
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
27
yetam
vibhuutim
yogam
In this context it is
"J - q
Examples:
purrjkha (punkha)
lirrjga (linga)
parrjca (panca)
varrjch (vajich)
sirrjj (sip.3)
kuirj^ha (kun^ha)
arrjda (an^a)
pirrjd^a (pin_qa)
51
Jarrjti (janti)
irrjdu (indu)
3%
barrjdhu (bandhu)
karrjpa (kampa)
arrjbu (ambu)
kurrjbha (kumbha)
arrjka (arjka)
VW
jg " J
q -n
rrj - m
28
S A N S K R I T
S E C T I O N
with characters
occurs before
^-("!
, -ante, are usually written by this method and not with the
anusvarah.
The anusvarah is sometimes written to represent -n
compounds formed from the prefix
with R
or T
* e.g. H*T(T
or -m , in
sannata, and
TTHf^"
sammati.
realised as follows:
Before
If ,
ya , as
rj , m , n
^PTt'T
Before
T >
ra , as
Before
oT ,
la , as
^ ,
va , as
; e.g.
or
; e.g.
^fo/i^T
Before
rj , m , n
or
or
; e.g.
rj , m , or
^fo|sanvada,
; e.g.
samvada or savvada
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
29
Ja , as
n , m , n , or v; e.g.
^T"5T
Before "5T >
sa , as
Before
sa , as
n , m , n , or v; e. g.
^FI^IR
Before
^ ,
"f^f^TT
ijf^f
rj , m , n , or v; e. g.
ha , as
"f^^"
antahstha or an uusman character to indicate realisation by nasalising the vowel of the syllable instead of by a nasal consonant,
This sign is called ^ - J - H f^cp>
(anunasika ),
1
\Q*
, (orrj)
Reading examples
a. fifr W
b. ftr
|
ift
^cr
-qff
<Tf
^*t
^TCTCT
ami
1.
"^r
i%i^cr
^TTH
^Tcnri^Tr
HoflH
^ t t
"*?wf^r
^PFCRN
s
3?fcr*r
^Tffc T
'nasal'.
2. See above, under 2.i.
3 . For transcription of
examples, see p. 52. . The lines a, b and c correspond to the notes
given above under 3 i .
L. Gitagovindakavyam, sarga 3 > v . 6 o
SANSKRIT
30
ii. visargah , fcfH'fc
SECTION
ah
ah
ih
cfr
cBT: fcB:
kah
kah
kih
iih
uh
uuh
rrh
eh
ayh
oh
avh
kiih
kuh
kuuh
krh
keh
kayh
koh
kavh
Calligraphy
The visargah is usually added to a character after every other
stroke has been made, including the head-stroke.
e
-g- ch
ch)
cfit
CWT:
malah
kavih
guruh
kaveh
gunayh
bhanoh
gavh
as in r P T i ^
tapahsu, tapassu.
malah
kavih
1. 'emission of breath'
guruh
kaveh
gunayh
bhanoh
gavh
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
Reading examples
ofi:
7J-CTT:
3*
^ffT:.
^ftrj
TT|:
f^h
f ^ '
^gfo
^r^fq-rT:
.^P ^T*
^mtf^rTTi
:
^ife ^gfr
31
TO^t
^rerr^
^rw-.
^fcTtsf^oR:
%
ffi
w : o t > w t
cP^fsTT:
^rffcr^tfrrW^cr^^T^
S A N S K R I T
32
S E C T I O N
*
3?
at
5
3
%
55
5. The Devanagari numerals
Hindi forms:
^
1
=1
Bombay forms: ft
1
6,
vs
<3
5
*o
C
8
1 0
1 0
Punctuation
In prose writing, the end of a sentence is marked with a vertical stroke of the same height as the characters.
C H A P T E R
CONJUNCT
CHARACTERS
A character
k- ko
kka
rj- ka
nko
tt
v 9
ii. If the first character has an upright stroke, this stroke may be
omitted, and the first part of the first character is joined to the
second character by the head-stroke, thus:
n- da
ndo
g- gs
ggo
and ^
of ,
t- ps
tpa
n- mo
nms
^.
C- C9
j-
CCS
v3T ^
j - J9
V
^ o r w f
j J9
SANSKRIT
34
SECTION
ddha
d-bho
dbha
t~ y
ty
n_
"y
&
m o
me
iv. Some characters are written in a special form when joined with
other characters, for example:
/- ve
JVG
r- ths
The characters
rtho
g- ro
jjf
gre
J"- re
/re
, representing
eluded in the syllabic series from a very early date, though no conjunct characters are included in the syllabary.
Calligraphically
these three characters are not formed by joining two distinct charact
ers, but they are considered in this work under the appropriate
classes of conjunct characters because they represent syllables consisting of two consonants and the vowel
9 .
^5
t- k9
3~
k 8
d 8
^
d 9
<i- bre
ci^T
dbr9
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS
3 5
~Q
* X
7^
t - m - yo
tmyo
ST
*v*
b - dh - va
bdhva
"grf
r - s - \ - ya
rstye
The general rules already given for the order of strokes in writing a character apply also to the conjunct characters.
The vowel
ktyu
oj-
o|-
stvi
I*-
\J
VR^|
RJYAIRJ
2.
o|- ^|
r
IVc!
f?r|
\rM\
VTIJF"
iccha
<HfiT:
<%PT:
WfT^
agnih
ksiprah
brahmen
^
Jlokah
strii
bhakta
gam-ya
gamya
labh-tva
labdhva
36
S A N S K R I T
S E C T I O N
diva
dayvyam
Juura
Javryam
ut-tama
uttama
dur-guna
ut-gamah
durguna
vi-adhih
udgamah
abhi-asah
vyadhih
abhyasah
vac-maya
vanmaya
sat - masah
sanmasah
rc - vedah
rgvedah
/riimadbhagavadgiita
Jreyo
hi
qT^TccF>
jjianamabhyasa j jjianaddhyanam
c ^ ^ T r * T P T T - * H I Pel
vijisyate,
^ ^ T ^ c R H II
ft
II
dhyanatkarmaphalatyagastyagacchantiranantaram. 12.
1. Bhagavadgita, Ch.l2.v.l2.
C O N J U N C T CHARACTERS
37
"<[ >
or b. following
a. preceding oT^
or b. following oT
ST ,
or
; or b. following
, "Cf or^T
SANSKRIT
38
SECTION
R4
M
-kks
M
-gghs
-ggs
-kkhs
"SSI
-CCS
-cchs
-tts
-tths
1
"tt
-dds
jjhs
-ddhs
-nns
<s><s{
-pphs
"PPS
-bbhs
-bbs
-mms
ocf
3
-lis
-yys
-SS&
-vvs-^
Alternative forms
-sss
UU|
-CCS
- DJs
> T
The characters
-jjhs
and
-sss
&
-nn
-lis
The
snf^r
^tNt*
^b^rstz:
"q%oRr
3TTIT
^Pm
3^*T
*rs$PT:
^arfrk
^fto
(f^5T)
ftgfrr^
o7|
ff|T
^FTtf:
$MI^
faquui
"r^aT
ftrT
^TT
^f^:
(^^5^]
ftWoT:
^TS|s
cT^^
^TCTO
^gfaBT*
CONJUNCT
Class 2.
CHARACTERS
ko - CO
- Z
ko -\t?
- cT
ko - to
Wi - T
ko - P
CO - t
-kto
-tko
-tkho
-go;
-d^g
-gdh
-a^gh
-kto
-tko
-ktho
-tkho
-gd
-dgo
-gdh
-dgh
-kpo
-pko
-kph
-pkho
-gba
-bg
-gbh
-bgh
-pcho
-pco
-djh
-^.DO
-b jh
-b jo
tt
2
-tto
-tto
-tthe
-ttho
-dd
-dcje
-qdh
-ddh
-tP
-Pt
-tpho
-pfho
-db
-bo;
-dbh
-bdh
-tpo
-pto
-tpho
-ptho
-dbo
-bd
-dbh
-bdh
- T
- po
- H
to - po
-tcho
-{co
Z - rT
- to
-ktho
-gjh
-kcho
-kco
CO - p
ghosovst
ghos 0
SANSKRIT
40
SECTION
f
-nke
-nkh
TO
TO
-nt
-nt
-mpa
f
-ngho
^3T
-jice
-jicho
-P-J
-njh
-nta
-nth
-nd
-ndh
TO
-n<l
h 9
-mb
-mpha
-mbh
Alternative forms
Tig
-jijh
-i].t
- I
lt
n 9
TTJJ
-ncjh
"^TA
ft^rfrt:
pstsnti^
1^n%.
vinsnjtih or vinntih3
^Trt
lsbhsnte^
njte or nte^
-cji
jn
^
~th:n
The character
-djhn
-tn
?
-thn
-dn^ -dhn
-pm
-bhm
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS
conjunct characters.
"beginning with
41
and
R '
-nbho
^
-nko
-ngo
-nco
-n jo
-nphe
-nbho
, on account
*T .
sR
-no
kne
-T
-me
-bhno
-kno
W
-khno
gno
koM
71?
-kmo
-khmo
-gmo
-tmo'
-dme
-dhmo
ghno
-ghmo
-pne
-cms
"9
-bno
-bhno
-jmo
-dmo
g*r
-nno
-nmo
*pt
-nno
-nmo
-nmo
?r
-mno
mno
" O T , e.g.
" U T T -g^o
VTTf
-bhno
T^Jf
-rang
-ipio .
SANSKRIT
42
SECTION
Reading examples
i.
ciicmh
oTT6FTB^TH
^3$rh
i^t^r-
^CTfe
^Tf:
fi^T
^TT^T
ITFR
iii. a.
^ f T ^ f o
1.
2.
^mr
^TTFtfrt
f^HT*?.
^F>*T
<jfu&
^FrD
IfTfa T
ftirw
taring
b. ^arcr
5^T5F5T
%^TfrT
?r#q
iv.
^rr-sF^t^r
STTf^
^STTf
^S^fW:
^f^SSFfvT:.
^F^fT
^ ^ T : B ^ W
TpSJcfi
^=3R
KVTT
^ S T :
^STlfc*
^TI^R
^J?:
^rfrt
W W
tst^^t^
oB^o^TtTT
TTf:
-q-fferT:
cRTO:
^Tlfrt
^ ^ f e r r r
- s p ^ ^ f T ^ -
^SJT
ll.a. ^ | f :
^RT:
w ^ f c w
m f ^ R
^f?^ft
f^TT*T:
^ngj: ^iRf:
WTTO:
^f^T:
^FiR
^ T ^ :
WlfrT
ff*T
TcT
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS
43
^5
kyo
khyo
,gy
ghyo
-dj
-djiy
s
-gy
-ty
-t y
TO
cy
-chy
jyo
jhy
ty
thy
dy
dhy
n y
nyo
TO
py
-phyo
hy
hhy
my
(yyo)
-ry
vy
ly
TO
TO
/ye
hy
sy
-sys
5qr
-nny
-tty
-tmy
-pty
-gdhy
-dhhy
-hjy
Reading examples.
3^*F?frf
oFjq-^^
^I^FT
^ f r
HvqT^
#^^T:
W c S ^
W ^ F T
^arrS^T
*T-pT:
f%^T
f ^ T T
rT^fcTH.
^ T E W
^F*T
% ^ W
W
X
cZTFHT
^<TO
^TTfTc^R.
SANSKRIT
44
SECTION
5J* .
TO
khvo
kve
-tvo
-thvs
TO
gvo
ghvo
-nvs
TO
-d^vs
f
-djivs
-nvo
-bhvo
-mvo
dvs
-chvs
CVS
jhvs
TO
TO TO
dvs
-thvs
tvs
dhvs
nvs
ocj
-tvo
-pvo
TO
yvs
TO
TO
Ivo
(-wo)
-rvo
and ^ do not occur in this series.
hvs
svs
svs
preceding another
, vis .
o^f
-ttvo
-rvvs
TO
^
-cchvs
-ktvs
TO
-dvys
-bdhvs
TO
-gdhys
Reading examples.^
oT^p
^ff^cT
^ ^ T
1.
2.
U.
6.
^"?r^T
"HMI
Tf|T
Tf*T
5F53T^T*i;
o^oTr ^ T F ^ T
^
ft*5R
"^TWr W ^ t T
r^rftrT
^F*ft:
3%5f
^TPJcft
%TTfcT
^c^T--
^Hl"
TTToWT
VJI;cUh
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS
iii. Characters joined with preceding
a.
45
or following
is to be realised.
This
repheh in this form may be written with any character, but it does
not occur with
or
-*
-rko
-rco
-r^o
-rts
-rpo
-ryo
Xf ,
-r/o
,
TTf ,
\jf ,
-rho
?T >
C$ >
in Marathi writing.
**f ^
-rgge
and
-rjjo
Examples:
-rtte
-rddho
-rmms
-ryye
-rvve
bF
-rka
f&
-rki
-rkii
-rku
-rke
-rkey
-rko
-rkev
ciF
f<l
-rkairj
-rkirr)
^
-rkiiirj
-rkuirj
fc
-rkerq
<fc
-rkeyrrj
-rkevm,
|J . as in the word
Pl^fci: .
46
S A N S K R I T
S E C T I O N
<*>
ft
t*
rkii
ebl
rko
o^l
rkiir]
Kl
*T
rkovrrj
ft
is sometimes
-rho
SB
gr
kr
5
-tro3
HI
-cjr
5T
-ghr
-nro
-chr
tr
thr
<*
jr
dr
ST
dhr
-nr
sT
pro
br
bhr
mr
vr
Jr
sr
hr
Examples of conjunct characters of Classes 1. to 3.ii. with 3.iii.
TO
TO
TO
-ktre
-tpr
-rty
5?T
-dry
-rdhv
rdr
-ntry
-rdhny
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS
47
Reading examples''"
a. rp:
^ T ^
^TT-
OPFFQ"
cFF>fc
3>f&
fl^T
SRRF^oR
W&fr
^
^TT
3Tl
^ c T
JFF^FEW
^T^T:
^^flT
^ H ^ R
7l1*?cT
^ofa
^ J :
^Tft^PT
3$R*T
TTft^
-qrPSETc^T
cT or following
-Ike
TOT
-Us
b.
TO
TO
c h
TO
TO
TO
-lge
-lpe
-lpho
-Ibe
-lbhe
-lme
TO
-lse
Vedic
-Ihe
-Ihe
~%
kl
gls
mlo
vie
-chle
5?T or 3 r T
Jle
pie
-<|lo
ble
bhle
his
ftsfo;
48
S A N S K R I T
S E C T I O N
rfj
-tplo
-tkl
Reading examples.
^F^T
SWT
xrc^J
-Ibhy
^1^BH"
JPTFT
^c*TW
T^^T
f^>-
^Tcb:
-cchlo
^|pr
'fR^r
T%*JTE: T T ^ - ^ q :
^^T:
tcRitf^rf^r
*T^
IIW
>
7T > T
FJ
-Jks
*r
TO
s-
1.
3.
J"ne
-sks
sko
-Jcho
-J*c
T3f
skho
-sjo
TO
J"pe
Jm
TOT
sthe
TO
TO
-sn
FT
TFT
sto
-?P8
stho
sno
-sphe
7
spo
-sm
TO? TO
sph
sm
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS
b.
or
following
The f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r s
only in e x t e r n a l
Js
another
character.
occur i n t h i s s e r i e s ,
-k/o
-n/o
so
*
~t
-kso
The c h a r a c t e r
TO
TO
-nso
-pso
-nso
-pso
TO
-nso
S 8
-tso
an e a r l y d a t e , and i s n o t c a l l i g r a p h i c a l l y
the order of words i n d i c t i o n a r i e s ,
p l a c e d ^after words b e g i n n i n g w i t h
stro
?t
f
~?t
r 9
v 9
In
are
h.
c^T TFT
ksi^o
-ksm o
-stvo
-tstho
HTO
TP?
7 ^
stryo
-tsmyo
-rsty
-rtsnye
kso
T^T
from
3
f}
TTO
Calligraphy:
series
a conjunct c h a r a c t e r .
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s of C l a s s e s 1. - 3. w i t h C l a s s
"?
TOT
-n/o
kso
occurring
TOT
or
"R
some
sandhi.
s
*
so
49
, Bombay form -
f.
fcj
-tsno
$J
Reading e x a m p l e s ^
a. W * T * k
f^RoT
3^C=T
^ C R ; *tW
fi^T
^f>TT
T^ferT
S T F ^ TcT5q"
^cT
f^rfcT:
1. Bombay form.
2. T h i s c o m b i n a t i o n u s u a l l y becomes g".^jf
3. C f . n o t e on $T , C 1 . 2 . i i . b .
k. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 5^.
s
^ft
SO
S A N S K R I T
S E C T I O N
ii.
onunasiko c h a r a c t e r s
a.
and If .
b.
p r e c e d i n g *tj , ^
following
^.
Reading e x a m p l e s .
and ? f
"j?" or f o l l o w i n g
-hno
hno
-rjho
-nho
-hmo
^fjfrt
^f|:
|^
ffTfPST
Tn^fTrT:
^W^^I^HI-^^^^^T^f^TrTr
f^^wmsTT^I^r^sRWfR;
1, For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 5 h .
Uo BhagavadgTta, c h . l , v . 2 6 .
6
ibid.,
ch.5?v.8.
2
5o
7 .
[PTfTrT:]
\\^\\
II w i
^SF*Tu%
R i g v e d a , 1.
3. i b i d . ,
i b i d . , ch.3v. 2 5 .
NTtisatakam, v . l i 8 .
TRANSCRIPTION
T r a n s c r i p t i o n , o f R e a d i n g Examples
Chapter 2 .
1. i .
do
ke
bh];
chsd
pd dhsn
jhsg jcj
gsmeke
dhe"|;ok
dho
bho
jeget
kp"(;
chedonm
gemonem
to
jo
cei]k
bhjk
pnnm
p"(;hnem
ye
leve
lobh
jl
yev
khsre
dhore
yemevot
/ere
set
seh
Jo^he
sorele
y/s
ved
ly
bo
jhsr
jhsro
co
kh
oth.
uuh
ed
iiset
2 o i i <
duuro
gyre
pitr
otu
v/
ks
p|hk
khjk
dsmsth
pdk
vere
ran
j"|;hr
nsysn
c|
hs
/s
' ron
phl
v"|;h
rsth
d^emsr
l"|;bh
kh
rs
hr
/path
hrk
kp"|;vecenm
jhs
hy
kh
csrsne
vcr
pdkml
jshst
-vys
s e p h e l e srs
is
ut
edho
i i J
1
vm
uuhenem
nii
kr
bhuu
chi
b h i i to
kr/
mem
iiti
go
n
ddh dem
gh"|; gn
smy
per/
vs
jhss
ii
eke
uche
okh
rsobh
gey
nev
ram
pevl
duugi
etev
sr
hoy
uu
in
ot
evm
rn
rc
oyn
evsdhm
da
bhii
ji
/rr
cor
tin
kip
drcjh
b h i i t i hrdi
rtu
iti
J*eve
bhss
bshel
/lbh
rbhs h s t s k
de/eroth
/ke^em
svys
kslshsm
/ssnsm
j e l o c e r e s noved/ekm
shgmnm
kmolovdn
2 i.
c{
jh
khoc
pc]h
th
blo
r"|;
dhsvol
bhsvst
grlm
t
ke/o
kl/
/r{
ghn
chg
gh"|;k
ksthsm
lo
bhsysm
cpl
no
tho
n"|;nm
ksthsnsm
bhsnonem
jenopode
dhonmd
jhnjhnm
jhi\ jhsr^sm
vsysnsm
l . i i i o s
po
cho
phsn.
bot
methon
gr|k
re
lvn
legate
mo
gho
kcj m"(;h
ph"|;o poth
l.ii.
terole
nskhere
pho
bo
/t/s
d//tm
v
rr
d
y/o
rdh
uucjh i h e
us
udon
rnm
yssmss
upkrnem
gov
/ii
dos
pur
guru
uuru
pey
dr
/rt
phen
vrtha
rsi
me
hi
dhrt
mvl
/i/u
enii
duu
hr
ruuc|h
krrt
setu
ii"Le
52
SANSKRIT
bhuusita
kumarii
vidhatru
SECTION
vijesa
upaya
vaybhava p i t r r n p a v r u s a r u c i r a
jhatiti
thalinii
rirusita
avsadhi
kaykeyii
ayhika
c^halin
surabhi
khacjika
he^ate
bhavmika
jhirika
ekakin
hrsike/a
itihasa
kav/aleya
visuucika
pavranika
devanagarii
anunasika
avpanisada
upajiivika
avpade/ika
upanive/ika
avpanayika
ko-pi
rte-pi
ya J"o-paya J*a
3.i.
kin] marrj sukharrj harirr) mrtair) tanum, shorn evarrj rsiinarrj
cjirnba panjcju
layrrjgam
djiumdhi
jrrnbh
jharrjjha
kirrjcit
kavmteya
sarrjyamana
sairjvat
mairjsa
janjyu.
sainruuc|ha
samliina
arrjhati
tamahair) h r d i
sairjgatamani Jarrj bhr/air) ramayami
kirn v a n e - n u s a r a m i
t a m i h a kinj v r t h a
vil9pami
3 . i i . kgh
chgh
t
jhah
ayh
oh
uuh
rh
navh
sah
gunah
dhrtih
bahuh
n i t eh
nrpayh
viduh
Jrn^ih
purusah
manahsu
hivihsu
dhenubhi h
vi/esatah
amjata h
arrjtahkaranam
samaduhkhasukhah
Junah/epah
jagatohitah
mato-dhikeh
tejorrj-Jsh
behevoirj-buvegah
yogomayasomavrteh
garrjgataranjgahima.fiikaraj'iitalan i
jayadevapanjcjitakaveh.
pan_cjitanarrj sama je-parrjc(ita mavnarr) b h a j e y u h
n
2.
i.
v a k c a l a v a k c h a l am p r t h a g j a n a h vagjha"|;iti
v a k ^ i i k a s"|;kon
s a t k h e t a k a m vagc^ambarah khac^gah v a g d j i s v k a t e dvid^ghora b h a k t i h utka"|;a
uktham
utkhata
hrdgata
sadguna
dagdha
udgha"(;aka
vakpa^u
vakphalam k a k u p k h a l u p r t h a g b h a v a h kakubguruh kakubghora s a t . c a r a n a h
satjchavih sad^jah s a d ^ j h a ^ i t i
apcarah k a k u p c h a v i h kubja k a k u b j h a ^ i t i
sacjdevah sacjdha s a t p s t i
f/up-tiika
^atphana sacjbahu kakup"|;hakkurah
abc|imbha
Jabdah
sacjbhaga
labdha
kakubcjhavkate
bhagavadgiita
utpanna
sarrjyukta
satphalah
adbhuta
g u p t a udbodhaka
udbhavah
madbhakta
buddhiyukta
sacchabdah
TRANSCRIPTION
53
ii.a.
gijkgh Jgijkhgh lirjggm sgijghgh s s j i c s y a h vajicha g p j i i r g h j h g n j h a
ghui\t9h k9i\th8h pgi\cjitgh ^huijdjiih g n t g h p g n t h g k g s u n d g r g indhgh
ksmpgng gumphgti
sgmbgndhgh argmbhgh pgrjktih
grunddha
b.
yacjia jnangm he-|;h:nati hedjiinati rgtngm m9thna b u d h n a t i papmgn
tgjpeys
sgjijjia
sgrrjjjia
vi/esgjjig
jijnasu
i i i . a.
udgrjbhih
mghankgvih
drunphuh
drunbhuh
b.
r k i p rugrig g r b h n a t i
Jsknoti
cgkhnutuh
agnih
vighng
mrcjnati a p n o t i
sbnabhgh rukmii^ii
vagmin vgcmih
gjmgh kudmglg
atmgn
pgdma
dhmatg
drbhmgs
dgdhmgv
iv.
diijnaggh
vaijmgyg
dvirvnalgh
S9i\masgh
jgnmgn
rgmiiati
rrmatg
C l a s s 3.
i.
vekygm k h y a t g vgyragygm J l a g h y g udgrjygj'gh c y u t g vapchyg j y o t i s
ujjhygti
kapQ^ysn!
J"a-|;hygm
jad^ygm
gvadhyg
puipram
tyajyg
pgthyg v i d y a dhyangm k s n y a
apyg
riphygte
gbyonih
gbhyasgh
sgvmygm dhgyrygm gmuulyg
vyuudjig
dr/yg
mgmisygh r g h g s y g
hygs
sgynygsyg
sgnnyasgh sgrrjnyasgh c i n t y g buddhya t g j j y o t i s
vgydggdhygm mahatmygm
bhgktya kgvbjygm sghrdbhygh b h g g g v g n v y g k t i b
evgmetgdygthatthg
guhygmgdhyatmgsgrrjjpitgm
g j p g h sukhgmaradhygh s u k h g t g r g m a r a d h y g t e
vijesgjjigh
i i . k v g c i t pgkkvanngm akhvoh p g v e d g h l g g h v i i u c c h v a s g h u j j v g l g u j j h v g
Igf/vgh y g d n g t v a sgcjvidhg
drcjhvgm J"rr|ygn t v s r i t g
prthvii
udvigng
dhvgnih
g n v i t g apva gbvahgngrrr r i b h v g n cgmvoh y v a g u l i i s g r v g s g r v v g n g l v g h
i i j v g r g h v i / v s s v g k k g t e g n u s v a r g h h v e v i h v g l g vidhvgrrjsgh dvgndvgh
tgttvgm
dugdhva I s b d h v a u k t v a davna e t g d d h v a v l i n a t i
gravida prarjvg/gh
tygktva--tmgj"uddhye
p u i p r g k r t a r r j l l o k a n u s i t v a J a j v g t i i h sgmah
i i i . a , tgrkg h muurkhs vgrggh v g r g i i y g d i i r g h g Jarrjgg c g r c a m u u r c h i t g
arjungh n i r j h g r g h
dardhygm v g r i p h k g r t r v y g r t h g durdgyvgm grdhg mgnurnamg grpgr^gm d u r bglg ggrbhitg
uurmih kgrmmgn dharmikg p g r y g n t g pgrygrrjtg s u u r y g h d u r l g b h g
puurvg
ssrw
dgr/gnsm
rrniurdhni
rmiurdhnyadhayatmgngh n g y r r t i i
durbuddhsyryuddh
Jvetsyrhsysyryukte
v e d s y j n a d h y a y s n s y r n
dangyrng C9
b , vikrmh agrhah J i i g h r g p r a i j r a t r i i krcchr vgjrgm
psv^rgh
f g t r u h drgvygm
dhruv prytnh premna brniv b h r a t r ngrnrg v r s j s h J u j r u u s a
srgjva
h r g s v g hrsv
h r s y hirrjsrg Jraddhg ardr
ardr
d a r i d r y g m daridrygm
srrjhriir]
etgcchrutva
digvrtm
sgtjtrirrjjg
ytprmai]m
jmbvamrle
SANSKRIT
54
SECTION
iv.
u l k a phslgta s v s l p
lpspran g u l p h i t ulb
prggslbhg
hlj"bdh
hlsndhih
V9lh
praglbhym
j"[hu
mi'Lhuse
klej"h gl9V pl9V9 p i p l u h
bling k s k u b h l a b h s h m l e c c h s h
vlinati
J"lokh
Jles9h
sihlsh
hladste
ucchlskh
utklej"h
utplsv
psresarrj
cetarrjsi p r g t i d i v s s g m a r a d h y g
bghu ha
prssadsrrj kirrj neturrj v i / s i
hrdsy
prsnne
tvsyysntsh
svymuditcintamnigune
vimuktsh
snklph k i m s b h i l s s i t s i r j
k l e J k l i l m
pusysti
ri9 t e
C l a s s h.
i.a.
aj*crym
pr/nh
Jm Jru
pusksl
bleskm
srstih
krsn
jyes-f/h
sthyuutg
puspsm nisph! uusman Jlesma ssrrjskrtg s k h s l i t b h r o s j
stsbdh
sthitih
strii
ntshsth s n i g d h 9 sprs ); s p h u u r t i h bhgsmg J"res"|;htvm / c y u t drstjva
drrjs"|;ra varsney
nmoste-stu
-
g r h n a t i v s h n i h h n u t e brahmen p r a n h s s t s h pranghsth i s t . a n b h a n h i
HINDI
SECTION
C H A P T E R
ARRANGEMENT
OF
THE
SYLLABARY
The Devanagari S c r i p t i s u s e d i n w r i t i n g H i n d i ( ^ P ^ t
arrangement of t h e c h a r a c t e r s
Sanskrit arrangement.
in the syllabary
is
) and t h e
t h e same a s
Some of t h e c h a r a c t e r s a r e u s e d o n l y i n
S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , b u t most o f
them may b e f o u n d i n l i t e r a r y
Some of t h e c h a r a c t e r s a r e m o d i f i e d f o r r e p r e s e n t i n g s o u n ds
i n P e r s i a n and A r a b i c
The s c r i p t
writing
texts.
occurring
loanwords.
is usually referred
t o as
sn^TsTtST
can be u n d e r s t o o d by a c h i l d ' .
Each c h a r a c t e r
( e k s o r ) , and t h e s y l l a b i c
is
'character-series').
the
series
called
(balabodh) ,
is called
cflffHIo'JI
^'T^lT
(vornomala,
The t e r m s u s e d b y H i n d i grammarians t o r e f e r
the s c r i p t a r e s i m i l a r t o t h o s e u s e d i n S a n s k r i t ,
i o n of t h e c h a r a c t e r s
i n Hindi d i f f e r s
t h e s e terms a r e u s e d i n t h i s
section
Sanskrit
r e a l i s e d w i t h the vowel
of t h e c h a r a c t e r s
the difference
between the
in
^SPqjR'^
(oksorom),
foTTT'R:
'SFrTYfSr
Ch.l.
Hindi.
this
(okser)
(viramoh) ,
fcfTPT
(viram)
(antahstha),
3T^cT**T
(antasth)
c h a p t e r shows t h e arrangemen t
tran-
SWGJIT
The t a b l e g i v e n b e l o w i n t h i s
Hindi
o ,
terms
u s e d i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n and t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g terms u s e d i n
Sanskrit
to
realisat-
i n t h e H i n d i f o r m , and a r e
but as the
somewhat from t h e
system i n r e s p e c t of c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s
section:
'that
of
The s o u n d s o c c u r r i n g i n A r a b i c
58
HINDI
SECTION
and P e r s i a n l o a n w o r d s , and t h e i n t e r v o c a l i c r e a l i s a t i o n of
characters r e a l i s e d i n i t i a l l y as
t h e roman n o t a t i o n a s
c|e
and
cjhe , a r e r e p r e s e n t e d
in
follows:
the
the v o i c e l e s s
velar
5f5
fricative,
j , f o r t h e v o i c e d v e l a r f r i c a t i v e , TT
z , f o r t h e v o i c e d d e n t a l f r i c a t i v e , yT
f
, for the v o i c e l e s s l a h i a l
fricative,
r , rh , f o r t h e r e t r o f l e x f l a p p e d c o n s o n a n t s
N a s a l i s a t i o n of v o w e l s i s shown by t h e s u p e r s c r i p t
and
~ .
As t h e D e v a n a g a r i s y s t e m of w r i t i n g i s s y l l a b i c ,
and t h e
charact-
e r s i n t h e s y l l a b a r y r e p r e s e n t s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g e i t h e r of a v o w e l
or of a c o n s o n a n t f o l l o w e d by t h e v o w el
each consonant w i t h t h i s vowel.
consonant c h a r a c t e r ,
'inherent'
shows
T h i s v o w e l , when r e a l i s e d w i t h a
i s u s u a l l y r e f e r r e d to i n E n g l i s h t e x t s as
the
vowel .
1
The s e r i e s of v o w e l s
u
o , t h e roman t a b l e
includes
'short'
'short'
ii
'short'
o t h e r words i n w h i c h t h e
'short',
i s made i n s p e e c h .
vowels are w r i t t e n as
'short'
or t h e
Ch.l.
or t h e
'long'
or ' l o n g '
the
distinguishvowel,
and
but
In t r a n s c r i b i n g e x a m p l e s,
o r t h o g r a p h y , and n o t i n r e l a t i o n t o
1. See S a n s k r i t ,
'short'
some
vowe l and o t h e r s w i t h
There a r e c e r t a i n p a i r s of words w h i c h a r e
ed i n meaning by t h e w r i t i n g of t h e
'no d i s t i n c t i o n
uu . T h e s e p a i r s of v o w e l s o c c u r i n H i n di w o r d s ,
words b e i n g a l w a y s w r i t t e n w i t h t h e
'long' vowel.
these
in accordance w i t h Hindi
' l e n g t h ' of s p o k e n v o w el
sounds.
ARRANGEMENT OF T H E SYLLABARY
59
Hindi S y l l a b a r y i n Roman N o t a t i o n
1
Velar
Voiceless
Voiced
P l o s i v e s
CONSONANTS w i t h
Unaspirated
ka
Aspirated
Palatal
Retroflex
kh
cho
Unaspirated
go
Aspirated
gh
(rj)
Nasal
tha
th
ph
c|2
do
jha
dha
dh
bh
na^"
no
s^
yo
Voiceless
Voiced
Labial
(p)
Semivowels.
k
Dental
va
Fricatives
z
Aspirate
VOWELS
MODIFIERS
Nasal -
ii
rrj
and
Notes on t h e s y l l a b l e s marked
sent t h e uvular p l o s i v e ,
of
av
Aspirated - h '
1 - 7 i n t h e above
1. The c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t i n g t h e s y l l a b l e
2.
ka
table:
i s modified t o repre-
qa .
The c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g t h e s e t w o s y l l a b l e s a r e m o d i f i e d t o
r e p r e s e n t t h e m e d i a l and f i n a l
r e a l i s a t i o n of these
characters
60
HINDI
SECTION
as f l a p p e d s o u n d s , w r i t t e n as
3.
The c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g
single characters
characters,
r
no
and
and
rh
jio
in the
transcription.
are not w r i t t e n
i n H i n d i , "but o n l y i n c o m b i n a t i o n w i t h
as
other
i l l u s t r a t e d below i n Chapter 3 .
h. The two c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g
no
and
S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , and do n o t o c c u r
5. The c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t e d by
dental a r t i c u l a t i o n ;
6. These s y l l a b l e s
vo
so
occur only
in
initially,
or, i n i t i a l l y ,
as a b i l a b i a l
plosive.
a r e w r i t t e n by m o d i f y i n g o t h e r c h a r a c t e r s
r e p r e s e n t s o u n d s somewhat s i m i l a r i n
xa
kho ;
ye
go ;
7. T h is v o w e l , s y l l a b i c
fe
za
labio-
which
articulation:
with the character for
with the character for
, o c c u r s o n l y i n a few S a n s k r i t
pha;
jo
loanwords.
C H A P T E R
CHARACTERS
OP
THE
2
SYLLABARY
The c h a r a c t e r s of t h e D e v a n a g a r i S c r i p t u s e d i n w r i t i n g Hindi
are t h o s e g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n , w i t h t h e t e r m s w h i ch a r e u s e d
by Hindi grammarians i n r e f e r r i n g t o them and t o t h e sor.nds which t h e y
represent.
The method of w r i t i n g t h e c h a r a c t e r s i s t h a t d e s c r i b e d
t h e I n t r o d u c t i o n , and i n t h e n o t e s on t h e c a l l i g r a p h y o f
c h a r a c t e r s as t h e y a r e g i v e n i n t h e
special
tables.
Consonant C h a r a c t e r s ,
in
are
Sanskrit
and M o d i f i e r s .
1
1. Consonant C h a r a c t e r s .
The c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s
characters,
'ontesth
characters,
and 'uusm' c h a r a c t e r s .
2
ant c h a r a c t e r s , a s t h e y a r e g i v e n i n t h e s y l l a b a r y ,
s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g of an i n i t i a l
by t h e vowel
^T^RTT
consonant,
. Characters r e a l i s e d
'vergiiy*
The c o n s o n -
are r e a l i s e d
or s e m i - v o w e l ,
as
followed
i n t h i s way a r e d e s c r i b e d a s
( k a r ) . The r e a l i s a t i o n o f a c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r w i t h o u t
this
is
i n d i c a t e d i n t h e s c r i p t by w r i t i n g a d i a g o n a l s t r o k e , known a s
the
1. See S a n s k r i t , C h . l . f o r t h e u s e o f t h i s t e r m .
2 . See S a n s k r i t , Ch.2.
R e f e r e n c e s are g i v e n throughout t h i s chapter
t o t h e d i v i s i o n s and s u b - d i v i s i o n s w i t h t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g numbers
i n Chapter 2. of t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n .
62
HINDI
foTTW ( v i r a m )
SECTION
a t t h e f o o t of t h e c h a r a c t e r t h u s , of) , k -
cT , t -
i n some r e s p e c t s from t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s
Sanskrit.
The f o l l o w i n g n o t e s may be r e g a r d e d a s g e n e r a l
guiding
A final
in
characters
detail.
akar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h
zero-
v o w e l , e x c e p t i n a few S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s .
b.
A final
c h a r a c t e r s , or a f i n a l
3
okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d e d by a
c h a r a c t e r w r i t t e n w i t h the onusvar r e p r e s e n t i n g a n a s a l
a n t ^ , i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h an
c.
conson-
o-glide.
A m e d i a l okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l ,
w i t h an o - g l i d e ,
or
i n c e r t a i n c o n t e x t s , a s , f o r i n s t a n c e , when s u c h
a c h a r a c t e r o c c u r s a s t h e s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r of a word o f t h r e e or
more c h a r a c t e r s and t h e f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r i s w r i t t e n w i t h one o f
the vowel s i g n s 5 .
c h a r a c t e r s are d i s c u s s e d i n
d.
detail.
When an okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i s t h e f i n a l
verbal base, i t
c h a r a c t e r of a
or w i t h an
o - g l i d e , b e f o r e t h e a d d i t i o n of f o r m a t i v e p a r t i c l e s c o n s i s t i n g
a consonant c h a r a c t e r w i t h a vowel
of
sign.
In t h e t r a n s c r i p t i o n o f e x a m p l e s of Hindi w o r d s , f i n a l
okar
c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or w i t h an - g l i d e ,
1. See S a n s k r i t , Ch.2..1.
2. kar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h
z e r o - v o w e l , a s d e s c r i b e d below i n n o t e s a. - d . , a r e , h o w e v e r , n o t
w r i t t e n w i t h t h e v i r a m , which i s u s e d m a i n l y i n w r i t i n g c e r t a i n
Sanskrit loanwords.
3 See b e l o w , Oh.3.
h. See b e l o w , 3 i . n u s v a r ,
5. See b e l o w , 2 . i i .
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
are t r a n s c r i b e d w i t h o u t
63
o , and m e d i a l okar c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d
, t'
, p'
in
transcription.
Characters of t h e v o r g i i y g r o u p .
The f i r s t group o f c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s c o n s i s t s of
c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d a s s y l l a b l e s w i t h an i n i t i a l p l o s i v e
f o l l o w e d by t h e vowel
e s , or cT ^
e .
twentyfive
consonant
These c h a r a c t e r s are p l a c e d i n f i v e
( v e r g ) , a c c o r d i n g t o t h e p o s i t i o n o f a r t i c u l a t i o n of
consonant i n t h e s y l l a b l e t h e y r e p r e s e n t .
the Sanskrit s e c t i o n .
the
The c h a r a c t e r s a r e g i v e n i n
Of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s ,
class-
, no
and
\5f . . . j i o
The c h a r a c t e r
only i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s i n l i t e r a r y H i n d i .
UT
, 1 ^ 0 , occurs
The c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n a s
frequently
Some o f t h e c h a r a c t e r s a r e m o d i f i e d
t o r e p r e s e n t c e r t a i n s o u n d s i n P e r s i a n and A r a b i c l o a n w o r d s and t h e
i n t e r v o c a l i c r e a l i s a t i o n of
qo
ye
The c h a r a c t e r s
and
?
z
<5
T i
f
<J o c c u r o n l y i n i t i a l l y ;
and
never i n i t i a l , b u t may be m e d i a l o r
5
-rh
5
and
are
final.
Reading e x a m p l e s . 3
1. One c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , r e a l i s e d a s a c o n s o n a n t w i t h t h e v o w el
I?
rT
*t
o .
64
HINDI
SECTION
2. Two c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , t h e f i n a l c h a r a c t e r r e a l i s e d w i t h
xrtit
*TC
^3
^FT
3*r
*5?T
* r
^ts
w=t
Tf^r
yrc
zero-vowel.
xR3
^TS
^
3. Three c h a r a c t e r words
*TTR
*fi*Tf
*Tv5R-
=c^oF>
**p=>
W T
^^sp
SRCR
TTvyTST
^rf
T^rW
^T^T
h. Four c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h
or w i t h an - g l i d e , f i n a l
R3RrT
ii.
5r^=T
characters with
TcTflB^r
zero-vowel
zero-vowel.
SECTS
xpj^cjvT
c o n s i s t i n g o f an i n i t i a l s e m i - v o w e l w i t h t h e v o w e l
e r s are g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t
When t h e c h a r a c t e r s
U(
syllables
The c h a r a c t -
section .
1
, y and
, v , o c c u r i n i t i a l l y ,
w i t h one of t h e v o w e l s i g n s , t h e y a r e r e a l i s e d a s c o n s o n a n t s
"by a v o w e l .
or
followed
When t h e y o c c u r m e d i a l l y i n a p o s i t i o n i n w h i c h t h e y a r e
r e a l i s e d w i t h a f o l l o w i n g v o w e l , t h e y a r e r e a l i s e d a s c o n s o n a n t s . When
t h e y o c c u r m e d i a l l y i n p o s i t i o n s i n w h i c h an kar c o n s o n a n t
i s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , or f i n a l l y ,
v o w e l s , f o r m i n g a d i p h t h o n g w i t h t h e v o w e l of t h e p r e c e d i n g
Examples:
The c h a r a c t e r
1. See S a n s k r i t ,
^3=FT
cTop
SHJ
ymn
vk
bhsy
syllable.
lv
i s o f t e n r e a l i s e d i n i t i a l l y or m e d i a l l y a s
Ch.2,1.ii.
character
b .
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
Reading e x a m p l e s .
65
2.
Two c h a r a c t e r -words, t h e f i n a l
err
character r e a l i s e d with
Tior
is^r
3.
3"
One c h a r a c t e r word.
m
^
^TOT^T
TR^T
T^yf
cRSR
*Rc*
h. Pour and f i v e
words and t h i r d c h a r a c t e r i n f i v e
iii.
SRIXf
wzrt
*oRore
FT^R
"^T
ifflSR j]yf^
in four
character
character words, r e a l i s e d
final
qr^ors
zero-vowel.
*R*R
characters with
^ S ^ R
with
zero-vowel.
Sc^Ff
^CTic*
*M<HMH
C h a r a c t e r s of t h e uusm group,.
This group c o n s i s t s
of t h r e e c h a r a c t e r s which are r e a l i s e d
o , and one w h i c h
o . These c h a r a c t e r s
The c h a r a c t e r
, so
some S a n s k r i t loanwords u s e d i n l i t e r a r y H i n d i .
i n o r d i n a r y s p e e c h as
is
* R
ETrTc^
OT"
character r e a l i s e d with
sr^H
z e r o - v o w e l or w i t h an e - g l i d e ,
Wf
Three c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , t h e f i n a l
STSoT
zero-vowel.
I?
Jo . The l a s t
character
are
is
given
, occurs only
It i s often
i n t h e Hindi
as
in
realised
syllabary
, he .
1. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 85.
2 . This i s t h e o n l y o n t e s t h c h a r a c t e r w h i c h o c c u r s as a word.
3 . See S a n s k r i t , C h o 2 , l i i i .
66
HINDI
SECTION
I n words c o n s i s t i n g o f okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s
i s a t i o n of
a.
When
^
^
, ho , v a r i e s a c c o r d i n g t o i t s p o s i t i o n
combination w i t h t h e vowel
it
is
(ee), a s
When ^
pahor(p8ehr)
occurs as a f i n a l
character i t
in
as
in
rohon(rffihn)
consonant
i s g e n e r a l l y r e a l i s e d in combination w i t h the
cR^
^SRT(?
toroh(tora)
Xf^
yoh(yeh)
TJf
voh(voh)
soho
1. None of t h e uusm c h a r a c t e r s
o c c u r s a s a word.
Two c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , t h e f i n a l
character r e a l i s ed with
srer
TO
TH
vowel
Examples:
Exceptions:
jagah(joga)
examples.
<3?h
lahoson(leehson)
c h a r a c t e r f o l l o w i n g an okar
of t h e p r e c e d i n g c h a r a c t e r a s ( a ) .
if^T
3. Three c h a r a c t e r w o r d s ,
^TTJ^
*6*r
5f
the f i n a l
*R*F>
^B^qif
%z
35STTrT
vR?T
f?5F>cT
f^foT
s e e p.85.
TT^T
STR
*TC)T
^FcT
^cT5T
TOT
or w i t h an
zero-vowel,
o-glide.
H^Tc^cT
H^R^fi
*R
zero-vowel.
^TTR
characters r e a l i s e d with
second c h a r a c t e r s w i t h zero-vowel
1. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n ,
zero-vowel.
character r e a l i s e d with
U. Four c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , f i n a l
*T*RS
is
c^'H'T
Johor( Jfflhr)
$vFT
and
often realised
2.
real-
i n t h e word.
of the p r e c e d i n g c h a r a c t e r
Reading
the
o c c u r s m e d i a l l y p r e c e d e d by an okar c h a r a c t e r ,
f o l l o w e d by a n o t h e r c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r ,
b.
only,
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
67
syllabic
rr
and s y l l a b i c
and
11 . The c h a r a c t e r
S a n s k r i t loanwords u s e d i n l i t e r a r y H i n d i .
usually placed f i r s t
in the syllabary,
okar, a k a r , i k a r and s o o n .
representing
occurs i n
The v o w e l c h a r a c t e r s a r e
and t h e y a r e r e f e r r e d t o a s
sometimes w r i t t e n i n H i n d i , b u t t h e f o r m s g i v e n i n t h e t a b l e a r e more
usual.
The g e n e r a l r u l e s c o n c e r n i n g t h e r e a l i s a t i o n o f okar c o n s o n a n t
c h a r a c t e r s s h o u l d be a p p l i e d i n r e a d i n g a l l e x a m p l e s g i v e n b e l o w ,
u n l e s s s p e c i a l n o t e s are added.
Reading e x a m p l e s .
1. Words c o n s i s t i n g o f v o w e l c h a r a c t e r s
msft
^rnr
^rrat
5TT
only.
vsm
^pr
i^r
^vFf
OT"
i$
far
^ f r
^ft5
characters.
^TTTT
^nr
^ri
tt
vafrsnc
>afocr
f^cf
^ f t
i i . Vowel S i g n s .
The vowel s i g n s u s e d i n w r i t i n g H i n d i , c o r r e s p o n d i n g w i t h t h e
vowel c h a r a c t e r s and w r i t t e n w i t h t h e o k a r form o f t h e c h a r a c t e r ^ ,
are g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n . 3
1. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 2 . i .
3. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 2 . i i .
Each c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t s a
2. F o r t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 85.
68
HINDI
syllable
to
consisting
SECTION
o f a c o n s o n a n t f o l l o w e d b y one o f t h e v o w e l s
v . The v o w e l s i g n s a r e r e f e r r e d t o a s HT^TT
*T ^Rt H i "511
Reading
( e k i i matra
examples.
1. One c h a r a c t e r
, ' t h e s i g n of
(matra) , as i n
e.').
words.
"5F7T
%
^
Two c h a r a c t e r
words.
fte
*McT
3.
Three c h a r a c t e r
^ t f t
words.
gsjp
^f^aft
%)ciw
spRm
^ r
B3>T
^^TT
^W^fr
Words o f f o u r or more c h a r a c t e r s .
realisation
o f kar c o n s o n a n t
an - g l i d e ,
if
given above.
Numbers i n b r a c k e t s
(|^T
indicate the
of the f i r s t
or with
part,
a r e compounds
i f kar, i s
realis-
zero-vowel.
TYTCT
^R^yftT
^nrmm
^TyT^5f>
<5?5TT<7TT
^feqT^T
%TT*ft
s^Jtf^q
^JTTS
ttarnft
ITTSRN*
^mTifr
1. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n o f e x a m p l e s , s e e p . 8 5 .
2. A S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d , w i t h f i n a l d^h .
g*TTf
t h e words a r e n o t t o be r e a d a c c o r d i n g t o t h e r u l e s
in which t h e f i n a l
ed w i t h
(Jr^nr
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
69
The f o l l o w i n g r u l e s c o n c e r n i n g t h e r e a l i s a t i o n
c h a r a c t e r s i n words w h i c h h a v e v o w e l c h a r a c t e r s
some g u i d a n c e f o r r e a d i n g from t h e s c r i p t ,
guide i s a knowledge o f t h e s p o k e n
a.
When a m e d i a l okar c o n s o n a n t
i s f o l l o w e d by a f i n a l
b.
i.
p'na
provide
character,
reliable
i n a t h r e e c h a r a c t e r word,
or w i t h an - g l i d e ,
lor'ka
lok'ra
it
is
usually
e.g.
per'da
sod'rii
When a v e r b a l b a s e e n d s i n a n kar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r ,
formative p a r t i c l e s which c o n s i s t
a vowel s i g n
sokii.
or w i t h an - g l i d e ,
of a consonant c h a r a c t e r
sk-na
sk-tii
and p r e - f i n a l
the r e a l i s a t i o n
bol
of
bol-ta
c h a r a c t e r s b e i n g kar c o n s o n a n t
of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s
i l l u s t r a t e d in the following
bol-te
the
characters,
v a r i e s according to the
This v a r i a t i o n
form
is
examples;
H*T*BcTT
"SRSRS&T
^T*T*HHT
sm jha
smjh-ta
smjh-kr
sm'jhana
, h , f^"
i.
, hi
and j ^ " , hu
are r e a l i s e d as
follows:
, p r e c e d e d by a c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r w i t h a vowel
i s r e a l i s e d as a s p i r a t i o n
-s-
with
Tm*FTT
Medial
Medial
before
t h r e e or more c h a r a c t e r s ,
of t h e f o r m a t i v e p a r t i c l e s w h i c h a r e a d d e d .
somsjh
this
e.g.
When a v e r b a l b a s e c o n s i s t s
final
consonant
language.
character i s r e a l i s e d with z e r o - v o w e l ,
c.
and s i g n s
c h a r a c t e r w i t h a vowel s i g n ,
r e a l i s e d with zero-vowel,
rej'mii
of okar
of
the vowel
of t h e p r e c e d i n g
WJ$m
ft^cT
^ T r T
%e>cTT
cahna
mihnot
tuhmst
behtsr
sign
syllable.
# ^ c l
sohbot
70
HINDI
ii.
SECTION
c o a l e s c e n c e w i t h t h e v o w e l of a p r e c e d i n g okar c h a r a c t e r a s
M^cHI
e.g.
p a h i l a or p e y h l a
iii.
srf^T
Sff^T
b a h i r a or b o y h r a
b e h i n or bayhn
Gt|?r
e.g.
Reading e x a m p l e s ,
under 1. i i i
f^fit
*afc%
3.
t h e above n o t e s ,
and n o t e s a.
SfT^t
of^TST
^fcTT
-gsrf
and b .
f cPTT
ifecft
b.
c.
illustrating
WfT^T
*r?ft5
*ri%7T
TOO*-
W W
<P*TK*T
TO?*TT
"qfw^r
s^^tt
^rfft
Modifiers.
The m o d i f i e r s ,
^c^^gT^"
(onusvar)
and [o|^fT^ ( v i s o r g )
are
both
2
used in w r i t i n g Hindi.
T h e s e a r e g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t
section,
i.
onusvar.
Both forms of t h i s m o d i f i e r a r e u s e d i n H i n d i , t h e f i r s t f o r m ,
a s i n 55T > b e i n g c a l l e d t h e o n u s v a r , and t h e s e c o n d f o r m , a s i n 35T ,
3
t h e c e n d r a b i n d u . The a n u s v a r i s u s u a l l y w r i t t e n ,
the c o n d r e b i n d u , w i t h c h a r a c t e r s
am.
am
im
iirrj
uirj
in preference
t h a t h a v e any s u p e r s c r i b e d
uuirj
eirj
eym,
orr)
1. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n of e x a m p l e s , s e e p . 86.
2. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 3 . i . and i i .
3 . 'moon and d o t ' .
to
stroke.
ovrr)
in
ovh.
p o h u r - n a or p o v h r - n a
(uusm c h a r a c t e r s ) .
^ R J
as
"CHpr^TT
bahut or b e v h t
a.
ayh.
M e d i a l 2 , p r e c e d e d by an akar c h a r a c t e r , may b e r e a l i s e d
c o a l e s c e n c e w i t h t h e v o w e l of a p r e c e d i n g okar c h a r a c t e r
in
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
71
As t h e n a s a l i s a t i o n of t h e v o w e l o f t h e c h a r a c t e r w i t h whic h i t i s
written.
The c o n d r o b i n d u i s p r e f e r r e d f o r r e p r e s e n t i n g a n a s a l i s e d
v o w e l , e x c e p t when t h e c h a r a c t e r h a s a s u p e r s c r i b e d s t r o k e ; e . g .
iff or $
ha
or f
ft
muh
thii
hey
me
Reading examples.'''
ttZ
fz
3for
*n>
b.
^ft
Trff
sarcbw
TTT5T
crt^TT
i^RT
A%~*r\
As t h e n a s a l c o n s o n a n t o f o n e o f t h e v o r g .
-qj^^rr
The onusvar w r i t t e n on
i s of the ce-varg.
The c a n d r a b i n d u
When t h e
onusvar i s r e a l i s e d a s a n a s a l c o n s o n a n t b e f o r e a f i n a l
character, the f i n a l character
tt^t
ponkh
okar
2
i s r e a l i s e d w i t h an o - g l i d e .
$iz
kon^h
#>^pr
porantu
hindii
sambandh
kanjuus
In w r i t i n g S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , t h e r e i s an a l t e r n a t i v e and more
f r e q u e n t l y used method o f r e p r e s e n t i n g n a s a l consonants i n t h i s
c o n t e x t , by combining c h a r a c t e r s .
2
as a n a s a l c o n s o n a n t b e f o r e a f i n a l
When, t h e o n u s v a r i s r e a l i s e d
okar c h a r a c t e r , t h e f i n a l
c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d w i t h an a - g l i d e ^ .
1 .
3.
For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 8 6 .
See a b o v e , 1 . n o t e b
2. S e e S a n s k r i t ,
Ch.3,3*Class
2.ii.
72
HINDI
SECTION
I n some w o r d s , t h i s m o d i f i e r may be r e a l i s e d a s i n a. or a s i n b .
The r e a l i s a t i o n a s i n b . i s more u s u a l when t h e c h a r a c t e r w i t h t h e
onusvar i s o k a r .
e.g.
3>T^)
ok
or
onk
reg
or rang
R e a d i n g Examples."''
^ftcr
wi*r
sf^rt
w*r
^Htr -q-^ar
Rfar fr
z z
^r^r
#etc
3"sft
^55*
c . When t h e a n u s v a r i s w r i t t e n on a c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d i n g one o f t h e
entosth
or
uusm
characters,
a s i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s and l e a r n -
ed words u s e d i n t h e l i t e r a r y l a n g u a g e ,
i t i s r e a l i s e d in various
w a y s . Among t h e s e v e r a l ways o f r e a l i s i n g t h e o n u s v a r i n t h i s
p a r t s o f India2, t h e u s u a l
t e x t u s e d by s p e a k e r s i n d i f f e r e n t
Hindi p r a c t i c e i s i l l u s t r a t e d by t h e f o l l o w i n g
onusvar b e f o r e
7J[ , X , ^
as the n a s a l i s a t i o n
sonyog
or s a y o g
, !^
and
examples:
15" , r e a l i s e d a s
o f t h e vowel o f t h e s y l l a b l e ,
n , or
e.g.
sonrag
sonlegn
s o n fay
ahinsa
sinha
sarag
salagan
saJay
ahisa
siha
anusvar b e f o r e
o f , r e a l i s e d as
usually r e a l i s e d as
somvad (sambad)
1.
3.
con-
m , the character
in this context,
varamvar (barambar)
o T being,
e.g.
but
kuvarii
For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 8 6 .
2. S e e S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 3 . i . n o t e
The l a s t c h a r a c t e r i n t h i s word r e p r e s e n t s 7T combined w i t h T f .
c.
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
ii.
73
viserg.
This m o d i f i e r i s r a r e l y u s e d i n w r i t i n g H i n d i .
I t o c c u r s i n some
it
is
r e a l i s e d e i t h e r as s t r o n g a s p i r a t i o n a f t e r the s y l l a b l e
hy the c h a r a c t e r w i t h whic h i t
usually
represented
i s w r i t t e n , as i n r e a d i n g l e a r n e d
words from a l i t e r a r y t e x t ; o r ,
i n l e s s formal r e a d i n g , as the
d o u b l i n g of the c o n s o n a n t of t h e f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r ; f o r
^:^cT , duhkh
or
dukkh
'CRT: o f t ^ T , entohkoror^
When the v i s a r g i s w r i t t e n w i t h a f i n a l
strong a s p i r a t i o n f o l l o w i n g the f i n a l
l e a r n e d words such a s
syllable,
or
ntokkoror^
i t i s r e a l i s e d as
for instance,
may be d i s r e g a r d e d , a s i n
I+. The Complete
character,
example:
or
in
it
, ch .
Syllabary.
The arrangement of t h e c h a r a c t e r s
t r a d i t i o n a l order i s s i m i l a r t o t h a t g i v e n , i n t h e S a n s k r i t
o m i t t i n g t h e vowel c h a r a c t e r s
a l l t he vowel c h a r a c t e r s , e x c e p t
and ^
section,
. 1 The t a b l e i n w h i ch
, and t h e m o d i f i e r s added t o t h e
c h a r a c t e r ![ are p l a c e d a t t h e h e a d o f a s e r i e s of columns
consist-
i n g of e v e r y c o n s o n a n t i n t h e kar f o r m , w i t h e a c h of t h e vowel
and each of t h e m o d i f i e r s ,
i s c a l l e d i n H i n d i t h e ^T^^<c|^l
See S a n s k r i t , Ch.2,h.
, barh-
signs
in
'
HINDI
These two t a b l e s
show t h e o r d e r i n w h i c h t h e c h a r a c t e r s
p l a c e d as the i n i t i a l
t h e same a s t h e order
characters
characters
1
o f words i n d i c t i o n a r i e s ,
in Sanskrit.
o f words b e g i n n i n g w i t h
Hindi
is
modified
the
characters.
Numerals.
The n u m e r a l s u s e d i n H i n d i a r e g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t
Both t h e
are
which
Words b e g i n n i n g w i t h t h e
are p l a c e d i n the s e r i e s
corresponding unmodified
5.
SECTION
'Hindi'
f o r m s and t h e
section.1
printing.
6. P u n c t u a t i o n .
In p r o s e w r i t i n g ,
t h e end of a s e n t e n c e i s marked w i t h an u p -
r i g h t s t r o k e o f t h e same h e i g h t a s t h e u p r i g h t s t r o k e o f a c h a r a c t e r .
Other p u n c t u a t i o n marks a r e u s e d a s i n E n g l i s h .
This system
i l l u s t r a t e d i n t h e H i n d i p r o s e p a s s a g e a t t b e end o f t h i s
The s y s t e m of p u n c t u a t i o n u s e d i n v e r s e
1.
3.
See S a n s k r i t ,
See S a n s k r i t ,
Ch.2,5.
Gh.2,3.ii.
section .
i s t h e same a s t h a t
i n Sanskrit3.
2. S e e end of C h . 3 .
Reading examples.
is
2
used
C H A P T E R
CONJUNCT
CHARACTERS
C h a r a c t e r s formed b y c o m b i n i n g o t h e r c h a r a c t e r s a r e c a l l e d
^^JrFjfisiR
(sonyuktakser )
1
b y Hindi grammarians.
The c o n s t r u c t i o n and
c a l l i g r a p h y of conjunct c h a r a c t e r s a r e d e s c r i b e d i n t h e S a n s k r i t
ion .
The c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s u s e d i n w r i t i n g H i n d i a r e c l a s s i f i e d
i n t h i s c h a p t e r i n t h e same way a s t h e S a n s k r i t c o n j u n c t
1.
contexts:
ii.
e.g.
<F=gr
C R M %
becca
kyoki
m^t
mokkhii
In S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , e i t h e r w o r d s commonly u s e d i n H i n d i , o r
l e a r n e d loanwords u s e d i n t h e l i t e r a r y l a n g u a g e ;
pustok
strii
i i i . I n loanwords from o t h e r l a n g u a g e s ;
1 .
characters^.
C o n t e x t s o f Conjunct C h a r a c t e r s i n H i n d i .
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s o c c u r i n H i n d i i n t h e s e
i.
sect-
?TW
WWrU
doroxt
hofta
'joined character'.
2 .
See S a n s k r i t ,
e.g.
/obd
e.g.
s^e/on
C h . 3 , 1 .
3 .
ibid.
Ch.3,3.
76
HINDI
2.
SECTION
R e a l i s a t i o n of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s i n H i n d i .
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s a r e r e a l i s e d i n r e a d i n g a s s y l l a b l e s
i n g of two or more c o n s o n a n t s f o l l o w e d by a v o w e l .
When an okar c o n -
c h a r a c t e r of a word, i t
r e a l i s e d w i t h an o - g l i d e ,
The r e a l i s a t i o n
as i n
ing.
is
vowel i n c e r t a i n p o s i t i o n s
in words
gives rise
consist-
usually
zero-
t o a p r o b l e m of
spell-
For i n s t a n c e , when a f o r m a t i v e p a r t i c l e b e g i n n i n g w i t h a c o n s o n -
a n t c h a r a c t e r i s added t o a v e r b a l b a s e e n d i n g i n a f i n a l
okar
ant c h a r a c t e r ,
realised
the f i n a l
with zero-vowel.
c h a r a c t e r of t h e b a s e i s u s u a l l y
T h i s r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e c o n s e c u t i v e c h a r a c t e r s
s i m i l a r t o t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r .
Similar
ed w i t h z e r o - v o w e l b e f o r e a f o l l o w i n g c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r ,
realis-
and i n com-
pound words i n w h i c h t h e f i r s t
p a r t ends i n an okar c o n s o n a n t
3
t e r , and t h e s e c o n d p a r t b e g i n s w i t h a c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r .
charac-
A l l the c l a s s e s
of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n i n t h e
Sanskrit
s e c t i o n o c c u r i n H i n d i , b u t i n some of t h e c l a s s e s o n l y a few
the c h a r a c t e r s are used.
Those u s e d i n w r i t i n g H i n di a r e
of
illustrated
by t h e e x a m p l e s g i v e n i n e a c h c l a s s , w h i c h i n c l u d e some S a n s k r i t
words w h i c h a r e commonly u s e d i n H i n d i .
loan-
More r a r e l y u s e d l o a n w o r d s ,
some of w h i c h may o c c u r i n l i t e r a r y H i n d i ,
are i n c l u d e d among t h e
is
problems
a r i s e i n o t h e r i n s t a n c e s , where an okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i s
3.
conson-
section.
In t h e t r a n s c r i p t i o n o f e x a m p l e s , t h i s g l i d e i s n o t i n d i c a t e d i n
words t o which t h i s r u l e a p p l i e s .
2. See a b o v e , C h . 2 , 1 . n o t e s
a. t o d.
3 . Examples of such words a r e g i v e n b e l o w , w i t h e a c h
c l a s s of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s .
U. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 .
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS
C l a s s 1 . Two s i m i l a r c h a r a c t e r s
77
joined.
The s e r i e s o f c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s c l a s s o c c u r r i n g i n S a n s k r i t
given in that s e c t i o n .
s y l l a b a r y occur i n t h i s c l a s s , b u t some o c c u r o n l y i n S a n s k r i t
words u s e d i n t h e l i t e r a r y l a n g u a g e .
i s w r i t t e n as
is
Most of t h e c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s of t h e Hindi
loan-
The c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t i n g
, the s u p e r s c r i b e d s t r o k e r e p r e s e n t i n g
-rra
when p r e -
p
c e d i n g a n o t h er c o n s o n a n t . The m o d i f i e d c h a r a c t e r s
occur i n t h i s c l a s s , b u t o|-oh , qqa ,
w r i t t e n i n P e r s i a n and A r a b i c
VHVh ,
ffo
, and
and
<J do n o t
\FjT , z z o a r e
loanwords.
A c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t i n g an a s p i r a t e d c o n s o n a n t i s n o t w r i t t e n
i n S a n s k r i t as t h e f i r s t
part of a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r i n t h i s
\o^cj
but i n w r i t i n g Hindi t h e c h a r a c t e r s
are sometimes u s e d .
The c o m b i n a t i o n
, khkh
-mm
and
, "|;h"|;h
may be a l t e r n a t i v e l y r e -
p r e s e n t e d by w r i t i n g an a n u s v a r w i t h t h e c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d i n g
in
V4J-41 <3[
or
class,
, as
VS^ft"^ , ummid .
The f o l l o w i n g example s i l l u s t r a t e
s e c u t i v e consonant c h a r a c t e r s ,
H i n d i words i n w h i c h two c o n -
t h e f i r s t b e i n g kar, a r e r e a l i s e d
bn-na'3
characters:
yusse
us-se k
Reading examples .
pF?f>T
*raR5FT
1. See S a n s k r i t , C h . . 3 , C l a s s . 1 .
3 . Verbal form.
5. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 86.
cR^ft
sf^cft
I ^ W
2. S e e b e l o w , C l a s s 3 . i i i . a .
L\.. Pronoun w i t h s u f f i x .
in
78
HINDI
C l a s s 2. Two v e r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s
The c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s
SECTION
joined.
in t h i s c l a s s which occur i n S a n s k r i t
g i v e n in the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n .
1
c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s o c c u r r i n g i n H i n d i , m o s t l y i n S a n s k r i t
w o r d s , a r e g i v e n b e l o w , w i t h t h e a d d i t i o n of some c o n j u n c t
o c c u r r i n g i n P e r s i a n and A r a b i c l o a n w o r d s .
loan-
characters
Some of t h e e x a m p l e s
given
i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n may be f o u n d i n Hindi t e x t s , i n l e a r n e d
words i n t h e l i t e r a r y
-kto
-tko
ii.
- b j
loan-
language.
3.
-gd
-dg
-pt
-tp
-bd
-db
<Frf
-bz
-qt
9FST
-qb
-qf
-ft
-bt
OXJrj
-xte
are
Most of t h e c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n under i i . a .
in the Sanskrit
section
a r e w r i t t e n i n l i t e r a r y H i n d i , t h i s method of r e p r e s e n t i n g a
homorganic n a s a l c o n s o n a n t p r e c e d i n g one of t h e v e r g i i y
charact-
e r s b e i n g g e n e r a l l y p r e f e r r e d t o t h e u s e of t h e o n u s v a r ,
in
w r i t i n g S a n s k r i t loanwords3. Among t h e c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n i n
S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n under i i . b . , only
"JfT , jji
occur i n Hindi.
i s not c a l l i g r a p h i c a l l y
The c h a r a c t e r
conjunct c h a r a c t e r ,
series.
and i t
f o l l o w i n g vowel^-.
-kmo
-gn
of
I n Hindi d i c t i o n a r i e s , words b e g i n n i n g w i t h
These c h a r a c t e r s o c c u r i n S a n s k r i t
-ghn
-tm
syllabic
gy , w i t h n a s a l i s a t i o n
c h a r a c t e r a r e p l a c e d a f t e r words b e g i n n i n g w i t h
iii.
<?T , - t n
and
I t i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d as
the
the
this
vj^" .
loanwords:
-dm
-pn
1. See S a n s k r i t , Ch.3>Class 2.
2. The numbers i . - i v . c o r r e s p o n d
t o t h e a r r a n g e m e n t of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n .
3. See a b o v e , C h . 2 , i . b .
L. Cf.
gy , i n C l a s s 3 . i . b e l o w .
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS
i v . Of t h e c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s g r o u p , o n l y
occur i n H i n d i , i n S a n s k r i t
, -rjmo and
the f i r s t
H i n d i words i n w h i c h
sok-tii
Reading e x a m p l e s .
W R T
-&cW>-R
fOT
^TovT
^cT
"H|*
^F^H^fl
Class 3 .
^^PFT
dab-ta
characters;
padma
ad'mii
" H I P
OTT
|WT
h^rt
w^zr
TTOF^TT
TT^
olW
oTcST
^ftc
SNF%
| O P R ^llcHI W F T
Characters
Characters
robt
in
* T %
F^RF
i.
consecut-
b e i n g okar, are r e a l i s e d
o r d i n a r y s p e e c h i n t h e same way a s c o n j u n c t
Jokti
, -nmo
loanwords.
The f o l l o w i n g e x a m p l e s i l l u s t r a t e
ive consonant c h a r a c t e r s ,
79
joined with a n t a s t h
joined with f o l l o w i n g
The s e r i e s of c h a r a c t e r s
characters.
Xf
in this class
occurring in Sanskrit
g i v e n i n t h a t s e c t i o n . 3 Most o f t h e c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s of t h e
s y l l a b a r y can be combined w i t h f o l l o w i n g
Xf
, t h o u g h some of
is
Hindi
these
literary
l a n g u a g e . Some of t h e e x a m p l e s g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n may o c c u r
i n a Hindi l i t e r a r y t e x t .
Of t h e m o d i f i e d c h a r a c t e r s ,
occur combined w i t h f o l l o w i n g
ZJ -in P e r s i a n and A r a b i c
1 . Verbal form.
2. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n ,
3 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 , C l a s s 3 . i i i . b .
see
p . 86.
Jpf
and
loanwords.
80
HINDI
SECTION
Reading E x a m p l e s .
oRt
cqt
OFH^J
ii.
to^TcT
"qT
^3"^Tt T
T
*TT
^ T ^ T
=*rrq"
siTRotrr^r
^pjc^r
Characters
^TTTl"
sq^IT
wfT
^Tors^r
"^TTZT
^TT
^m^-
Trgw
o^srr
cT .
The s e r i e s o f c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s c l a s s o c c u r r i n g i n S a n s k r i t
p
given in that s e c t i o n .
Only a few of t h e c h a r a c t e r s o f t h e H i n d i
s y l l a b a r y o c c u r combined w i t h f o l l o w i n g
mainly in Sanskrit loanwords.
i s combined w i t h
cf
3
is
cf , and t h o s e t h a t o c c u r
Of t h e m o d i f i e d c h a r a c t e r s ,
are
o n l y ^cf
Reading e x a m p l e s .
^ocTTsr
" W T T
"H^
iii.
a.
Characters
-3cTR
^OTR
E5#
CTT^T
ivFTT
f^T
^f%rT
"^TK
or w i t h f o l l o w i n g
*5[ p r e c e d i n g .
Characters r e a l i s e d with preceding
called
r , r e p r e s e n t e d by the
( r e f ) , a r e i l l u s t r a t e d , w i t h n o t e s on c a l l i g r a p h y ,
stroke
in
the
Sanskrit
The e x a m p l e s
given
t h e c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s w h i c h o c c u r i n H i n d i .
7T,
d o u b l e d when w r i t t e n w i t h
1. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n ,
3 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n ,
7T
ref
>
*T
3"
are
often
s e e p . 8 6 . 2. See S a n s k r i t ,
s e e p . 8 6 . U. See S a n s k r i t ,
Ch.3Class
Ch.3,Class
3.ii.
3.iii.a.
C O N J U N C T CHARACTERS
The f o l l o w i n g examples i l l u s t r a t e
81
H i n d i words i n which
consecut-
i v e consonant c h a r a c t e r s , t h e f i r s t b e i n g kar, a r e r e a l i s e d i n
ordinary s p e e c h i n t h e same way a s c o n j u n c t
korta
kor-ta^
srv
characters:
dor'vaza
dhorm
f o l l o w e d by a c o n s o n a n t
c h a r a c t e r or w i t h a c h a r a c t e r w i t h s u p e r s c r i b e d
dor'bar
b.
dsrbar
por'da
dr'maha
parda
ref ; e.g.
dr jii
dsrjii
"5[ f o l l o w i n g .
Characters r e a l i s e d w i t h
following,
r e p r e s e n t e d by a s h o r t
s t r o k e p l a c e d e i t h e r a g a i n s t t h e u p r i g h t s t r o k e o f t h e c h a r a c t e r or
beneath the c h a r a c t e r , are g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n .
examples g i v e n below i l l u s t r a t e
occur i n H i n d i .
the c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s
The
which
S a n s k r i t and E n g l i s h .
Reading e x a m p l e s . 3
"3?ff
t $
?foR
*r n
7
srJ
^SPW
^IT
fit*?
iv.
a.
W^FT
T f ^
*P&*no*r
^tfS sHf ^|
F4
ST^FT
*JPT
^ y T
PT
Tffr
TO
^Tg
*W
cffa
^T^T
Characters j o i n e d w i t h p r e c e d i n g
^^cT
gj^f srff H
ttX^T
cvT or w i t h f o l l o w i n g
^*J$
cFT
q% p r e c e d i n g .
The c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s w h i c h o c c u r i n S a n s k r i t a r e g i v e n i n
that s e c t i o n . ^
The c h a r a c t e r s o c c u r r i n g i n H i n d i a r e i l l u s t r a t e d b y
1. Verbal form.
2. See S a n s k r i t ,
Ch.3,3.CI.3.iii.b.
3. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 8 6 .
U. S e e S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C 1 . 3 . i v . a .
G
82
HINDI
t h e e x a m p l es g i v e n b e l o w .
SECTION
f o l l o w e d by a c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r ,
this class; e.g.
b.
or w i t h a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r
of
f^cyfc^cT or RorcpoT , b i l k u l .
following.
The c h a r a c t e r s o f t h i s c l a s s w h i c h o c c u r i n S a n s k r i t a r e g i v e n
t h a t section.-*- The e x a m p l e s g i v e n b e l o w i l l u s t r a t e
which o c c u r i n H i n d i ,
p
Reading examples.
*f35
characters
i n S a n s k r i t and E n g l i s h l o a n w o r d s ,
ararao
C l a s s U.
the
in
vorgiiy characters
if^T^T
f r m
^ g ^ r
j o i n e d w i t h p r e c e d i n g or f o l l o w i n g uusm
characters.
i*
a.
or
p r e c e d i n g or f o l l o w i n g v o r g i i y
characters,
preceding.
The c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s c l a s s w h i c h o c c u r i n
are given i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n .
Sanskrit
Those w h i c h a r e w r i t t e n i n H i n d i ,
i n c l u d i n g t h o s e o c c u r r i n g i n S a n s k r i t and o t h e r l o a n w o r d s , a r e
a t e d by t h e e x a m p l e s g i v e n b e l o w .
The f o l l o w i n g c o n j u n c t
indic-
characters
in
l o a n w o r d s from o t h e r l a n g u a g e s :
S3o
-Jqe
-J"to
-sto
-sbo
H i n d i words i n w h i c h c o n s e c u t i v e c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s ,
the
first
c h a r a c t e r b e i n g o k a r , a r e r e a l i s e d i n o r d i n a r y s p e e c h i n t h e same way
1. See S a n s k r i t , Ch. 1 + . 3 , C I . 3 . i v . b .
2 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . h . 3 , C I . k - i . a .
2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n ,
s e e p. 87.
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS
83
as c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s a r e i l l u s t r a t e d b y t h e s e
rosta
b.
"5T ,
or
bos-ta
qismot
of t h i s
c l a s s w h i ch o c c u r i n S a n s k r i t
are g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n " ^ .
Only a few o f t h e s e
characters
The c h a r a c t e r s w h i c h o c c u r a r e i l l u s t r a t e d by t h e
r e a d i n g examples g i v e n b e l o w .
Some a d d i t i o n a l
us-me 2
"^T f o l l o w i n g .
The c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s
occur i n H i n d i .
examples:
"^o^ , x s o , *o%\
series,
, xja
characters
of
this
occur i n loanwords
from
fsa .
Reading e x a m p l e s . ^
a.
gf%oT
^TC
fe^ft
ii.
|[
qTTrT
t<* f ^ r l
Vf$C
^cTfT
g**EoT
^ R * T
S^cTR
f^SRT
^ c = f
p r e c e d i n g or f o l l o w i n g an o n u n a s i k
Only t h r e e c h a r a c t e r s
by t h e s e
'HI ^ 4
of t h i s
class
W W
Ttf5RT
^ T F T
character^.
occur i n Hindi,
illustrated
examples:-
a.
| | preceding
h.
| | following
4-^1^1 u n h a r i i
1. Verbal form.
3 . See S a n s k r i t ,
5. See S a n s k r i t ,
, as i n
^ ,or
sTfirTW
> brahmor; .
*T a s i n ^URT , nhan ,
mharii
, untie ,
2. Pronoun w i t h s u f f i x .
Ch.3. 3 . CI. 1+. i . b .
U. F o r t r a n s c r i p t i o n ,
Ch.3. 3 . 01^1+. i i . a. and b .
s e e p . 87.
84
H I N D I
Hindi p r o s e
passagel
^TPW
^5T5er ftcft ^
wft
focFt
ftcTT f
^f^r
f , c^f cqf
1 1
S E C T I O N
^ffcr
HT^t 3
gfrTfm
VTiUft
tfgF
^ f a r f o ftcTT ^HT | I
-fen
^TT 7^1 |
hstt
I T
*rfw
TRANSCRIPTION
Transcription
of
Reading
85
Examples
Chapter 2 .
1. i .
cho
dha
to
kab
phon^
dhan
thon
bht
caph
xam
mogon
hhejon
1 .
i i.
bsc'psn
DOl
nav
phsl
chal
cht
qd
qdm
kthn
ckh
ght
m"|;h
Oht
kf
yazab
xatsm
dhmk
chamak
jsm'gh"];
hr
dhs
das
haq
samajh
sagarh
Japath
hazam
Jsrsr^
semoy
ai
ek
uuth
uupor
yzon
bhii
ke
sav
pii
duudh
hoy
lie
maydan
prthivii
bhat
nav
J*uruu
ae
ka
dho
de
ja
hoyth
gay
dhobii
qitab
keuur
qbr
xabar
psrhst
zxm
phafkan
jhafpa.t
tr
D*ey
chay
bhar
varaii
yzl
dal'kan
macal'pan
saras
fakal
ao
khsl
yam
lyn
yamak
sab
ham
had
kaj
s a r 'kaj"
mas'raf
evr
un
is
iid
ovsodh
gar
c n z
din
poysa
huzuur
rupayye
hal
har
hasad
halaf
ao
vn
lav
k a r ' V9~[
paka^'kar
hoz'rot
hoi'col
ghar
bal
vzn
yavan
bas
ros
yoj"
kas rat
hr'kt
mas'nad
hafkan
vay
caph'kar
prj'vo\
l.iii.
l 8
cspsl
vcn
gar a3
yamal
l a m ' ch
khr V9\
mat'lb
com'rax
2.ii.
kharak
ghtk
pt'jh
vr
jar
colsn
taraf
bdl
yaraz
ab
ojh
idhor
djiab
yem
kr
dhr
2. i .
ghon
gaz
phohn
pkr
jhogor
canak
dhm'kt
tho
Jabar
kalaj
kat'phal
hath
sar
saf ar
taras
xas'lot
sar'dal
ae
ai
orh
uukh
m
ag
or
geii
goe
oyj
ojhar
avr'at
aypan
pay
nav
311
do
le
khul
jhuut
xana
mavj
usa
bhiiti
kara:q
siiar
faqiir
dekhao
ya
hoy
se
ched
rtu
krpa
tsyyar
sunaii
iikh
saii
kha
so
drdh
huii
borii
ve
thii
jhiil
dhoe
jae
dii jie
bahudha
86
HINDI
maz'duur
beinamii
bonav'tii
kam'zor
isiiliye
m u s a l ' m an
SECTION
f'sos
moz'dik
der'vaza
caturaii
bayl'gacjii savdagar
xabar'dar xid'mat'gar
ghariyal
roz'garii
p . 1 3 . k h i r ' k i i duus'ra
it'na
ad'mii kap'ra l o m ' r i i b a v ' l i i
phay'da
dekh-na b a y t h - t i i l i k h - t a
pak'pana g h a b ' r a t i i
pakar-na
cjhalak-na
t e r a h cavdah s u b a h b a y e r a h g a h i r a pahacan ' ( ; h ~
kacaharii
n 8
2 . 1 . a .
may
jo
hii
8 r
n a
nahii
gae
mi\
pac
gav
gaii
dono
voha
akhe
g h u us
bhays
dej"6
davrii
poch-na
bhaiio
ec|ua
lahaga
mahaga
has-na
pahuc-na
meh
os
lit
jauu
kue
adh
bhok
bhvk-na
auuga
jaege
soh
Chapter 3 Class 1 .
pakka
huqqa
makkhan
laggii
ghugghuu
baccii
lajja
izzat
jhajjhar
patt
tt
\<\
^ha
patthar
baddal
Juddh
ann
chappar
phupphuus
bhabbhar
kimmat
rayyat
harra
killii
navve
a
c i
n i : i
9<
b u
iccha
patta
d^ibbii
hissa
Class 2 .
i.
bhakti
kubj
ii. ling
arambh
iii.rukminii
i v . janm
vaqt
satkar
daraxt
sadgur^
vaqf
ekbiis
sabz
gupt
utpann
hafta
Jabd
lafz
latf
s a n g h pajicamii
manjha ghar^a
t lA / a n t i
lampat
parantu uparant
jjian ( g y a n )
jijjiasu
ratn
sambandh
huqm
atma
xatm
lagn
umda
vanmay
n8r
C l a s s 3 i
kyo
tyo
karyy
rrmkhy
xyal
gyareh
jyo
zyada
cjyavdjiii
pur^y
pathy
udyog
madhy
nyay
pyarii
byatha
sabhy
ammily
vyakhyan
ava/y
manusy
syal
vyatha
Class 3 ii
pakvann
svamii
Class
xvab
sarv
gvar
sarvv
jvar
iijvar
tattv
kvara
dvara
kvacit
dhvani
J*vas
vi/v
svapn
3.iii.
a. t a r k
f a r q muurkh s u r x
v a r g g d i i r g h rrraryii
xarc
rrraurchit
arz a r j k o r t
garc[ vorr^amala k i i r t i
a r t h urduu arddh
uurf
arpar^ arb garbh dharmm a r y y
sarvv
dar/an vers
kursii
arhit
b.
kram
kram
gram
angrez
t
priy
frak
namr
a b ru
Jram
ratrii
tiivr
patr
chidr
mantr
samudr
87
TRANSCRIPTION
C l a s s 3 i v .
bolki
nrnlk
ql ( e q o l )
phalguri
iltiza
ilmii
kulha^a
ilzam
fsl (fsl)
ixlas
vssl
Juki
klas
ultha
ulmukh
C l a s s h.
i.a.
mujkil
prsjn
pa/cat
ajcsry
csjma
pusksl
krsr^
ras"|;r
pustsk
vaste
vsstr
strii
rasta
hindusthan
snan
spas'];
sphuurti
svssti
svssth
ustad
Jastr
pojcim
ki/tii
iftiha
nisbet
ijq
skuul
s^ejon
VX
0S
b.
baxj"
aksor
Jaxs
ksor
afsos
poriiksa
ksama
laksmii
vats
pratyaks
Hindi p r o s e p a s s a g e
k i s i i j a t i ke j i v a n me u s ' k e d v a r a p r o y u k t
Jobdo ka
otyont
mehettvopuurn^ s t h a n hoy. a v e j y o k ' t a t a t h a s t h i t i ke nusar i n p r a y u k t
Jahdo ka agam a t h ' v a l o p t o t h a v a c y , l a k s y
evam d y o t y bhavo me p o r i v o r t e n h o t a r e h - t a hoy.
o t ' e v a a v r s a m a g r i i ke abhav ma i n Jabdo ke
dvara k i s i i j a t i ke j i i v e n k i i b h i n n b h i n n s t h i t i y o ka i t i h a s u p a s t h i t
k i y a ja s a k - t a hay. i s i i adhar p a r a r y j a t i ka p r a c i i n ' t a m i t i h a s p r e s t u t k i y a gaya hay avr jy o j y o s a m a g r i i u p o l o b d h h o t i i ja r o h i i h a y ,
tyo ty o yoh i t i h a s t
k k i y a j a r a h a h a y . i s a v a s t h a me yah b a t s p a s t
samajh me a s a k - t i i hay k i j a t i i y j i i v a n me Jabdo ka s t h a n
kit'ne
mahattv ka hoy. j a t i i y s a h i t y ko r a k s i t k a r - n e t a t h a u s - k e b h a v i s y ko
sucaru avr samujval bonane ke a t i r i k t vah k i s i i b h a s a k i i s a m p a n n ' t a
ya J e b d ' b a h u l t a ka suucok avr us b h a s a k e s a h i t y ka adhyayan k o r - n e v a l o ka sab s e bo-pa sahayok b h i i
h o t a hay.
vijes'teh
any b h a s a b h a s i y d avr v i d e j i y o ke l i y e t o u s - k a a v r b h i i a d h i k upeyog h o t a h o y .
i n sob d r s ^ i y o s e J o b d - k o j k i s i i b h a s a
ke s a h i t y k i i
muulyavan
s a m p e t t i avr us b h a s a ke bhancjar ka s a b s e ba^a n i d a r j a k h o t a h o y .
n i i
MARATHI
SECTION
C H A P T E R
ARRANGEMENT
OP
THE
SYLLABARY
) and
i n t h e s y l l a b a r y i s t h e same a s
t h e S a n s k r i t arrangement-'-. Some o f t h e c h a r a c t e r s a r e u s e d o n l y i n
w r i t i n g S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , b u t m o s t o f them may be found i n l i t e r a r y
texts.
The s c r i p t i s u s u a l l y r e f e r r e d t o a s JI c*ST)*T
can be u n d e r s t o o d by a c h i l d ' .
(balobodh) ,
'that
T h i s name i s u s e d t o r e f e r t o t h e
Devanagari s c r i p t t o d i s t i n g u i s h
i t from t h e c u r s i v e s c r i p t a l s o u s e d
i n w r i t i n g M a r a t h i , and known a s
qt^t
c a l l e d 3T~$TT
(ksor) and t h e s y l l a b i c
( m o c j i i ) . Each c h a r a c t e r
series
is
i s c a l l e d 6Ju^|<v>|
i n Marathi d i f f e r s
somewhat
from t h e S a n s k r i t s y s t e m i n r e s p e c t o f c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s ,
these
The
^3T^IT
(okser)
(viramoh) ,
fotTW
(viram)
(ontohstho),
sS^TT^^r ( n t o s t h )
^ { j j f ^ j^
(ekssrsm),
i^TPR":
^FcT^Sf
1. See S a n s k r i t , C h . l .
examples:
M a r a t hi
92
MARATHI
SECTION
The t a b l e g i v e n b e l o w shows t h e a r r a n g e m e n t o f t b e M a r a t h i
syll-
abary i n roman n o t a t i o n . As t h e s y s t e m o f w r i t i n g i s s y l l a b i c , t h e
characters i n the syllabary represent s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i ng e i t h er of
a vowe l or o f a c o n s o n a n t f o l l o w e d b y t h e v o w e l
o . The roman t a b l e
vowel'.
1
Velar
Voiced
Voiceless
CONSONANTS w i t h
P l o s i v e s
2
Palatal
Unaspirated
C -,
Aspirated
kh
ch
Unaspirated
3 1
Aspirated
gh
jh
zh- -
ts
Nasal
(p)
Semivowels
3
Retroflex
5
Labial
th
th
ph
a;
dh
dh
bh
v-^
Fricatives
h
Aspirate
Lateral
VOWELS
MODIFIERS
k
Dental
ii
N a s a l - nj , o r
1. - h. S e e n o t e s on f o l l o w i n g p a g e .
UU
Aspirated - h
5. S e e S a n s k r i t ,
Chapter 1.
ARRANGEMENT OF T H E SYLLABARY
Notes on t h e s y l l a b l e s marked 1.. - h.
1. The c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g
co
93
i n t h e roman t a b l e :
, j a and jho
are r e a l i s e d
some words as a l v e o l a r c o n s o n a n t s , w i t h f r i c a t i v e
or
articulation.
1^sa , za
This r e a l i s a t i o n
zha , as shown i n t h e
is
t r a n s c r i b e d as
affricated
and
table.
2. The c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g
na
and
jia
do n o t o c c u r a s
in
vo
single
and
language.
i s usually r e a l i s e d with l a b i o -
articulation.
I I . The c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g
sa
and
syllabic
occur only
in
Sanskrit loanwords.
The s e r i e s of v o w e l s i n c l u d e s
short
ii,
'short'
'short'
and t h e
a c c o r d i n g t o c e r t a i n r u l e s o f orthography-'-.
transcription
of the c h a r a c t e r s , t h o u g h i n modern M a r a t h i s p e e c h t h e r e i s
often
l i t t l e d i f f e r e n c e b e t w e e n t h e p r o n u n c i a t i o n of words w r i t t e n w i t h t h e
characters representing the
The term ' m o d i f i e r '
'short'
or the
'long'
vowels.
Fully
i s used for
only in a systematic
transcript-
i o n of examples f o r t h e p u r p o s e o f d e s c r i b i n g t h e c o n t e x t s i n w h i c h
is realised.
it is left
In words i n w h i c h t h i s mark i s g i v e n
untranscribed.
zero-realisation,
it
C H A P T E R
CHARACTERS
OP
THE
SYLLABARY
The c h a r a c t e r s of t h e D e v a n a g a r i S c r i p t u s e d i n w r i t i n g
Marathi,
and t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of them i n r e a d i n g , a r e d i s c u s s e d i n t h i s
under t h e same h e a d i n g s a s t h e c h a r a c t e r s i n t h e S a n s k r i t
1. Consonant
chapter
section:
Characters,
and
3. M o d i f i e r s .
The s t y l e of t h e c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n i s
s t y l e g e n e r a l l y u s e d i n H i n d i p r i n t i n g and w r i t i n g .
the
The forms of
the
characters
The
i s n o t u s e d i n Marathi p r i n t i n g or w r i t i n g .
The method of w r i t i n g t h e c h a r a c t e r s i s
i n g e n e r a l t h e same a s
t h a t d e s c r i b e d i n t h e I n t r o d u c t i o n , and i n t h e n o t e s on t h e
graphy of s p e c i a l c h a r a c t e r s a s t h e y a r e g i v e n i n t h e
section.
Other
When w r i t i n g t h e c h a r a c t e r s , r e f e r e n c e
calli-
Sanskrit
s h o u l d b e made t o
t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g g r o u p s o f c h a r a c t e r s i n t h a t section."'"
1. R e f e r e n c e s a r e g i v e n t h r o u g h o u t t h i s c h a p t e r t o t h e d i v i s i o n s and
s u b - d i v i s i o n s w i t h t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g numbers i n Chapter 2. of t h e
Sanskrit s e c t i o n .
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
1.
Consonant
Characters.
The c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s
characters,
'ontesth'
characters
given i n the s y l l a b a r y ,
c o n s i s t i n g of an i n i t i a l
a n d 'uusm' c h a r a c t e r s . !
these characters
consonant,
are r e a l i s e d as
or semi-vowel,
o , and t h e y a r e d e s c r i b e d a s 3TBTT
vowel
of a c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r w i t h o u t
ant element of t h e s y l l a b l e
s t r o k e known a s fof^fiq"
Sanskrit ,
2
thus,
95
this
only,
(viram)
cR , k - ,
syllables
The r e a l i s a t i o n
i s , as the conson-
i s i n d i c a t e d by w r i t i n g a diagonal
at the foot
cT , t -
that
As t h e y a r e
f o l l o w e d by t h e
(okar).
vowel,
'vorgiiy'
TJ"
of t h e c h a r a c t e r ,
, p - . Characters
as i n
written
the w r i t i n g o f t h i s s t r o k e i s c a l l e d
'breaking the f o o t ' ) ,
as
05*1%
(longocjem,
and a c h a r a c t e r w i t h t h i s
stroke i s
somewhat from t h e r e a l i s a t i o n
characters
i n r e a d i n g Marathi
of these characters
The f o l l o w i n g n o t e s may be r e g a r d e d a s g e n e r a l
in Sanskrit.
guiding principles
described
'lame').
The r e a l i s a t i o n , of okar c o n s o n a n t
differs
schools
( p a y mo^onem,
to
are d i s c u s s e d
detail.
a. A f i n a l
okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r
i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d with
zero-
loanwords.
characters3, or a f i n a l
o k a r c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d e d by a
1. See S a n s k r i t , Ch2,1.1 - i i i .
2. S e e S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , l . i o
okar
consonant c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , a s d e s c r i b e d belo w
i n n o t e s a. - d. a r e , h o w e v e r , n o t w r i t t e n w i t h t h e v i r a m , w h i c h
i s u s e d m a i n l y i n w r i t i n g c e r t a i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s and Marathi
c o l l o q u i a l forms.
3. S e e b e l o w , Ch.3.
i
MARATHI
SECTION
representing a nasal
consonant,
-glide.
A m e d i a l kar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r
w i t h an - g l i d e ,
in c e r t a i n c o n t e x t s ; a s , for
i n s t a n c e , when s u c h
a c h a r a c t e r o c c u r s a s t h e s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r of a word of t h r e e
more c h a r a c t e r s
or
or
and t h e f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r i s w r i t t e n w i t h one of
vowel s i g n s .
Other c o n t e x t s a r e g i v e n l a t e r , when t h e
are d i s c u s s e d i n
detail.
d. When an okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r
i s the f i n a l
c h a r a c t e r of a
v e r b a l "base, i t
i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d with zero-vowel,
-glide,
t h e a d d i t i o n of s u f f i x e s
before
ning w i t h ,
or w i t h an
c o n s i s t i n g of,
or b e g i n -
a c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r w i t h one of t h e v o w e l
In t h e t r a n s c r i p f i o n
of Marathi w o r d s , f i n a l
characters
kar
signs.
consonant
or w i t h an - g l i d e ,
are
, and m e d i a l kar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d
way a r e w r i t t e n t h u s , k ' ,
t',
written
in
this
Reference
t o t h e s e n o t e s s h o u l d b e made when r e a d i n g t h e e x a m p l e s g i v e n w i t h
the characters throughout t h i s chapter.
occur as i n i t i a l
syllable
characters
i n t h e roman
C h a r a c t e r s w h i c h do n o t
a r e i n d i c a t e d by a hyphen p r e f i x e d t o
the
transcription.
3
i.
C h a r a c t e r s of t h e v o r g i i y
The f i r s t
group.
group o f c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s c o n s i s t s
of
twentyfive
c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g s y l l a b l e s w i t h an i n i t i a l p l o s i v e c o n s o n a n t
f o l l o w e d by t h e v o w e l
.
These c h a r a c t e r s f a l l i n t o f i v e ofTf
(vorg),
or c l a s s e s .
The c h a r a c t e r s
1. See b e l o w , 2 . i i .
3 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , l . i .
2.
i n t h e t a b l e g i v e n b e l o w may be
See below, 2 . i i .
Vowel
signs.
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
compared w i t h t h e S a n s k r i t c h a r a c t e r s ,
ko-vorg
i n t h e Hindi
7?
kh
go
gha
c(tsa)
ch
ja(za)
jha(zha)
style.
XT
35
co-verg
Jo-verg
written
97
-jia
z,
th
a;
aha
th
dha
to-vorg
t
na
po-vorg
ph
The c h a r a c t e r s
t h e y are w r i t t e n ,
and
ba
v3T" do n o t
bha
ma
in combination w i t h other c h a r a c t e r s ,
S a n s k r i t loanwords u s e d i n t h e l i t e r a r y
The t h r e e c h a r a c t e r s
, vrf
i n some
language.
and
are r e a l i s e d
in reading
b.
the
signs.
The p a l a t a l r e a l i s a t i o n ,
as
co
^3T a s
ja , and
as
jha , i s made u s u a l l y i n r e a d i n g S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s ,
and a l w a y s
when t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s have t h e s i g n s
, ii
The a l v e o l a r r e a l i s a t i o n ,
as
as
of t h e v o w e l s i
1^s ,
\Jf
as
or
za , and ff
characters
ay.
98
MARATHI
SECTION
are a k a r , or when t h e y a r e w r i t t e n w i t h t h e s i g n s o f t h e v o w e l s
a , u , uu , o
c.
or
ev- -.
1
When t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s a r e w r i t t e n w i t h t h e s i g n o f t h e vow61
e ,
t h e p a l a t a l and a l v e o l a r r e a l i s a t i o n s o c c u r i n an a l m o s t e v e n
d i s t r i b u t i o n o f w o r d s , and e v e n may v a r y from t i m e t o t i m e w i t h
changing conventions of speech.
No c o m p r e h e n s i v e r u l e c a n be g i v e n f o r t h e r e a l i s a t i o n o f t h e s e
t h r e e c h a r a c t e r s , h o w e v e r , and i n t h e r e a d i n g e x a m p l e s t h e p a l a t a l
r e a l i s a t i o n s h o u l d b e made u n l e s s an i n d i c a t i o n o f t h e a l v e o l a r
real-
isation i s given.
The f o l l o w i n g e x a m p l e s i l l u s t r a t e t h e v a r y i n g r e a l i s a t i o n o f okar
consonant c h a r a c t e r s
a.
in certain
contexts:
As t h e s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r of a f o u r c h a r a c t e r word:
^rTF>^' dhamaka"!; , r e a l i s e d a s
x
b.
dham'ka !;
-
In a v e r b a l f o r m , t h e r e a l i s a t i o n c h a n g i n g a c c o r d i n g t o t h e f o r m ative particle
or p a r t i c l e s
added:
tSTS , i^socjhe , v e r b a l b a s e , r e a l i s e d a s
^TcTfi tpod^hote , b a s e w i t h
^TS^^T
<=f a d d e d , r e a l i s e d a s
it6oc|hete1}S , b a s e w i t h
r e a l i s e d as
tsod^h
i^socjhet
, and e m p h a t i c p a r t i c l e , W
1is6^h ' t e ^ s .
Reading e x a m p l e s .
1 . One c h a r a c t e r w o r d s .
words:
TJ
Four o f t h e v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s o c c u r a s
W <3>
1 . See b e l o w , i n t h i s c h a p t e r , 2 . i i .
2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n o f e x a m p l e s , s e e page 1 3 0 .
The a l v e o l a r
r e a l i s a t i o n o f c-vrg c h a r a c t e r s i s i n d i c a t e d by an a s t e r i s k .
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
2.
Two c h a r a c t e r w o r d s ; f i n a l
W\
characters r e a l i s e d with
BTT
3. Three c h a r a c t e r w o r d s ; f i n a l
q^r
"TO^
eRSfi
T35W>
99
zero-vowel.
T^cT
characters r e a l i s e d with
*r<5Hr
*W&rt
*T^cT
5 ^
VsTfT
*vjTCcr
1+.' Four c h a r a c t e r w o r d s ; s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h
or w i t h an - g l i d e , f i n a l
T3wz
'^qsRrT
zero-vowel.
*3mS
zero-vowel,
k w ^ z
*^^rcRrT
*^5R^T
ST*?
zero-vowel.
wjj?iz
erqsFie
^ o f i ^
ii.
characters with
*fTeFR
*ZhW*iZ
C h a r a c t e r s of t h e n t o s t h group."*"
The c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s group g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n a r e
w r i t t e n i n t h e Hindi s t y l e .
yo
The M a r a t h i c h a r a c t e r s
ro
When t h e c h a r a c t e r s
lo
and
cf
are:
vo
occur i n i t i a l l y ,
or m e d i a l l y
t h e y a r e r e a l i s e d as
consonants.
i n w h i c h okar c o n s o n a n t
c h a r a c t e r s are r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l ,
or f i n a l l y ,
they are
ed as s e m i - v o w e l s , f o r m i n g a d i p h t h o n g w i t h t h e v o w e l of t h e
syllable.
Examples:
yevon
1. See S a n s k r i t ,
vor
Ch.2,l.ii.
bhoy
lov
lov'kor
realispreceding
ioo
MARATHI
SECTION
Readin g examples"'"
1.
One c h a r a c t e r word.
^"
i s t h e o n l y c h a r a c t e r i n t h i s group w h i c h
o c c u r s a s a word.
2.
Two c h a r a c t e r w o r d s ; f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h
^5
or
<q?
3.
*rc
vsz
as
zero-vowel.
c*5*T
*^5r
Three c h a r a c t e r w o r d s ; f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h
zero-vowel.
5T5c^
T^rf
<
cFTO
^T
35R^5
tT65H
^TcT
cPR
WT
ofTST
*xRcT
*^T<?T*
*tt^
3 ^
*^s?f^
*c(^T
character
in f i v e character words, r e a l i s e d
with
z e r o - v o w e l or w i t h an o - g l i d e ; f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h
zero-
vowel.
^oToRT
opTTrT
TfftZV]
^^cRcf
ZlVtt
^3"cT
*W?QZ
TO^rf
2
iii.
C h a r a c t e r s of t h e uusm g r o u p .
The c h a r a c t e r s o f t h i s group g i v e n i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n a r e
w r i t t e n in the Hindi s t y l e .
51
Jo
The Marathi c h a r a c t e r s
*T
so
The c h a r a c t e r "Gf
so
f
ho
o c c u r s o n l y i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , and when
r e a d i n g words i n common u s e i n M a r a t h i , i t
except in formal r e a d i n g .
1.
2.
are:
Pinal
For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 3 0 .
See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 1 . i i i .
i s o f t e n r e a l i s e d as
i s usually r e a l i s e d with
Jo ,
CHARACTERS
Reading e x a m p l e s
1.
O F T H E SYLLABARY
None of t h e c h a r a c t e r s
o f t h i s g r o u p o c c u r s a s a word.
2. Two c h a r a c t e r w o r d s ; f i n a l
characters
5**
TO
*T5T
^e:
^TH
o .
characters
r e a l i s e d with
wm
character words.
characters
fR*T
%*mz
3TcT"qe
The l a s t c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r
or w i t h
zero-vowel.
" & V W
*iw>m;zp
^ T O C K J
or c h a r a c t e r s
r e a l i s e d with zero-vowel
r e a l i s e d with
HTSre
^F^rer
*H^r
Second c h a r a c t e r s ,
i n d i c a t e d by numbers i n b r a c k e t s ,
zero-vowel.
*rc*r
*^nr
final
TO^
and e - g l i d e ;
zero-vowel,
$R
sro*r
WrT
r e a l i s e d with
3 . Three c h a r a c t e r w o r d s ; f i n a l
h. Four and f i v e
IC
trw*rw
i n t h e Marathi s y l l a b a r y
? J
is
2
o5" , -],Q , r e a l i s e d a s a r e t r o f l e x
Examples of words w r i t t e n w i t h t h i s
Uo5
XFIOS
tJoSH
*xT55cl55
"^["55"
The two c h a r a c t e r s
^?TO5"
^o5gR3"
lateral
**R\3TcT55 (2)
^ 5 5 ^
CJAFOS
SfJoSlToSrT t2) * ^ o o ^ *
55
in the
representing syllables
c o n s o n a n t s w i t h t h e vowel
oToStr
a r e o f t e n added a f t e r
Marathi s y l l a b a r y , b u t t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s ,
s i s t i n g of two c o n s e c u t i v e
character
* WOFOS
$T and ^"
consonant with
and a r e d i s c u s s e d
con-
, do n o t
later.^
1 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p a g e 1 3 0 .
2. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 1 . i i i , V e d i c c h a r a c t e r .
3 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p a g e 1 3 0 .
kar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s
r e a l i s e d as shown i n p r e v i o u s e x a m p l e s .
h. See b e l o w , C h . 3 . Conjunct C h a r a c t e r s , C l a s s e s 2. and h.
102
M A R A T H I
S E C T I O N
i.
Vowel
Characters.
the
from
The c h a r a c t e r
11 . The v o w e l
i n the vernomala.
The
uu
, syllabic
section.
, ikar
r , o c c u r s o n l y i n a few
calligraphy
are:
ii
^?
and
i s i l l u s t r a t e d i n the S a n s k r i t
The Marathi v o w e l c h a r a c t e r s
rr , 1
, ukar
The v o w e l
characters
, and s o o n .
I n a l l r e a d i n g e x a m p l e s which f o l l o w ,
okar c o n s o n a n t
characters
Sanskrit
should
unless
added.
Reading examples-'.
1 . Vowel c h a r a c t e r s o n l y .
$fl
TJ
3Tt
2 . Vowel c h a r a c t e r s w i t h kar c o n s o n a n t
6T
f$
"fc
*^5r^r
1.
35?r
characters.
*TF5
3Tto5
^osi
3TT^
%fi
sffe
affe
W*T
<3tW
sfcrsr
aftos^-
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
ii.
103
Vowel S i g n s .
Vowel s i g n s c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o e a c h v o w e l c h a r a c t e r ,
to
ov .
to represent
c o n s o n a n t f o l l o w e d by one o f t h e
The v o w e l s i g n s
vowel s i g n s , and s p e c i a l
kii
ki
a r e shown h e r e added t o t h e c o n -
forms,
ku
kuu
kr
ke
In t h e t e a c h i n g of w r i t i n g i n s c h o o l s ,
key
(kana).
t h e vowel s i g n s i n %
as
(matra).
ofe
oRt
velanJii,
'left
velan^ii')
(uzovii velanj;ii,
t o as <e^U|
oFvt"
The s i g n s of t h e v o w e l s
%?5ft ( v e l a ^ i i ) , t h e s i g n i n
ft>
(khuun_, p l u r a l
oRT ,
The d i a g o n a l
vsfr
and
, and o f
e r e f e r r e d t o as
and
are r e f e r r e d
^ T ^ t %c7ft"
being
(d^avii
A l l th e vowel s i g n s are r e f e r r e d
khuna.).
%
i
1.
See S a n s k r i t ,
3fr
ii
\3?
f o r m e d b y w r i t i n g t h e vowe l
thus:
<f
u
Ch.2,2. i i .
3j;
uu
to
b e i n g ^vSTcft" %"c^t1*
and t h e s i g n i n
'right velanj;ii').
of^TT,
TT ,
and
kev
i n any c h a r a c t e r .
with
sectionl.
ko
J-|T5f"i
of) . The o r d e r o f s t r o k e s i n w r i t i n g c h a r a c t e r s
sonant c h a r a c t e r
ka
except
<3J
r
Calligraphy.
$
e
&
oy
signs
104
MARATHI
Reading
1.
examples
SECTION
One c h a r a c t e r w o r d s .
ft
*fr
TIT
2. Two c h a r a c t e r w o r d s .
fe
oBTq
^t*T
^noT
**fN"
^"cT
^>"^T
*n3>
3.
^\
sft^
^Bfir
Three c h a r a c t e r
sR^tT
ofsfoT
^fa
tc^
%rT
3fa
sfj
f$T5J
UTrft
4nrf
%|
spg
3 ^
^ ^
JJ?>
*#^T
3TfooT
words.
w r a
%ft*r
^frcTR"
*^-ifrT
^fcpfi
^oj^r
*^tmt
%5>
t^s"
m i
-rt\S[
R e a l i s a t i o n of m e d i a l
=ft^5T
f^sFn^
okar c h a r a c t e r s
%TPn~
f^r^flr
i n words w h i c h have
2
in various
a. When a m e d i a l o k a r c h a r a c t e r ,
a final
i n a thre e c h a r a c t e r word,
c h a r a c t e r w i t h a vowel s i g n ,
zero-vowel,
or w i t h an o - g l i d e
positions.
, and
it
precedes
is usually realised
and
w i t h t h e v o w e l of t h e p r e c e d i n g c h a r a c t e r s ,
of
as
form
with
diphthongs
in
ORl^Toft
>$T"*ft
IpSTT
ofJTW
TT^iY
ar/khii
rej'mii
mul'ga
kay'da
hav'^ii
5T*lit
*TT5F>tr
^oR^T
3TcRT
^NTTT
Jeg'^ii
bhak'rii
chok'd^a
o^h'ra
koy'ta
1 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n of e x a m p l e s s e e p . 1 3 0 .
2. Compare t h e s e n o t e s w i t h n o t e s b . and c . above i n t h i s
chapter.
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
ic
The
r e a l i s a t i o n v a r i e s a c c o r d i n g t o t h e p o s i t i o n i n e a c h word of
the
c h a r a c t e r s w i t h v o w e l s i g n s , and a k n o w l e d g e of t h e l a n g u a g e
is
t h e o n l y r e l i a b l e g u i d e t o t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of s u c h w o r d s .
Second c h a r a c t e r r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l ,
ttrTcF^i-
%c^^t^T
m^Tr^
Jet'korii
or w i t h an o - g l i d e :
bhan'god^
m w
vel'dod^a
saa^'pataT,
Third c h a r a c t e r r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l ,
or w i t h an a - g l i d e :
rrrwf^r
*rfa<5c^r
*rrg^?fr
tabed/tob
mobad'la
bhatuk'lii
Other c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l ,
or w i t h an o - g l i d e :
ttf^Fs^rr
-qw^nfr
^T^TT^R
palikad/tsa
por'van'gii
sem'zuut'dar
When a s u f f i x c o n s i s t i n g o f ,
or b e g i n n i n g w i t h , a c h a r a c t e r with
has
as in t h e s e
basat
When such s u f f i x e s
character i s r e a l i s e d with
bas-to
zero-vowel,
examples:
va\
va^ot
va^-tat
a r e added t o v e r b a l b a s e s of t h r e e or more
c h a r a c t e r s of which t h e f i n a l
and p r e f i n a l
a r e okar c o n s o n a n t
c h a r a c t e r s , t h e r e a l i s a t i o n o f a k a r c h a r a c t e r s v a r i e s i n t h e way
i l l u s t r a t e d by t h e e x a m p l e s g i v e n b e l o w .
Verbal b a s e of t h r e e
semoz
sam*za
characters:
sam'zat
samaz-to
samaz-til
106
M A R A T H I
S E C T I O N
Verbal base of f o u r c h a r a c t e r s ,
fcTT^ST^
f ^ ^ c ^ T
vir'gheT,
vir'gholuun
Reading
examples
second,
t h i r d and f o u r t h
f^-EToScT
"f^T^To5c5T
vir'ghel.ot
vir'ghaT_-la
1. R e a l i s a t i o n of okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s a s i n n o t e a.
^^NFTtfT.
^HcTT
^fe^vST
oRT^fr
^qr^r
2.
'$ 5 %
>3WIT
*^3Ta^
^w^xcfc
W & h
^3TR
ftf^^UT
fia^^rr
above.
^ffe-snajoR
*g5R?ITxr
^ i ^ w
R e a l i s a t i o n of o k a r c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s a s i n n o t e b .
ofioo-rr
cfioScTt
f%^T
okar:
"TOTT
fll^npt
WTcTTcT
ft^&OT
^TT^^T
above,
^ 6 # $ 5
\3T^^To5rf
^TSWoScTTrT
R e a l i s a t i o n of c h a r a c t e r s
The t h r e e c h a r a c t e r s
palatal
or
ii
xjT
of t h e c o - v e r g w i t h v o w e l
,
\xT and
signs.
, are always r e a l i s e d
c o n s o n a n t s when t h e y a r e w r i t t e n w i t h t h e v o w e l s i g n s
, or w i t h any v o w e l s i g n i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s .
i s e d more f r e q u e n t l y
of
They a r e
a s a l v e o l a r c o n s o n a n t s when w r i t t e n w i t h
as
i
real-
other
e , the a l v e o l a r
or
to
district.
pal-
The r e a l i s a t i o n
a t a l consonants
of
t h e se c h a r a c t e r s as a l v e o l a r
in various contexts
is
i l l u s t r a t e d by t h e
or a s
examples
1. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p.131.
2 . See a b o v e , n o t e on t h e v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s ,
in
l.i.
of
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
10
words i n which t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s o c c u r i s a k n o w l e d g e o f t h e l a n g u a g e ,
a. P a l a t a l r e a l i s a t i o n w i t h t h e v o w e l s i g n s o f
cikot
ciid^
bhacii
jii
ii:
bhajii
majhii
signs:
3txT
vac on
niic
colon
ceyn
kocora
jen
me j a
ujeq
ceha
car
juva
c. A l v e o l a r r e a l i s a t i o n o f t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s ,
s i g n e x c e p t t h o s e of
ii
^>ft
WR
W*TWT
tsot'nii
tsar
tsom'tsa
KJ
fa I
%J
Kf
^r^t
"OT^r
ZQT[
vezon
semez
cuup
jhela
o k a r , or w i t h any v o w el
ey :
^
tsuuk
titse
KJ
.
zaga
zhad^
The emphatic p a r t i c l e
jeven_
%J
^ft
zhofken^
or
cehera
zhucjuup
"bazuu
dfft
^cfi
tsor
tsevk
<J
<J
^rte
%r
vazel
zor
mazhe
zhop
tT , w r i t t e n a s t h e f i n a l
c h a r a c t e r of a
word, i s always r e a l i s e d a s an a l v e o l a r c o n s o n a n t .
The words
-oftvji
and
and "SffaT
The vowel c h a r a c t e r s
r e a l i s e d r e s p e c t i v e l y as
^
and 3
('short'
ciiz
vowels)
and j
jhiiz
and 35
These
r u l e s i n c l u d e r e f e r e n c e t o t h e o r t h o g r a p h y of t h e m o d i f i e r known a s
108
MARATHI
SECTION
t h e a n u s v a r ! , and a r e t h e r e f o r e g i v e n i n t h e f u l l
r u l e s of O r t h o g r a p h y ,
3.
after
the m o d i f i e r s
statement
have b e e n
of
Marathi
discussed.
Modifiers.
Both t h e m o d i f i e r s
o c c u r r i n g i n S a n s k r i t are u s e d i n
Marathi,, though t h e r e a l i s a t i o n
in reading
of them d i f f e r s
writing
from t h e
realisation
Sanskrit.
2
1.
onusvar.^
The a n u s v a r i s
a l w a y s w r i t t e n i n Marathi i n t h e form o f a d o t
p l a c e d above a c h a r a c t e r ,
<3T
am
orrj
thus:
t
im
iirrj
SET
5R
karrj
icarrj
kiirj
sign.
The o r d e r o f s t r o k e s
and t h e o n u s v a r i s
uirj
errj
orrj
kerrj
korrj
kiirrj
The o n u s v a r i s w r i t t e n t o t h e r i g h t
kurrj
s i d e of a s u p e r s c r i b e d
vowel
i n w r i t i n g c h a r a c t e r s w i t h vowel
g i v e n i n t h e n o t e s on c a l l i g r a p h y
in the
signs
Sanskrit
section.
The o n u s v a r i s r e a l i s e d i n M a r a t h i a s
a.
The o n u s v a r ,
is s t i l l
originally
follows:
a mark i n d i c a t i n g n a s a l i s a t i o n
of a v o w e l ,
not n a s a l i s e d
is disregarded
i n s t a n d a r d modern s p e e c h .
in reading,
though i t
are
The o n u s v a r i n s u c h words
is s t i l l
written either
show t h e e t y m o l o g y of a word, t o p r e s e r v e a d i s t i n c t i o n
of
to
meaning
originally
nasalised,
Characters
1. See b e l o w .
or t o e x p r e s s g r a m m a t i c a l r e l a t i o n s h i p s .
3. i .
2.
See S a n s k r i t , C h , 2 . 3 . i .
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
w r i t t e n with the onusvar a r e , h o w e v e r, s t i l l
i s a t i o n of t h e v o w e l i n Konkani s p e e c h l .
i l l u s t r a t e some of t h e c o n t e x t s
109
r e a l i s e d with n a s a l-
The f o l l o w i n g
examples
i n which t h e a n u s v a r i s
written
hut n o t r e a l i s e d i n r e a d i n g .
Words:
#5T
"SBTiff
tuu
to
P a i r s of w o r d s :
kii
TO
TO
2
nav^
nav^
Grammatical f o r m s :
ye-ta
dat
pots
gohuu
pats^
pats5
#
he
^Tctt
kahii
tii
bas-to
bol-te
wfa
g^T^f
*l^t#
^ ^ f f
baget
mulane
mulanii
mulajii
An onusvar p l a c e d on a f i n a l
character
kor-uu
^r^r
ghorii
i s never
realised,
e x c e p t i n c e r t a i n c o n t e x t s i n modern Marathi w r i t i n g i n w h i c h
a d a p t a t i o n s of t h e s c r i p t a r e made i n o r d e r t o r e p r e s e n t
collo-
In many w o r d s , i n c l u d i n g m o s t S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , t h e
w r i t t e n on a c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d i n g one of t h e v o r g i i y
onusvar
characters
i s r e a l i s e d as t h e n a s a l c o n s o n a n t o f t h e same c l a s s a s t h e
consonant r e p r e s e n t e d by t h e f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r ,
b e f o r e a c h a r a c t e r of t h e c o - v a r g .
as a n a s a l c o n s o n a n t b e f o r e a f i n a l
or a s
When t h e anusvar i s
akar c o n s o n a n t
n
realised
character,
spoken
no
MARATHI
the f i n a l
SECTION
c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d w i t h an - g l i d e .
This
a t i o n o f t h e nusvar i s i l l u s t r a t e d hy t h e f o l l o w i n g
t*r
vsMtr
zz
f*m
flttft
rang
unts
njiir
unj;
bhint
Jimpii
As i n S a n s k r i t ,
t h e r e i s . an a l t e r n a t i v e method o f
examples:
^
themb
representing
T h i s method i s
p
i n t h e d i s c u s s i o n of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s
i s w r i t t e n on t h e c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d i n g t h e s u f f i x .
i s r e a l i s e d as
before
and o f t e n r e a l i s e d b e f o r e
c.
realis-
This
onusvar
t h e v a r i o u s forms o f t h e s u f f i x
the s u f f i x e s
"ft
and
"$?T e . g .
r*TRT
c*?Hfr
7*?HT
rm^f
mtff
tyan-1^sa^
tyan-cii
tyan-na
tyan-nii
tyan-Jii
When t h e o n u s v a r i s w r i t t e n on a c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d i n g one o f t h e
o n t o s t h or uusm c h a r a c t e r s ,
as i n Sanskrit loanwords,
l e a r n e d words u s e d i n t h e l i t e r a r y l a n g u a g e ,
various ways.
mostly
it is realised
in
Among t h e ways o f r e a l i s i n g t h e o n u s v a r i n s u c h
examples:
onusvar b e f o r e
T f , r e a l i s e d as
y , as in
onusvar b e f o r e
c^> r e a l i s e d a s
1 , as i n
sayyog
Hc/^M
o n u s v a r b e f o r e o t h e r o n t o s t h and uusm c h a r a c t e r s ,
savreksoi]^
kivva
vj"
1.
practice
hivsa
sollogh
r e a l i s e d as v .
mavs
sivh
See b e l o w , C h . 3 , 2 .
2 . ibid., 3.Class i i .
3 . The f i r s t
c h a r a c t e r i n t h e s e w o r d s i s <T combined w i t h ZJ" . S e e Ch. 3 * 3 * CI. 3 .
2+. S e e S a n s k r i t ,Ch. 2 , 3 . i . n o t e c .
5 . The l a s t c h a r a c t e r i n t h i s word
i s "*T combined w i t h ^ . See Ch. 3 , 3 . CI. 2 . i i i .
6 . The c h a r a c t e r
r e p r e s e n t s 3 5 combined w i t h ^ . S e e C h . 3 , 3 . C I . 4 . i . b .
N
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
In some e i g h t e e n t h c e n t u r y m a n u s c r i p t s t h e c h a r a c t e r
"67
is in-
s e r t e d b e t w e e n t h e c h a r a c t e r w i t h t h e o n u s v a r and a f o l l o w i n g
o n t o s t h or uusm c h a r a c t e r , f o r m i n g a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r w i t h i t ;
Ho^R
e.g.
d.
> sovhar
, Rjo^
, sivh
, sevrokson, .
^T?fr
ii.
^o^gJTJr
, oyjii.
visorg.
This m o d i f i e r
used in w r i t i n g Marathi.
I t occurs
t o i n d i c a t e p r o l o n g a t i o n or
s t r e s s . When i t i s w r i t t e n w i t h t h e f i n a l
words:
rarely
i n a f e w S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , and
i s sometimes w r i t t e n w i t h e x c l a m a t i o n s ,
words, i t i s r e a l i s e d a s
It is
character in Sanskrit
f o l l o w e d by the vowel
f c ^ Qij^T:
loan-
a , as in these
, vi/es'toha
When the v i s o r g o c c u r s m e d i a l l y i n a w o r d , i t i s r e a l i s e d e i t h e r a s
the d o u b l i n g o f t h e c o n s o n a n t o f t h e c h a r a c t e r w h i c h f o l l o w s i t , or
as a s p i r a t i o n a f t e r t h e v o w e l o f t h e c h a r a c t e r w i t h which i t i s
written; e.g.
c^:^
dukkh,
When the v i s o r g i s w r i t t e n a f t e r e x c l a m a t i o n s ,
i t usually
represents
a p r o l o n g a t i o n of t h e v o w e l , o r a s p i r a t i o n a f t e r t h e v o w e l , a s i n
t h e s e words:
1.
vjy. , u u . . . , o r uuh ; fs
, cheh ;
cfT,, vah .
See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 3 . i i .
2 . The f i r s t c h a r a c t e r i n t h i s word
is
combined w i t h
of S e e Ch. 2 , 3 . C I . 3 . i i .
MARATHI
I I 2
U. The Complete
SECTION
Syllabary.
o m i t t i n g the vowel c h a r a c t e r s
'Bombay' f o r m s .
, ^
the
section,
and c , and u s i n g o n l y t h e
The t a b l e i n w h i c h t h e v o w e l c h a r a c t e r s
and t h e m o d i f i e r s added t o t h e c h a r a c t e r
\3Ff , a r e p l a c e d a t
head of a s e r i e s of c o l u m n s c o n s i s t i n g o f e v e r y c o n s o n a n t
*R ),
(except
the
character
i s c a l l e d i n M a r a t h i the
characters'.
rTCRll
>
barakhoc^ii, t h e
'twelve
T h i s t a b l e i s o f t e n r e c i t e d i n s c h o o l s by c h i l d r e n
learn-
ing to read.
These two t a b l e s show t h e o r d e r i n w h i c h t h e c h a r a c t e r s
p l a c e d as i n i t i a l
c h a r a c t e r s o f words i n d i c t i o n a r i e s , w h i c h i s
same a s t h e o r d e r i n S a n s k r i t ,
to characters with the onusvar.
ed by t h e f o l l o w i n g
e x c e p t t h a t no s p e c i a l p l a c e i s
This d i f f e r e n c e
ai
arrjyo
arrjj"
arrjh
ak
Marathi:
ai
ak
arrjk
akh
arrjkh . . .
5.
in order i s
the
given
illustrat-
series:
Sanskrit: a
a
are
akh . .
ay
arrjy
arrjj" . .
N u m e r a l s.
section.
Punctuation.
In prose w r i t i n g ,
English prose.
Sanskrit
1.
the
t h e same s y s t e m o f p u n c t u a t i o n i s u s e d a s
system.^
See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , i + .
2 . ibid. , 5 .
3. ibid. , 6 .
in
the
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
Rules of Marathi
113
Orthography.
The r u l e s of Marathi o r t h o g r a p h y c o n c e r n t h e w r i t i n g of
vowels
and
( ^fT*T h r a s v
, diirgh
, or ' l o n g '
, or
'short'
vowels) ;
r u l e s are b e i n g m o d i f i e d
j" and
and
and t h e w r i t i n g o f
vowels)
the
forms.
the
Some of t h e
i n modern Marathi w r i t i n g ,
new r u l e s
h a v i n g b e e n p r e s c r i b e d i n 1932 b y t h e M a h a r a s h t r a L i t e r a t u r e
(
*T!TTn|
Tnf^r^T
"*rfWT
i n terms of
modifications
i.
a.
'standard'
position;
^Tla
baii
Hlool
malii
^frf^T
ani,
such a s
The v o w e l s of t h e
ing ' f i n a l '
^o^lcM
?[ ,
and
Society.
and v o w e l s i g n s a r e w r i t t e n i n a f i n a l
bhauu
and some S a n s k r i t
oftfcj k a v i
'crude form'
characters before
mulii-la
ohoH-^l
W\> t s a k u u
loanwords,
guru
of nouns f o l l o w
the
this rule
a d d i t i o n of s u f f i x e s ;
kavii-tsa
Pronouns are w r i t t e n w i t h t h e
'short'
^J'^f
regarde.g.
guruu-n e
v o w e l s : fclcrtl t i l a , "^c^ST
tula
and v o w e l s i g n s a r e w r i t t e n i n a m e d i a l
p o s i t i o n immediately b e f o r e
a final
1.
2.
f o l l o w e d by t h e
e.g.
Exceptions:
b.
orthography,
R u l e s c o n c e r n i n g t h e w r i t i n g of
Some
The r u l e s g i v e n below a r e
recommended by t h e M a h a r a s h t r a L i t e r a t u r e
Society
of t h e s e r u l e s have become w i d e l y a c c e p t e d .
stated f i r s t
trad-
tiik
\5fT^o5 z a i i l
*|c?>
See a b o v e , C h . l .
These r u l e s a p p l y t o t h e v o w e l s i g n s
vowel c h a r a c t e r s .
okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r ;
muul
"^B*T
gheuun
corresponding with
the
e.g.
ii4
M A R A T H I
words, e . g .
, hit
v o w e l s a r e w r i t t e n i n some S a n s k r i t
,
> purus
the onusvar b e f o r e a f i n a l
bhint,
, unts
character ,
ekar consonant c h a r a c t e r ,
, citr ,
loan-
when t h e y o c c u r w i t h
as
; o r when t h e y o c c u r b e f o r e a f i n a l
as i n
S E C T I O N
in
conjunct
monusy^. The S a n s k r i t
o r t h o g r a p h y i s p r e s e r v e d i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s s u c h a s *JT^t
muurkh^, and
c.
In a l l
cft"5T ,
tiivr .
2
other p o s i t i o n s ,
or f o l l o w e d by any f i n a l c h a r a c t e r
an okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r ,
1*<ft
firs*
gsRsr
kitii
tik'd'e
tuk'^a
the
vihiir
(crude form,
vihirii-)
ii.
R u l e s c o n c e r n i n g t h e o n u s v a r w r i t t e n i n g r a m m a t i c al
forms.5
a.
s i n g u l a r and p l u r a l , e n d i n g - i n
Tf
a r e w r i t t e n w i t h t h e o n u s v a r on t h e s e f i n a l v o w e l s ;
tii
lug'a^ii
sftif
mo^he
Exceptions:
thoc|ii
ker'cjuu
^rf
poc[*te
c*|uf| , l o n i i
gehuu , i s m a s c u l i n e
mule
^
zhale
kelii
and H I D
U
, panii
bhiiti.
| or
e.g.
bhanj^e
5TT5
W%
yave
plural.
, i n t h e n e u t e r forms of
o , i n informal speech.
T h i s change
of s p o k e n form i s o f t e n r e p r e s e n t e d by w r i t i n g t h e o n u s v a r
1.
L.
e.g.
f^r%%-
he
except
alone,
See b e l o w , C h . 3 .
2.ibid. 3 . C l a s s 3 . i i i . b .
3 . i b i d . Class 3 . i .
ibid.Class 3 i i i . a .
5. The o n u s v a r i n n o t u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d
i n g r a m m a t i c a l forms,* e x c e p t i n t h e c o n t e x t g i v e n b e l o w i n b .
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
as,
for instance,
zhale
b.
i n t h e d i a l o g u e o f n o v e l s o r dramas; e . g .
zhalo
ltf
*Ttt
5ft
bhancje
bhan^o
bore
singular,
and b e f o r e a l l s u f f i x e s
ghora-t
baro
bage-t
of words b e f o r e
as
kholii-t
final
e.g.
e.g.
TRf
mage,
Suffixes
e.g.
mula-nii
i s always
Tiff
realised
suffixes .
ending in
p u d h e , ^c"
<
| *T
representing
and
\3^T ; and on t h e
v3TT ,
khalii
certain
5
,
* ^
v3fl"cft
>
ta .
cf)^" koa"e
and p a r t i c l e s
ending
i n a c h a r a c t e r w i t h t h e vowel
t h e s e forms o c c u r i n t h e d i a l o g u e
matra, a s i n
, pucjhe
XJcf
Xi5
, pua"he ,
IfRf
*TT"*T , mago . T h i s u s e o f t h e o n u s v a r t o r e p r e s e n t
tTTTFT p a s ' n o
in
"3)*T e . g .
f^cfi^T
, tik'd^uun
ef",^"
,
the f i n a l
omitting the
mage ,
t h e forms o f
and t o some p a r t i c l e s
sign
o . When
o f dramas or n o v e l s ,
colloquial
form'
$\
c h a r a c t e r of p a r t i c l e s
Exception:
of
in the
r e p r e s e n t i n g the 'crude
The onusvar i s w r i t t e n on t h e c h a r a c t e r s
suffixes;
man/sa-huun
the a d d i t i o n of t h e s u f f i x
n , and o f t e n b e f o r e o t h e r
rT i s a d d e d ,
i n the p l u r a l ,
The onusvar w r i t t e n on t h e c h a r a c t e r
1.
5R
The onusvar i s w r i t t e n on t h e c h a r a c t e r w h i c h h a s t h e v o w e l o f
the ' c r u d e form' of words t o w h i c h t h e s u f f i x
c.
oR% >
tiked/no
The mark of n a s a l i s a t i o n i s p a r t o f t h e s u f f i x , w h i c h r e p r e s e n t s
the word OTTrT , S t . The i n i t i a l v o w e l o f t h i s word c o a l e s c e s w i t h
the vowel of t h e crude form o f t h e noun t o w h i c h i t i s added a s a
suffix.
2 . See a b o v e , 3 . M o d i f i e r s , i . b .
n6
d.
MARATHI
SECTION
The a n u s v a r i s w r i t t e n on c e r t a i n s u f f i x e s
1st.
added t o v e r b a l
bases:
p e r s o n s i n g u l a r and p l u r a l :
elf - t o
rf
-te
^ -ii
and t h e v e r b a l f o r m s
-e
\3Tf^"
eff , t a
2nd. p e r s o n p l u r a l :
3F> - u u
>
3TT^f >
3 r d . p e r s o n s i n g u l a r and p l u r a l :
>3fl" , a , and
and t h e v e r b a l f o r m s
-lo
if^
'TT^f ,
^5" - l e
Tl^f
off
> ^
nahii
nahii
n a h i i and
""(CTh n a h i i t
variable
adjectives.
Suffixes
cTT t
ta
w h i c h a r e added t o form v e r b a l
,
clMI >
tana
w r i t t e n in d i a l o g u e as
e.
"OT
, uu , and
particles:
^
, re
and r e a l i s e d a s
r[ )
(sometimes
The o n u s v a r i s w r i t t e n on c e r t a i n forms o f t h e p e r s o n a l
pronouns,
when t h e y s t a n d i n t h e same g r a m m a t i c a l r e l a t i o n s h i p
other
1.
^ff . e.g.
iff
, mii
s33""X"st , a m h i i
kon.il .
The c h a r a c t e r
represents
mho
cj^lft
to
suffixes
,
tumhii ,
1
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
117
R u l e s o f Orthography o f t h e M a h a r a s h t r a L i t e r a t u r e
The m o d i f i c a t i o n
of the r u l e s
ed hy t h e Maharashtra L i t e r a t u r e
the w r i t i n g of t h e o n u s v a r .
pamphlet
o f s t a n d a r d o r t h o g r a p h y recommend-
The r u l e s
^jTc^T f H I ^ 1 %
s
Society.
f^flJIT
( J u d d h o l e k h o n a t s e nove niyom)
p u b l i s h e d i n Poona i n 1 9 3 6 . The m o s t i m p o r t a n t m o d i f i c a t i o n s
of the
s t a n d a r d r u l e s g i v e n above a r e t h e s e :
a.
I f t h e onusvar u s u a l l y w r i t t e n on c e r t a i n words ( t h a t
suffixes
or p a r t i c l e s )
i s not realised
i t should not be w r i t t e n , u n l e s s
i s , not
i n modern Marathi
speech,
i t i s c o n s i d e r e d important t o
show t h e e t y m o l o g y o f t h e w o r d , o r u n l e s s
i t i s t h e o n l y means o f
d i s t i n g u i s h i n g i n meaning b e t w e e n p a i r s o f w o r d s , a s g i v e n above
i n 3 i . n o t e a.
b.
The onusvar u s u a l l y w r i t t e n on t h e s u f f i x e s
the p a r t i c l e s g i v e n above i n r u l e
go3T%
mulane
g^T^fr
mulanii
khalii
*TFT
OTTCTT
mage
ata
5fl f
on
on t h e p l u r a l form
TTfafcT
> nahiit
The onusvar w r i t t e n on t h e f i n a l
o^i ^ | .
, should
form r e f e r s t o t h e f i r s t
and t h e s e c o n d p e r s o n p l u r a l ;
, should be o m i t t e d ,
colloquial
> nahii
s i n g u l a r or p l u r a l ,
kahii
i n i i . a . and c .
be w r i t t e n o n l y when t h i s v e r b a l
d.
writte n to represent
forms such a s t h o s e g i v e n a b o v e
c.
a n (
i i . c . should be omitted, e . g .
Wfc^
The onusvar i s , h o w e v e r , s t i l l
~f
person,
and t h e o n u s v a r
, should be omitted.
c h a r a c t e r o f t h e wo.rd
cfitsfT >
C H A P T E R
CONJUNCT
CHARACTERS
two or more
c o n s o n a n t s w h i c h a r e t o be r e a l i s e d w i t h o u t an i n t e r v e n i n g
C h a r a c t e r s formed i n t h i s way a r e c a l l e d
by Marathi g r a m m a r i a n s ,
writing
in s c h o o l s .
characters
or
^t^T'!^
^SJrFTTSflT
(zoa^aksor)
(soyyuktaksor)
in the teaching
The c o n s t r u c t i o n and c a l l i g r a p h y
is described
i n the Sanskrit
i n w r i t i n g Marathi c o r r e s p o n d s ,
vowel.
of
of
conjunct
s e c t i o n ^ , but the s t y l e
used
the
p
style
of the Bombay c h a r a c t e r s
given in the t a b l e s
in t h i s
The Marathi c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s a r e d i s c u s s e d i n t h i s
same c l a s s e s a s t h e S a n s k r i t c o n j u n c t
1.
i.
djiobbuu
ii.
contexts:
from t h e modern l a n g u a g e s ;
the
i n Marathi.
o c c u r i n Marathi i n t h e s e
I n Marathi w o r d s , t h a t
chapter in
or
e.g.
ghod.yaT,
vhava
In S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , e i t h e r Words u s e d commonly i n M a r a t h i ,
l e a r n e d words u s e d nly i n t h e l i t e r a r y
pustok
1.
See S a n s k r i t ,
Ch.3l
3.
See
Ch.3/3
Sanskrit,
characters.^
C o n t e x t s of C o n j u n c t C h a r a c t e r s
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s
section
potr
language;
e.g.
iijvor
2.
See a b o v e , C h . 2 . i
- iii.
or
C O N J U N C T CHARACTERS
iii.
In loanwords from o t h e r l a n g u a g e s ;
119
e.g.
s-fejen
2. R e a l i s a t i o n of C o n j u n ct C h a r a c t e r s i n M a r a t h i .
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s a r e r e a l i s e d i n r e a d i n g a s s y l l a b l e s
consist-
c h a r a c t e r of a w o r d , i t i s
as i n " ^ T T T
/astr'.
usually
i n words g i v e s r i s e t o a p r o b l e m of
zerospell-
For i n s t a n c e , when a f o r m a t i v e p a r t i c l e b e g i n n i n g w i t h a c o n -
sonant c h a r a c t e r i s added t o a v e r b a l b a s e e n d i n g i n a f i n a l
consonant c h a r a c t e r ,
ised with zero-vowel.
the f i n a l
okar
c h a r a c t e r of t h e b a s e i s u s u a l l y
This r e a l i s a t i o n
of the c o n s e c u t i v e
i s s i m i l a r to the r e a l i s a t i o n of a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r .
real-
characters
Similar prob-
lems a r i s e i n o t h e r c o n t e x t s , w h e r e an okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r
is
and
p a r t e n d s i n an kar c o n s o n a n t
c h a r a c t e r , and the s e c o n d p a r t b e g i n s w i t h a c o n s o n a n t
character.
conjunct
characters.
3. C l a s s e s of Conjunct C h a r a c t e r s
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s of a l l
in Marathi.
Sanskrit
Those w h i c h a r e u s e d i n w r i t i n g Marathi
are
120
MARATHI
SECTION
shown, hy e x a m p l e s g i v e n i n e a c h c l a s s , w h i c h i n c l u d e some S a n s k r i t
loanwords f r e q u e n t l y use d i n Marathi.
More r a r e l y u s e d l o a n w o r d s ,
w h i c h may o c c u r i n l i t e r a r y M a r a t h i , a r e i n c l u d e d among t h e
given w i t h each c l a s s
C l a s s 1.
in the Sanskrit
Two s i m i l a r c h a r a c t e r s
section.
joined.
The s e r i e s of c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s
given in the Sanskrit s e c t i o n .
occurring in Sanskrit
Most of t h e c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s
the Marathi s y l l a b a r y o c c u r i n t h i s c l a s s .
-rro
is written
preceding another
examples
The c h a r a c t e r
is
of
representing
representing
consonant .
2
A c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t i n g an a s p i r a t e d c o n s o n a n t i s n o t
w r i t t e n as t h e f i r s t
usually
p a r t of a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r i n t h i s c l a s s ;
i n Marathi w r i t i n g t h e c h a r a c t e r s
<o^o(
sometimes u s e d .
-nno
The c o m b i n a t i o n s
, khkho
and
and
-mmo
^
are
, t t
n
but
n s
represented
e.g.
^WfcT or ^f-CTff^
semmoti
or
TRcT
but
gemmot
sonnidhi
but
nn
t h e f i r s t b e i n g kar, a r e r e a l i s e d
o r d i n a r y s p e e c h i n t h e same way a s c o n j u n c t
^F^TT
anna
in
characters:
^T^Pf
fo^T
%Sc^T
STTTT
SfTWft
an^-ne-^
killa
bol-la^
cjsgga
ag'gadii^
1. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , C o n j u n c t C h a r a c t e r s , C l a s s 1.
2 . See b e l o w , C l a s s 3* i i i . a *
3 . Verbal f o r m s .
U. Compound word.
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS
12
Reading e x a m p l e s .
1
iff
^1
S J ^ v T
f%FR
T^fr
^XXM
3Sf
^nnujor
ft
Class 2 . Two v s r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s
3?3TFT
"TTTT
f
^ T o ^ T
T|T
W
5 ^
W
joined.
The f u l l s e r i e s of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s
in Sanskrit i s given in the S a n s k r i t
i n t h i s c l a s s which o c c u r
section .
2
The c h a r a c t e r s of
this
as loanwords i n Marathi l i t e r a r y
texts,
i.
c5Fv
-kto
-tko
-gdo
-dg
-gdh
-pto
-aba
-bd
- b j
-dgh
FT
-tpo
ii.
Most of the c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n u n d e r i i . a .
in the Sanskrit
section
occur i n l i t e r a r y M a r a t h i , r e p r e s e n t i n g homorganic n a s a l
conson-
a n t s ; but t h e method of r e p r e s e n t i n g t h e s e c o n s o n a n t s by w r i t i n g
3
'death',
a learned Sanskrit
loanword,
i s w r i t t e n w i t h t h e c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r , which d i s t i n g u i s h e s
from the word w i t h a Marathi suffix,^"^TRT,
dehat,
, -tn
occur i n Marathi.
it
|T
ii.b.
i s not
1. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 3 1 .
2 . See S a n s k r i t ,Ch. 3 , 3 . C i . 2 . The
numbers i . - i v . c o r r e s p o n d w i t h t h e a r r a n g e m e n t of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s
i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n .
3- S e e a b o v e , C h . 2 , 3 . i . nusvar.
122
MARATHI
SECTION
c a l l i g r a p h i c a l l y a conjunct character,
and i t
jjj a r e u s u a l l y
i n t h e v o r n o m a l a . Words b e g i n n i n g w i t h
last
iii.
i n Marathi
occur in Sanskrit
-gne
-ghno
Only two c h a r a c t e r s
loanwords:
^*
-tmo
-dma
-pno
o f t h i s group o c c u r i n M a r a t h i ,
, -nmo
and 5 ^
consonant c h a r a c t e r s ,
Jok-tii
o
Reading e x a m p l e s ^
i.
Characters
g u pt
Sanskrit
consecutive
t h e f i r s t b e i n g o k a r , are r e a l i s e d i n
s p e e c h i n t h e same way a s c o n j u n c t
Jokti
in
, -nmo .
The e x a m p l e s g i v e n b e l o w i l l u s t r a t e words i n w h i c h
C l a s s 3 C h a r a c t e r s
placed
loanwords:
*FT
iv.
included
dictionaries.
These c h a r a c t e r s
-kmo
is often
ordinary
characters:
kap-to
/obd
ub'dar
characters.
j o i n e d w i t h f o l l o w i n g TJf .
The s e r i e s of c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s c l a s s i s g i v e n i n t h e
Sanskrit
s e c t i o n ^ . A l l t h e c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s of t h e Marathi s y l l a b a r y ,
cept
^* , no
and ^
, no , o c c u r i n t h i s c l a s s ,
only in S a n s k r it loanwords.
1 . Verbal f o r m s .
3 . See S a n s k r i t ,
ex-
thoug h some o c c u r
Many of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s o c c u r i n Marathi
2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n of e x a m p l e s , s e e
Ch.3,3.CI.3.i.
p.131.
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS
a s a r e s u l t of c e r t a i n g r a m m a t i c a l p r o c e s s e s .
sometimes w r i t t e n w i t h c h a r a c t e r s
vowel sound in words s u c h a s
Reading e x a m p l e s
YTSFZT
123
E n g l i s h loanwords a r e
joined with
XJ[ , t o r e p r e s e n t t h e
, 'Dank' and
olfoT)
cpipT
'camp'.
^ f t s ^
^ZTT^T
tfts^TFf-
6TVZTT-cr
tuijTc^T
^TToZjTH
oZTT^TPT
T^ZT
STq"^
ii. Characters j o i n e d w i t h f o l l o w i n g
TJ^f
*f^*T
of .
Only a few of t h e c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s
p
the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n
Ri#mi
in t h i s s e r i e s , g i v e n in
, o c c u r in M a r a t h i , most o f w h i c h o c c u r i n l o a n -
i n t h e examples g i v e n below.
o^" , S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s w i t h
o k a r c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i n some words
qi<fy\
, vala
, o r qT"T
i l l u s t r a t e s the r e a l i s a t i o n of c o n s e c u t i v e consonant
when t h e f i r s t
i s o k a r , in t h e same way a s c o n j u n c t
, var ,
characters,
characters.
For example:
pokvann
cjak'vala
see
1.
For t r a n s c r i p t i o n ,
2.
See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s 3 . i i .
p.131.
dhvoni
budh'var
124
MARATHI
Reading
examples
^f^cT
iii.
a.
SECTION
3qTft
Characters
^TTc^T
preceding another
The c h a r a c t e r s
\' 7T , reph
or w i t h f o l l o w i n g ""Jf
series
a r e formed "by p l a c i n g t h e s t r o k e
, above t h e c h a r a c t e r b e f o r e w h i c h
as t h e f i r s t
^RcT:
character.
in this
These c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s
^r*q~r^r
o f two o r more c o n s e c u t i v e
1[
called
i s t o be
consonants.
c h a r a c t e r s , w h e t h e r kar or w i t h v o w e l
on c a l l i g r a p h y
characters
d o u b l i n g may s o m e t i m e s o c c u r .
Sanskrit
The c h a r a c t e r s w h i c h o c c u r i n Marathi
zero-vowel,
f o l l o w e d by another consonant c h a r a c t e r ,
realisation
o f rep h w r i t t e n above a c o n s o n a n t
1.
and i n loan-
thoug h i n t h e w r i t i n g o f
The f o l l o w i n g e x a m p l e s i l l u s t r a t e
korta
These
C h a r a c t e r s a r e n o t u s u a l l y d o u b l e d when
w r i t t e n w i t h r e p h i n Marathi w o r d s ,
are i l l u s t r a t e d
this
signs,
section.
words from o t h e r l a n g u a g e s .
realised
The p l a c e o f
s t r o k e on t h e v a r i o u s
in the Sanskrit
s e c t i o n2
kor-ta^
For t r a n s c r i p t i o n ,
2 . See S a n s k r i t ,
3 . Verbal f o r m .
orpon^
see
sor'pen^
p.131.
C h . 3 . 3. , Class
3iii.a.
of
similar
, with
to the
character:
tark
par'kar
C O N J U N C T CHARACTERS
A s p e c i a l form of r e p h i s w r i t t e n
<qf
or
with
i n Marathi w o r d s .
to represent
T h i s f o r m of reph i s
^-T i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , "but i t
The f o l l o w i n g
w r i t t e n i n t h i s form w i t h
]T
examples i l l u s t r a t e
girhaiik
suffixes
reph
rhosv^
and
arises
Other w o r d s a r e u s u a l l y w r i t t e n w i t h
suurya-^"
sSTT^ 1^1
this
to
from
the
e.g.
suury^
The word
written
is usually restricted
superscribed reph.
sometime s
korhacja
grammatical p r o c e s s e s .
preceding
form i n a S a n s k r i t text"'".
torha
125
dus'ra
> when c h a n g e d t o t h e
or p a r t i c l e s ,
'crude f o r m ' , b e f o r e
i s d i s t i n g u i s h e d from t h e
word vSTp^TTlt by t h i s d i f f e r e n c e
i n t h e w r i t i n g of
^-^T^rfacarya-*
acary-'
dus'rya-^
' c r u d e f o r m'
adding
of
the
reph:
-34MI$)
^Tf-^F^T-
acarii^
acarya-^"
Reading examples 7
cpfe
*$Jji
Wr
srsftc-r
v$
orSc^
mffidb
^r^rf
rfr
tp?
&F$t*
c#rJ
-mi
<sp?w
rih"
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C I . 3 . i i i . a .
2. Sanskrit ' h r e s v e ' .
3. S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d .
U. ' c r u d e f o r m ' . 5 . ' s p i r i t u a l p r e c e p t o r ' .
6. 'Brahman c o o k ' .
7 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 3 ' 1 .
126
MARATHI
b.
following another
The f u l l
section .
1
series
SECTION
character.
of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s
Only a f e w o f
i s given in the
these characters
Sanskrit
occur i n Marathi, m o s t l y
S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s and some E n g l i s h l o a n w o r d s .
For t h e
simplification
of p r i n t i n g ,
times used.
The r e a d i n g e x a m p l e s g i v e n b e l o w i l l u s t r a t e
and
in
, Jra
are
the
some-
charact-
e r s of t h i s group w h i c h o c c u r i n M a r a t h i .
Reading
examples
5R*r .
iv.
a
Sb"*T
^r^T
3TTO^
Characters w i t h preceding
preceding another
The c h a r a c t e r s
of
f^T
^T^T
or w i t h f o l l o w i n g
character.
t h i s group w h i c h o c c u r i n S a n s k r i t a r e
in the Sanskrit s e c t i o n ^ .
The c h a r a c t e r s
following another
The c h a r a c t e r s
S a n s k r i t section**.
of
below,
character.
the
The r e a d i n g e x a m p l e s g i v e n b e l o w i l l u s t r a t e
the
Marathi.
The f o l l o w i n g w o r d s i l l u s t r a t e
consecutive consonant
the f i r s t
i n t h e same way a s
being akar, r e a l i s e d
ul'-Jiii
bol-to5
ghal-ne5
charact-.
conjunct
"Wc^f
characters:
1.
are
t h i s group u s e d i n S a n s k r i t a r e g i v e n i n
c h a r a c t e r s which occur i n
ers,
given
o c c u r r i n g i n Marathi
i l l u s t r a t e d by t h e w o r d s g i v e n a s r e a d i n g e x a m p l e s
b.
%Tc*T
bas-la5
ghet-la5
See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C I . 3 . i i i . b .
2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n
examples, see p . 1 3 1 .
3 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C I . 3 . i v . a .
ibid. , iv.b.
5. Verbal forms.
of
C O N J U N C T CHARACTERS
Reading e x a m p l e s
mmc^TOT
C l a s s U.
127
ohlcl
vargiiy characters
^"c^f
c^Tofr
cW
j o i n e d w i t h p r e c e d i n g or f o l l o w i n g
uusm
characters.
i.
vorgiiy characters
a.
"8^ or
The f u l l
series
joined with
or
preceding a v o r g i i y
character.
of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s
given i n . t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n .
2
^j" .
occurring in Sanskrit
T h o s e w h i c n o c c u r i n Marathi
i l l u s t r a t e d in the examples g i v e n b e l o w .
is
are
Most of t h e c h a r a c t e r s
i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , and t h e c h a r a c t e r "^"l o c c u r s i n E n g l i s h
occur
loan-
words.
The f o l l o w i n g e x a m p l es
u t i v e consonant c h a r a c t e r s ,
same way as c o n j u n c t
illustrate
the f i r s t
M a r a t h i words i n w h i c h
consec-
b e i n g okar, are r e a l i s e d
in the
characters:
oys'poys
Reading examples
For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 3 2 .
2 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s 4 . i . a .
3 . Verbal form.
i+. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 3 2 .
1.
128
M A R A T H I
b.
or ^
following a vorgiiy
S E C T I O N
character.
Only a few of t h e s e
characters
These a r e
The c h a r a c t e r
Sanskrit
illustrated
jJjT , k s o ,
is
n o t c a l l i g r a p h i c a l l y a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r , and i s o f t e n i n c l u d e d
in
t h e v o r i j o m a l a . Words b e g i n n i n g w i t h t h i s c h a r a c t e r a r e u s u a l l y
placed
i n Marathi d i c t i o n a r i e s a f t e r words b e g i n n i n g w i t h
5
Reading e x a m p l e s
-q%^T
oTr^Tc^
ii.
cT
<ft8pT
tfftij
cFTT
a.
p r e c e d i n g an nunasik
^ .
<3fcFSTrar$t
characters,
character.
t h e c h a r a c t e r s i s u s e d i n M a r a t h i , i n t h e word
b.
f o l l o w i n g an nunasik
The c h a r a c t e r s
"C^"
brahman^ .
character.
, -nh o ,
, -nh
and
*^jjT
, -mh , o c c u r
i n Marathi^.
Reading e x a m p l e s .
0
ofiTr-f-af-
1.
2.
3.
U.
6.
s=^Tofr
*^TcTHT
above.
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS
Marathi p r o s e
-q-|^n-^f
i%cR' ff
*rf|$
n%.gyf
^q=n
x
JlfittS
o;tft S i f t q T f ^ K
fcT^HT^
^ ^ w i t q i ^ T
^ r o f -spfrjcft
ftr^T^fRT^ri^
tfte "g^i
^t^T v3Trf^t
iRcSf
^H^T
^flcITcT.
. W ^ T 3ff
%of ^ r q fofcerT ^ ^ i ^ q i
sif?
^f?T^5R
T T ^ R
" q s ^ , ^ ^
gpf STfTFft
Vf&
passage
i<
-^fq-jfa-
t&zft
srrl.qT
^ r ^ f t c^fe^r
7
STITT^
*rtff
SFf
^ T f ^
^^mcft ^ T I J ^ I ^ I K ^ I ^^rr.^uiji^^ ^ c T T w s q M ^ o s
1. M a r a t h i V a c h a n m a l a , B k . k , p . 1 5 , b y V a s a n t
Keshav B h i k a j i D h a v a l e , G i r g a u m , Bombay.
Ramchandra
Nerurkar,
sfr
pub.
MARATHI
SECTION
T r a n s c r i p t i o n o f R e a d i n g Examples
Chapter 2 .
l.i.
jog
chot
Is
pod
noth
khor^
dheg
l.ii.
kr
dhr
jsl
kl
vr
lth
dhrr
dhekol
bdl
tlph
lv'kr
psl'ton.
bes
? t
phonos
Jehor
yo;
khes
hey'gey
ser'seko");
her'kot
henve^
her
J*er
sod^ek
dejok
ser've ";
meson/vet
-
2.ii.
kha
/ok
Jebe
herein
leher
ley
tsev
reyet
vezen
kenev
mezel
ker*vet
Jev
tehe
phes
sehe
seres
sehez
kele/
phesel
mes'let
he^ed
ve^ei;
d/ieve^
kel/meT_et
zevel/ser
an
ath
iiq.
zeii
ud^et
thiik
kay
cjoTa
baii
ledh
zer
dhen'ger
kerem'tots
J"et'po"(;
ser'pon.
semez'tei^s
2.i.
eyt
menu
eyvez
n 9
semoy
hezer
phel,
khe],
sere^
zevel,
tsej/voT;
beT/ket
mez'zeve^
<l
nun
seii
aper^
vecon
gerez
sen^
res
chel.
pe^es
khen/ke-|;
z h o t *kn
ghsr
ol
vy
tsor
(; P l
tsor'hot
9 r ,
phbt
zhegec"_
thb'kt
kets'kef
teney
nozsr
hot
ve/
Jepeth
serek
peser
besev
thor
lov
dhsm
zht
pod,
zer^
{hensk
zspst
men/ g"|;
dts'kt
go v e t
t^serot
per'ker
poked"/vet
kht
l^sokh
thkt
pe-^set
joy
dor
cln
vrv
thg
bht
bhejen
zekhem
vn
bhr
kor'met
kets'ret
sor
hos
mon
<tph
gsd^'b^
"tjsts'k^
dhsm'k"!;
tsem'ket
khe-t ' p o t
phej; ' k e n
l.iii.
bogh
kon.
gho^ok
tsoo^han.
peked^
khecjek
modot
dhemok
dhe
tso
no
hii
ruuc|h
hoy
peysa
bhauu
to
jhiil
nav
krpa
rsi
iid
uus
neuu
eyrer;
ne
pey
uuth
iter
se^eii
dhuu
tel
mevz
jev
kevi
dhobii Jiju
suii
eke
ek
eyn
u s el.
ojhor
chi
eyk
evt
d^ekh
evsedh
bhii
ga
ocjh
eyj
uter
ol_ekh
ghe
ev"|;
rn.
ukhe^
thuu
ho
dos
drcjh b e y l
hit
duudh
khecjuu
Jev b e h u n e y e
berii
chatii
bhiiti
g u ru
tsevda
yeii
rtu
eyke
oTii
TRANSCRIPTION
13
maydan
rumal
"[he v l In
jevuun kavtuk
nokar
becjuuk
gariiud.
ka"|;hor
jiivan
zamiin
deim^
patois
laa"haii t a r a z m i 1^Bui"|;ii
vagayre
-^savpajii
pahije
mara-|;b.ii
"J; ilcaxi-uL
bayragii
bhikarii
itar
ek
aykila
utar
uufh
gheiin
aii
dhuuun
p. 106. k h i d / k i i
kor'cja diis'ra kap'c^e
ik'cje
tek'cjii
kun/bii
^savk'/ii
koy'ta
guc]/ghe
av'gha
par'dhii
ev'cjha
bat'mii
tar'buuz
ker'sunii
phavz'dar
.fik'vari
ub'dar
mik'tats
khabar'dar
phasav'rjuuk
hat'us'na
soqav'nuuk
lahan'pana
ka^-to
pas'ra
pasar-tat
sar'kuun
sarak-tiil
g h a s ' r u u n g h a s ' r i i l ghasar~.fi i l
a^h'Tuun
a"|;hav-tiil
bigh'cjuun
bighad^lela
ad/kha^at
ad/kha^-tat
kal_at
ghasar
bighad^
Chapter 3
C l a s s 1.
phikka
akkal
sakkhii
cjagga
kat^sa
gaccii
iccha
lajja
ha"j;tii l a " t t
t t
khacj^a J"a:nr|av p a t t a u t t h a n r a d d i i biiddhi
ann chappann lapph a d^habbuu h i y y a k i r r h a l l i i s a v v a i / / h i s s a
n 9
Class 2.
yukti
Jabd
lagn
camatkar
sadgui|
gupt
satphal
atma
padma
Class
vaky
rajy
gaqya
pothya
dhohyane
karavyas
hyala
Class
cjokyala
jyane
pec[hyatsa
udya
abhyas
vyakhyan
ma^yane
upodghat
mugdh
samapt
udbhav
ratn
jnan
sarjkhya
tujhya
hor|_yas
madhye
bhyala
ava/y
atmyatsa
agya
petya
arjyatse
nyahal/ne
ramy
sa^kon.
utpann
-udbodhak
phakt
janm
varjmay
ghya
mo"|;hyane
tyacya
pyala
suury
rahasy
raukhy
naphyatsa
kholya
mamisy
nadya
3.ii.
kvacit
gvahii
ucchvas
jvala
vi/vas
iijvar
svacch
svapn
dvara
sarasvatii
tattvajjian
mahattv
anvay
sarv
dhvaja
Class
ticya
citthya
svatah
kevha
vhava
vha^
Jvas
3iii-
a.
t a r k imiurkh marg d i i r g h
khurcii
k h u r c y a a r z kor "; garc[
puurr^
kiirti
arthat
vardal
ardha
arpar^
uurph
barph
durbal garbh dharm dharmik
dhayry
sarv
darjan hars
nars
tarha
durlabh
kurhac[
puurvii
varse
sarvat
ardhya
ryarya
-
b.
kram
prayatn
Jriimant
kram
priiti
sahasr
irjgrajii
agraha
tras
abruu
prapt
namr
tryaipqav
samudr
chidr
tiivr
citr
tamra"";
MARATHI
132
Class
SECTION
3iv.
valgana
phalguri
svalp
kolha
kalhaii
Ihovii
klas
sle\
C l a s s U.
i.a.
ajcary
pajcim
puskal,
vyavastha
stabdh
nisphal
strii
strya
spast
drs^l
Jastr
sneha
skuul
b.
vatsal
poriiksa
suuksm
ksarajah
ii.
tumhii
Marathi P r o s e
amhii
Passage
us ";
r a s t r Jresth
rasta
tast
krsn.
snan
sthir
rastyane
drs"|;ya
sthiti
ajcary
sphuurti
s^ejan
post
durlaks
utsuk
kantiane
tilksr^
ak'smat
nhavii
ksatriya
mhatara
vansa
oksaboksii
unha^a
cinh
p r a t y e k J o h o r a t s e m a h a t t v k a h i i ek v i T i s t g o ^ t i i t a h e . a p ' l y a y a
mumboii i l a k h y a t az m u m b o i i , eh'medabad, s o l a p u u r v o g o y r e Johore v y a parasa"{;hii p r o s i d d h
ahet.
s a t a r a , eh'med'noger, vijapuur vogoyre
Johore e y t i h a s i k drs"|;ya m a h a t t v a c i i a h e t .
per]cjher'puur, n a / i k v a g a y r e Johore dharmik drs"|;ya J r e s ^ h g e n i l i i z a t a t .
pur e J o h o r a c i i
p r e s i d d h i v i d v a n a n t s e raaher'ghar mhor|Uun v i j e s a h e . karon. ya t h i k a n i i
sarv prakar'cya Jiksenacya j i t ' k y a s o y i i a h e t , t i t ' k y a i t e r t h i k a n i i
n a h i i t , ani p u u r v i i
p e J v y a n c y a v e l i i kay kimva h o l l i c y a
irjgrejii
r a j ' v a ^ i i t kay m a h a r a s t r a t i i l v i d v a n l o k a n t s e t e ek a v e c f t e s t h a n
houun r a h i l e a b e . pure Jahar s a m u d r a p a t i i p a s u u n 1850 phuu"(; u n t s a h e .
ya J a h a r a c i i s t h a p a n a don Je v a r s a p u u r v i i
Jivajiimaharajani^se guru
d a d a j i i k o r ^ a d e v y a n i i k e l i i . m a h a r a j a n t s a vacja ye t h e h o t a ani r a y "gad.
g h e i i p a r y a n t t y a n t s e mukhy "[hane puny-asats a s e ,
maharajancya p a j c a t
s a t a r a he Jahar mara^hyancya s a t t e t s e kendr z h a l e .
puqyanajiik simhagad. k i l l a , b h a f g h a r y e t h i i l dharan_ va t a l a v a n i l a s k a r a t i i l sundar
imar'tii
pah'nyasar'khya ahet.
p u r ^ y a t i i l Janivar'vad^yazava^
Jrii
Jivajiimaharajanl^se
smarak mhanuun t y a n t s a ajvaruud^h bhavy p u t a ^ a
ubha k e l e l a a h e .
in
GUJARATI
SECTION
C H A P T E R
ARRANGEMENT
OP
THE
SYLLABARY
(?L*Y3.lCLl
The w r i t i n g s y s t e m of G u j a r a t i
on t h e S a n s k r i t s y s t e m , w i t h some m o d i f i c a t i o n s
l a n g u a g e s of N o r t h e r n I n d i a w h i c h a r e w r i t t e n
script.
The c h a r a c t e r s
of t h e G u j a r a t i
is referred to
u n d e r s t o o d by a c h i l d ' .
a s i n t h e o t h e r modern
in the
D e v a n a g a ri
^ I ^ ^ M X ^ I
Each c h a r a c t e r
(ba^obodh) ,
is called
'character-
grammarians t o r e f e r
to
characters are s i m i l a r
to t h o s e u s e d i n S a n s k r i t , but as the
t i o n of t h e c h a r a c t e r s
in reading Gujarati
Sanskrit system in r e s p e c t
vowel
of c o n s o n a n t
o , t h e s e terms a r e u s e d i n t h i s
differs
The f o l l o w i n g e x a m p l e s
the terms u s e d i n t h e S a n s k r i t
section
used i n t h i s
illustrate
section
the
realisa-
somewhat from t h e
characters r e a l i s e d with
the
in t h e i r Gujarati
and t r a n s c r i b e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e r e a l i s a t i o n
in Gujarati.
$13. ( a k s a r ) ,
The terms u s e d by G u j a r a t i
section" ".
' t h a t can be
i s c a l l e d ct 5L^-LLCd.L ( v e r n o m a l a ) ,
and the s y l l a b i c s e r i e s
series'.
as
i s "based
s c r i p t a r e a r r a n g e d i n t h e same
way as t h o s e of t h e D e v a n a g a r i s c r i p t ,
The s c r i p t
, gujaratii)
of t h e
characters
the differenc e
and t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g
between
terms
section:
Sanskrit
^TT*T
fcTTTT:
1. See S a n s k r i t ,
Ch.l.
^if^A
(oksor)
(viramoh)
C^.^.LH
(viram)
(ontohstha)
^iMrrl^l
(ontosth)
(akseram)
Gujarati
form
136
G U J A R A T I
S E C T I O N
The t a b l e g i v e n b e l o w shows t h e a r r a n g e m e nt o f t h e G u j a r a t i
s y l l a b a r y i n roman n o t a t i o n .
and t h e c h a r a c t e r s
either a vowel,
As t h e s y s t e m o f w r i t i n g i s s y l l a b i c ,
o r a c o n s o n a n t f o l l o w e d by t h e v o w e l
t a b l e s show e a c h c o n s o n a n t w i t h t h i s v o w e l .
to i n English t e x t s as t h e 'inherent
Voiceless
Voiced
P l o s i v e s
CONSONANTS w i t h
.1
Velar
2
Palatal
CO
Aspirate
kho
cho
Unaspirated
go
Aspirated
gho
jho
(P-9)
tho
tho
ph
do
dho
bh
no
no
m
v^
ro
lo
Fricatives
Jo
so**
so
ho
Lateral
MODIFIERS
5
Labial
p
yo
VOWELS
referred
to
clhe
2
k
Dental
Semivowels
Aspirate
1.
i s usually
3
Retroflex
ko
fo)
o , when
vowel'.
Unaspirated
Nasal
o , t h e roman
The v o w e l
r e a l i s e d i n t h i s way w i t h a c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r ,
c o n s i s t i n g of
11
Nasal - m or
- 5 . S e e n o t e s on f o l l o w i n g
page.
uu
e , z y o , o ^ v
J
Aspirated
ARRANGEMENT OF T H E SYLLABARY
1. The c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t e d b y
and f i n a l l y w i t h t h e f l a p p e d
cjo
and
c|he
r
consonants
2. The c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t e d by
no
and
no
ion w i t h o t h e r c o n s o n a n t s , i n S a n s k r i t
3 . The c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t e d by
dental
ve
137
are r e a l i s e d
and
rh
medially
i n some w o r d s .
loanwords.
i s usually r e a l i s e d with l a b i o -
articulation.
h. The c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t e d b y
so
and s y l l a b i c
o c c ur o n l y
in
Sanskrit loanwords.
5. The v o w e l s
and
a r e w r i t t e n i n t h e s c r i p t w i t h t h e same
c h a r a c t e r , or vowel s i g n , u s u a l l y t r a n s c r i b e d a s
o
and
are a l s o w r i t t e n w i t h t h e same c h a r a c t e r ,
u s u a l l y transcribed as
'short'
'short'
are w r i t t e n a c c o r d i n g t o c e r t a i n r u l e s
' s h o r t ' and ' l o n g '
ii,
'short'
speech t h e r e i s o f t e n l i t t l e
and t h e
'long'
of orthography .
1
vowels
This d i s t i n c t -
v o w e l s i s p r e s e r v e d i n t n i s work i n
the t r a n s c r i p t i o n of t h e c h a r a c t e r s ,
t h o u g h i n modern G u j a r a t i
d i f f e r e n c e b e t w e e n t h e p r o n u n c i a t i o n of
words w r i t t e n w i t h t h e c h a r a c t e r s - r e p r e s e n t i n g
1.
sign,
These p a i r s o f v o w e l s o c c u r i n G u j a r a t i w o r d s ,
and the c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g t h e
i o n between t h e
or vowel
o .
The s e r i e s of v o w e l s i n c l u d e s
'long'
e . The v o w e l s
vowels.
Signs.
the
'short'
or t h e
C H A P T E R
CHARACTERS
OP
THE
2
SYLLABARY
The G u j a r a t i c h a r a c t e r s a r e a m o d i f i e d form of t h e
Devanagari
The c h a r a c t -
e r s a r e more rounded t h a n t h o s e of t h e D e v a n a g a r i s c r i p t ,
have a h e a d - s t r o k e .
section will
Comparison w i t h t h e c h a r a c t e r s
in the
Sanskrit
t h o s e of t h e D e v a n a g a r i s c r i p t .
characters
and do n o t
is
in general
The method of w r i t i n g t h e
t h e method d e s c r i b e d i n t h e
Gujarati
Introduction,
and r e f e r e n c e s h o u l d b e made t o t h e n o t e s on c a l l i g r a p h y g i v e n w i t h
e a c h group of c h a r a c t e r s
i n the Sanskrit s e c t i o n .
Special notes
g i v e n b e l o w on t h e c a l l i g r a p h y of any c h a r a c t e r s of w h i c h t h e
of s t r o k e s c a n n o t b e e a s i l y deduced from t h e D e v a n a g a r i
order
characters.
The G u j a r a t i c h a r a c t e r s a r e d e s c r i b e d i n t h i s c h a p t e r u n d e r
same h e a d i n g s a s t h e c h a r a c t e r s
are
in the Sanskrit s e c t i o n :
the
Consonant
Characters.
The c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s a r e a r r a n g e d i n t h r e e g r o u p s :
characters,
'ontosth'
c h a r a c t e r s and 'uusm' c h a r a c t e r s .
given in the s y l l a b a r y ,
t h e s e characters are r e a l i s e d as
c o n s i s t i n g o f an i n i t i a l
vowel
consonant,
a , and t h e y a r e d e s c r i b e d a s
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , l . i
iii.
'vorgiiy'
As t h e y a r e
syllables
or s e m i - v o w e l , f o l l o w e d by t h e
^ H B l ^ (okar).
The
realisation
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
of a c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r w i t h o u t
ant e l e m e n t of t h e s y l l a b l e
written at the f o o t
this
only,
is
vowel,
that i s ,
thus
so on, a s i n S a n s k r i t .
This s t r o k e
is
called
character w r i t t e n with
this
is
called
grammariansj b u t i n t h e t e a c h i n g o f w r i t i n g
written with t h i s stroke are d e s c r i b e d as
, k-
somewhat from t h e r e a l i s a t i o n
of
conson-
halont'
by
**lX^
, and
and a
Gujarati
in s c h o o l s ,
J
stroke
t-
(p(j^LH ( v i r a m )
characters
(khodu,
The r e a l i s a t i o n of okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s
differs
as the
i n d i c a t e d by a d i a g o n a l
of t h e c h a r a c t e r ,
stroke
139
'lame').
in reading
these characters
Gujarati
in
Sanskrit.
The f o l l o w i n g n o t e s may be r e g a r d e d a s g e n e r a l g u i d i n g p r i n c i p l e s
which r e f e r e n c e may be made l a t e r when t h e c h a r a c t e r s a r e
to
discussed
in d e t a i l .
a.
A final
okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r
v o w e l , e x c e p t i n a few S a n s k r i t
b.
A final
characters^,
r a final
o k a r c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d e d by a
i s r e a l i s e d in certain
or w i t h an o - g l i d e ,
for
d.
c h a r a c t e r h a s one of t h e v o w e l
When an okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r
verbal b a s e , i t
is
contexts
i n s t a n c e , when s u c h a
c h a r a c t e r o c c u r s a s t h e s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r of a t h r e e
word, and t h e f i n a l
conson-
e-glide.
c.
zero-
the f i n a l
character
signs^.
c h a r a c t e r of a
or w i t h an
1 . See S a n s k r i t ,Ch. 2 , 1 .
2 . The v i r a m i s n o t w r i t t e n i n G u j a r a t i
w i t h c h a r a c t e r s w h i c h a r e r e a l i s e d i n t h i s way; i t i s w r i t t e n o n l y
i n a few S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s .
3 - S e e b e l o w ,Ch. 3 , 2 .
U. See b e l o w , 3 . i . b .
5. See b e l o w , 2 . i i .
Ho
GUJARATI
e-glide,
SECTION
b e f o r e t b e a d d i t i o n of s u f f i x e s
c o n s i s t i n g of,
n i n g w i t h , a c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r w i t h one of t h e vowe l
For g u i d a n c e i n r e a d i n g , f i n a l
or b e g i n signs.
okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s
ed w i t h z e r o - v o w e l a r e t r a n s c r i b e d w i t h o u t
o , and m e d i a l okar c o n -
s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l or w i t h an o - g l i d e
transcribed thus:
i.
k'
, t'
, p'
are
C h a r a c t e r s of t h e v o r g i i y group (ct?!^^. ) .
1
The f i r s t
g r o u p o f c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s c o n s i s t s of
twentyfive
c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t i n g s y l l a b l e s w i t h an i n i t i a l p l o s i v e
f o l l o w e d by t h e v o w e l
( v e r g ) , or c l a s s e s ,
ko-vorg
ce-vorg
];'-verg
te-verg
pe-vorg
a . These c h a r a c t e r s f a l l
H
d
CO
d
H
te
po
An o l d e r form o f Q
khe
ghe
consonant
ct^^L
into five
according to the f i v e p o s i t i o n s
ke
1.
realis-
of
articulation.
-ne
>>
jhe
che
vS
the
H
the
de
be
phe
is
ahe
ii
-jie
-n.o
H
(H H
dhe
no
bhe
mo
See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 1 . i .
2 . C h a r a c t e r s w h i c h do n o t o c c u r
i n i t i a l l y a r e shown by a hyphen p r e f i x e d t o t h e s y l l a b l e i n t h e
roman t r a n s c r i p t i o n .
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
The c h a r a c t e r s
<-
36
06
141
e written thus:
*L
36
The okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s a r e r e f e r r e d t o , a s f o r i n s t a n c e i n
spelling,
thus:
, >&^L ( k e k k o ) ,
The c h a r a c t e r s
\$ and
ct
CITHX
( t e t t o ) , and s o o n
do n o t o c c u r i n G u j a r a t i w o r d s , h u t
are r e a l i s e d
m e d i a l l y and f i n a l l y
as
The c h a r a c t e r s
re
and r he
and
in certain
words. Examples o f t h i s r e a l i s a t i o n a r e g i v e n l a t e r , a f t e r t h e
vowel s i g n s a r e d i s c u s s e d . l
Reading e x a m p l e s
1 . One c h a r a c t e r words.
words:
-t
^9
Pour o f t h e v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s o c c u r a s
V
<!
2. Two c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h
Qrl
H L
d H
H V
*M.vS
:*bd
Hv5
*4.d
d6
UvS
3 . Three c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , f i n a l
<Hfri U6v5
<HHvS
^vSH
dHfc
H6
#d
zero-vowel.
V6
CH^L
<dd
$d
characters r e a l i s e d with
Hfcfc
*<.H6
HHd
&Hd
$d6
d d H
Hl
YvS
zero-vowel.
d>LS
=>Otd
CHYd
U. Four c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h
U6d
zero-'vowel
or w i t h an e - g l i d e ; f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h
zero-vowel.
%VAl
H Y ^ t
(HdS^t
=M.H$
1. See b e l o w , under 2 . i i .
2. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . l 6 8 .
lySdHd
<HAV
i 2
GUJARATI
ii.
SECTION
C h a r a c t e r s o f t h e o n t o s t h group ( ^ H r T l ^ ^ i
There a r e f o u r G u j a r a t i
same group of S a n s k r i t
characters
characters.
in t h i s group, as
ye
le
re
ve
When t h e c h a r a c t e r s M.
and
ol
the
or m e d i a l l y
they are r e a l i s e d as c o n s o n a n t s .
in p o s i t i o n s
are r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l ,
occur i n i t i a l l y ,
in
i n w h i c h eka r c o n s o n a n t
or f i n a l l y ,
When
characters
they are r e a l i s e d as
semi-
2
v o w e l s , f o r m i n g d i p h t h o n g s w i t h t h e v o w e l of t h e p r e c e d i n g
e.g.
UVt
otH
W4.
#t
yejen
ven
bhe y
jev
Reading
examples3
1 . None of t h e o n t e s t h
2.
3.
characters
Two c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , f i n a l
*U
M3.
*w.
&h
o c c u r s as a word.
ik
H a
w.
Three c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , f i n a l
ab^l
a^LQi
W
^a
CLR.
^>(rt
Vtt?.
zero-vowel.
LH
*t
=mm
w .
characters r e a l i s e d with
CNAS
m f m
<=OHct
* R
or w i t h an e - g l i d e ;
&ctt
3.
&H(H?l
final
zero-vowel.
n a n h ^ h ch^l
characters r e a l i s ed with
UvSctt
yh
rl^A
k. Pour c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h
1.
syllable.
(dbSSqi
cttrtY
zero-vowel
zero-vowel.
^ftdA
See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , l . i i .
2 . F u r t h e r e x a m p l e s of t h e
i o n of t h e s e two c h a r a c t e r s a r e g i v e n b e l o w , under 2 . i i .
For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . l 6 8 .
realisat-
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
iii.
4 :
These c h a r a c t e r s a s g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n a r e w r i t t e n
in t h e Hindi s t y l e .
The G u j a r a t i c h a r a c t e r s a r e :
J"o
<*
so
The c h a r a c t e r X
so
ha
o c c u r s o n l y i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , and when
w r i t t e n i n words i n common u s e i n G u j a r a t i ,
Jo
e x c e p t i n formal
i t i s often r e a l i s e d as
reading.
Reading e x a m p l e s .
1 . None of t h e c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s g r o u p o c c u r s a s a word.
2 . Two c h a r a c t e r w o r d s ; f i n a l
*U
characters r e a l i s e d with
m.
*16
3 . Three c h a r a c t e r w o r d s ; f i n a l
&L H*l ^
zero-vowel.
<SH * t d
characters r e a l i s e d with
a^uat
zero-vowel.
*iu*i U H H ^ I H
U. Pour and f i v e c h a r a c t e r w o r d s ; f i n a l
v o w e l , s e c o nd c h a r a c t e r i n f o u r c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , t h i r d
character
i n t h e f i v e c h a r a c t e r w o r d , r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l or w i t h an
o-glide.
3iHYl
U W d . ?&SZ
^U^d
The l a s t c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r
c&Sd
<dWl
, ~T,o r e a l i s e d a s a r e t r o f l e x l a t e r a l c o n s o n a n t w i t h
o .
Reading e x a m p l e s .
#t
1.
m.
m.
See S a n s k r i t ,
owjo
Ch.2,1. i i i .
H<<t 3H<a
2.
3 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 1 . i i i . V e d i c
For
HR.<=L^I
transcription,
character.
mste
see
p.l68.
144
G U J A R A T I
The two c h a r a c t e r s
*Q and
S E C T I O N
, each r e p r e s e n t i n g
c o n s i s t i n g of two c o n s o n a n t s f o l l o w e d b y t h e v o w e l
syllables
o , are
often
p l a c e d a t t h e end of t h e s e r i e s of c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s
i n t h e vori^o-
m a l a , b u t t h e y do n o t p r o p e r l y b e l o n g t o t h e s y l l a b a r y ,
and t h e y a r e
discussed
later .
1
2
2 . Vowel C h a r a c t e r s and Vowel S i g n s ,
i.
Vowel
Characters.
The v o w el c h a r a c t e r s u s e d i n w r i t i n g G u j a r a t i c o r r e s p o n d w i t h
the vowel c h a r a c t e r s
rr , 1
and
11
i n S a n s k r i t though t h e forms d i f f e r .
do n o t o c c u r i n G u j a r a t i ^ .
usually placed f i r s t
in the
syllabic r
The c h a r a c t e r
The v o w e l c h a r a c t e r s
ii
e,
oy
, syllabic
okar, akar,
S i
uu
0,0**
ov
r , o c c u r s o n l y i n a few
are
vornomala.
>i
Syllabic
The v o w el
Sanskrit
characters
i k a r , u k a r , and s o o n .
I n a l l r e a d i n g e x a m p l e s which f o l l o w ,
kar c o n s o n a n t
characters
special
n o t e s a r e added.
1 . See b e l o w , C h . 3 . C l a s s e s 2 . and U.
2 . For t h e u s e o f vowel
c h a r a c t e r s and vowel s i g n s , s e e S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 2 . i .
3 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 2 . i .
h. See a b o v e , C h . l . The r e a l i s a t i o n of
t h e s e vowel c h a r a c t e r s a s
e or e , and a s o or o , i s d i s c u s s e d
below under i i . Vowel S i g n s .
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
Reading e x a m p l e s
1. Vowel c h a r a c t e r s o n l y .
^It ^
5
2. Vowel c h a r a c t e r s w i t h okar
SlH
^6
145
characters.
*>tlU
H@
^Ld
^1*
fcsftV
5>tl6
&$$t
i i . Vowel s i g n s .
Vowel s i g n s c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o e a c h v o w e l c h a r a c t e r ,
are added t o t h e okar form o f t h e c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s
s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g of an i n i t i a l
vowels
to
character
ev .
e x c e p t 3>-C
to
represent
c o n s o n a n t f o l l o w e d by one of
The v o w e l s i g n s a r e g i v e n h e r e added t o
the
the
si &
1-
ka
kii
ku
kuu
kr
ki
The o r d e r of s t r o k e s
&
key
ko,ko
ke,ke
kov
i n w r i t i n g c h a r a c t e r s w i t h vowel s i g n s
i n g e n e r a l t h e same a s t h a t d e s c r i b e d i n t h e n o t e s on c a l l i g r a p h y
the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n .
Some of
f o o t when t h e vowel s i g n s f o r
KI
ja
guu
pu
or
uu
the
are added:
puu
su
suu
forms:
fir <!, ^
ji
in
added.
a. The u p r i g h t s t r o k e of a c h a r a c t e r i s w r i t t e n w i t h o u t r o u n d i n g
gu
is
t h e c h a r a c t e r s a r e m o d i f i e d i n form
when c e r t a i n of t h e vowel s i g n s a r e
b. Special
jii
ju
juu
^
nu
1 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n of e x a m p l e s ,
2 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 2 . i i .
ru
see
p. 168,
ruu
dr
J*r
hr
146
GUJARATI
SECTION
In t h e t e a c h i n g o f w r i t i n g i n s c h o o l s ,
r i g h t s t r o ke of a c h a r a c t e r ,
t h e c h a r a c t e r s *D\X ,^\X
are r e f e r r e d to as L H l
and
vowel s i g n s f o r
^1^1
s y
tl
and $
(diirgh i i ) ,
>
1.
examples
One c h a r a c t e r
.^ct
(diirgh uu) .
'akar',
(hrosv i)
'ukar',
and
(3^ a r e
and
called
Characters having
'ekar'
The
vowel
and s o o n .
words.
$iy
L&
aid
dfe
*(taf
Mk
*b<i
<3t(L
%iX
<tute
Svi^d
characters.
ai^
*bfo
Realisation of
the vowels
and
S^l
eflA
^al
dlAuCl
oiH
fed
(L(Hl
oiteT
^Udl
SplRl
&$>
Ufcft
^lA
These v o w e l c h a r a c t e r s ,
HL
^.lALHlCL
OX
( H l ^ d t A
and t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g v o w e l s i g n s ,
r e p r e s e n t two v o w e l s o f d i f f e r e n t
quality.
The v o w e l
each
character
and t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g s i g n a r e r e a l i s e d i n t h e m a j o r i t y o f words
e , b u t i n some words a s
e ; the vowel c h a r a c t e r
ponding s i g n are r e a l i s e d
i n t h e m a j o r i t y of words a s
1,
2.
and
^IMX
PL^L&L
r e f e r r e d t o a s HL^LL ( m a t r a ) .
are c a l l e d
^ ^ 0 ^ ^ ( h r o s v u) and
Reading
(kano),
to
i n t h e v o w e l c h a r a c t e r s and s i g n s ,
and t h e vowel s i g n s f o r
s i g n s are d e s c r i b e d as
the up-
and of t h e v o w e l s i g n s c o r r e s p o n d i n g
the diagonal s u p e r s c r i b ed s t r o k e s
a s i n 5^
and i n s p e l l i n g ,
and t h e
as
corres-
o , but
in
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
some words a s
147
o . The r e a l i s a t i o n o f t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s a s
i s d e s c r i b e d by G u j a r a t i grammarians a s
Ce^ejrt ( v i v r t ,
and
'open').
Some
p a i r s of w o r d s , w r i t t e n i n t h e same w a y , a r e d i s t i n g u i s h e d i n meaning
only by t h e r e a l i s a t i o n o f t h e v o w e l y^X
or a s
o . Some words
' Narmakosh'
list
o f s u c h words i s g i v e n i n t h e G u j a r a t i
^LH
^61
s\-
\%i
?IH
"l6S
u \ v
^ 6 -
t-
i s r e a l i s e d as
*s
the
<^U-
<^-t
i&
^
&LCL
>-t
^u-
o&*t
^Htt
d^C-lL
corresponding sign,
e :
\ &
*&ct
i s r e a l i s e d as
o :
*HXV16
al6
noted.
, or t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g s i g n ,
*%>Ut
, and i n t h e d i c t i o n a r y
vowels
U&ytl
Ml^tl
*4l(
Hi
l. d ^ U sils
HU&U'l
MX^
^Cl ^Ci^ 4-
When c h a r a c t e r s w i t h t h e s e v o w e l s a r e w r i t t e n w i t h t h e mark of
n a s a l i s a t i o n known a s t h e a n u s v a r ^ ,
vowels.
1.
148
GUJARATI
Some words w h i c h a r e
of
as
or a s
1
go\,
SECTION
d i s t i n g u i s h e d i n meaning o n l y by t h e
0 :
round'
gol,
'treacle'
khol,
copop i i ,
coporii,
'smeared'
'oil-cake'
'book'
kon^, 'who'
colli ,
colii,
'bodice'
'sixteen'
sol,
realis
sol,
(name of a v e g e t a b l e )
'weal',
'stripe'
in c e r t a i n
positions,
When a m e d i a l okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r ,
w o r d , i s f o l l o w e d by a f i n a l
in a three
character
c h a r a c t e r w i t h a vowel s i g n ,
or w i t h an o - g l i d e ,
and
vowel of t h e p r e c e d i n g s y l l a b l e ,
^d<ai
v&<+CL
H^iil
e^'lo
cor'bii
men/ko
as
it
is
and t h e
form d i p h t h o n g s w i t h
the
in
>c&
phay'do
chev'"(;e
than
t h r e e c h a r a c t e r s v a r i e s a c c o r d i n g t o t h e p o s i t i o n i n e a c h word
of t h e c h a r a c t e r s w i t h vowe l s i g n s .
I n compound w o r d s ,
the
The f o l l o w i n g e x a m p l e s i l l u s t r a t e
okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s
the r e a l i s a t i o n
of
in such words.
Second c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l ,
or w i t h an
$lct&<l
"&daiS
^6HL-t
Yl-LctR,
Jet'korii
keflak
nuk'san
jan'vor
o-glide:
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
Other c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l ,
dukan'dar
b.
14
or w i t h an o - g l i d e :
dL"t6rCl<d
6U6<dl9
UM-MPCl
tabod^'tob
kopa );'ba j i i
par'van'gii
When a s u f f i x b e g i n n i n g w i t h a c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i s added t o a
noun or pronoun, or t o a v e r b a l b a s e ,
character, this f i n a l
w i t h an o - g l i d e ,
HtR-Cl
gam-no
e n d i n g i n an okar c o n s o n a n t
as i n t h e s e
examples:
d^A
^dX
"iiadi
<au>ul
tom-ne
kor-to
bol-va
lag-Je
When s u c h s u f f i x e s
a r e added t o v e r b a l b a s e s of t h r e e or more
c h a r a c t e r s , o f which t h e f i n a l
and p r e - f i n a l
are o k a r , t h e r e a l i s a t i o n o f t h e p r e - f i n a l
the way i l l u s t r a t e d by t h e f o l l o w i n g
^&HY
somoj
therok
or
consonant
characters
character varies
in
examples:
UHYdt
UHVlddl
sem'jii
somoj-va
som'jav-va
thor'ke
thorok-to
thor'kav-vo
1.
2.
okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d a s i n n o t e a.
lS5l
*HH$l
<d6l
HlU<tfl
YHjd
UlHfc^
Hln^tl
6l6*ll<<
^Y^lctl
SU^d^lA
okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d a s i n n o t e b .
dd*
&d*=Cl
HUCIA
1.
d6Ul
For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e
U66
HU^CI
p.168.
US6dl
HiaeCl
Hl&a<=&
150
GUJARATI
SECTION
R e a l i s a t i o n of m e d i a l and f i n a l
The c h a r a c t e r
\$
and
i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d m e d i a l l y or f i n a l l y
flapped consonant,
p
p o , e x c e p t when p r e c e d e d by a c h a r a c t e r
w i t h t h e o n u s v ar .
I n some w o r d s , h o w e v e r , i t
a s t o p , q . The c h a r a c t e r
as a
written
i s always r e a l i s e d
as
i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d a s a s t o p , c|h ,
and s o m e t i m es a s a f l a p p e d c o n s o n a n t .
In some words t h e
realisation
as a s t o p i s c o n s t a n t .
5 d i 3 l Si-
and
are always r e a l i s e d as s t o p s ^ : .
u
Hiil ntst ml
=HL<SL *Hl4l<*t 1 6 - 1 6
eu.V*tl
rCU
'male b u f f a l o '
Ybj
CUSL
vodjD,
paro,
'cancelled'
vowel c h a r a c t e r s
vo^o,
or
'short'
'elderly'
vowels.
and
(3
, (L
applied
in writing
the
occur,
, and t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g s i g n , a r e u s u a l l y w r i t t e n i n
characters,
1.
3.
c|
'jaw'
The f o l l o w i n g g e n e r a l r u l e s a r e u s u a l l y
as
'neighbourhood'
jaru^,
Orthography o f t h e
a.
vS
i s n e c e s s a r y f o r d i s t i n c t i o n of m e a n i n g :
padjD,
signs,
*=tL6-
nasalisation.
I n t h e f o l l o w i n g p a i r s o f words t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of
r
^5-&us
<*$L
&L&
These c h a r a c t e r s a r e a l w a y s r e a l i s e d as s t o p s a f t e r
as
in
or i m m e d i a t e l y p r e c e d i n g a f i n a l
final
kar c o n s o n a n t
See n o t e i n l . i . a b o v e .
2 . See b e l o w , under 3 i . nusvar.
See N o t e s on G u j a r a t i P h o n o l o g y , T . N . D a v e , B u l l e t i n of t h e S c h o o l
of O r i e n t a l S t u d i e s , V o l . V I . p . 6 7 3 f f .
h. For t h e mark of n a s a l i s a t i o n on t h e f i n a l c h a r a c t e r of t h i s w o r d ,
s e e b e l o w , under 3 . i . n u s v a r .
5 . P u l l e r n o t e s on G u j a r a t i o r t h o graphy a r e g i v e n i n ' J o d n i k o s h ' , I n t r o d u c t i o n , p . 3 0 f f .
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
151
e.g.
laii
ff)
korii
panii
, and t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g s i g n ,
other p o s i t i o n s ;
2
divos
n i
ik
ciij
geriib
are u s u a l l y w r i t t e n in
all
e.g.
CrLHd
PtatSl
&GX*UA
ed&U.ui
tikhe-J;
bilad^ii
hojiyar
ghod^iyaT,
Some e x c e p t i o n s :
biijo
h.
(t
hokiikot
liidhe
kiidho
Jiikhiine
and t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g s i g n , a r e u s u a l l y w r i t t e n i n a
medial p o s i t i o n when i m m e d i a t e l y p r e c e d i n g a f i n a l
character, unless this
uu^h
duudh
i s a conjunct character;
hhuukh
akar c o n s o n a n t
e.g.
phuul
mejuur
(3 and t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g s i g n , a r e u s u a l l y w r i t t e n i n o t h e r
p o s i t i o n s , though many words o c c u r i n . G u j a r a t i t e x t s w r i t t e n w i t h
2
or t h e
dukan
'long'
vowel
suthar
; e.g.
varu
Some e x c e p t i o n s :
uucok
uupar
al/su
^Ll
SJjH-
kuuvo
suujh-
uubho
The S a n s k r i t o r t h o g r a p h y i s u s u a l l y p r e s e r v e d i n S a n s k r i t
words; e . g .
QiXl
hit
bhiiti
Lj^U
^(>l
purus
bhuumi
loan-
*>t<f
bohu
1 . See b e l o w , Chapter 3
2 . For t h i s vowel w r i t t e n with, t h e o n u s v a r , s e e b e l o w , under
3.i.
152
GUJARATI
3.
Modifiers.
SECTION
(onusvar)
and
(^^i^C
( v i s o r g ) , used
Gujarati.
onusvar.
The o n u s v a r i s a mark r e p r e s e n t i n g n a s a l i s a t i o n ,
in Gujarati
oil)
in
am
and i s
i n t h e form o f a d o t above a c h a r a c t e r ,
thus:
irrj
kurrj
urrj
err)
orrj
karg
kiirj
The o n u s v a r i s p l a c e d a t t h e r i g h t s i d e of any
s t r o k e , and i t
written
kern
korrj
superscribed
i s w r i t t e n on t h e c h a r a c t e r a f t e r e v e r y o t h e r
stroke,
as i n the Devanagari
script.
R e a l i s a t i o n of the
a.
anusvar.
is written.
This
realisation
o c c u r s u s u a l l y when t h e o n u s v ar i s w r i t t e n w i t h any of t h e
to
, except
i n some S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s .
the
vowels
The o n u s v a r
r e a l i s e d i n t h i s way o c c u r s i n many g r a m m a t i c a l f o r m s .
Examples:
h$
HI
#6
SlH
*t
U&X
Midi
koii
ma
11\
tu
uuc
me"
pohoc
povva
Grammatical f o r m s :
nuiA
chokorS
%q
bodhae
fcj
kelu
and
(1
HU?
Vl(3
*Hld^
maru
ja u
av-vu,
are u s u a l l y w r i t t e n i n
characters
w i t h t h e o n u s v a r when i t r e p r e s e n t s n a s a l i s a t i o n of a v o w e l ,
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 3 . i . and i i .
2 . i b i d . , n o t e on c a l l i g r a p h y of t h e o n u s v a r .
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
153
e(M
ettct
StvSt
HIS?
<#>i
viichii
bhiit
uucjo
maru
liibu
uuc|u
Some words a r e w r i t t e n w i t h e i t h e r
The vowel c h a r a c t e r s
khec-vu
'short'
or ' l o n g '
vowels.
, and t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g
are r e a l i s e d w i t h t h e o n u s v a r a s
b.
vowel; e . g .
bhs
signs,
0 ; e.g.
and
sop-vu
pehoc-vu
or as
b e f o re a character of
Thi s r e a l i s a t i o n o f t h e nusvar o c c u r s m a i n l y i n
When t h e nusvar i s r e a l i s e d a s a
n a s a l c o n s o n a nt b e f o r e a f i n a l
kar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r , t h e
f i n a l c h a r a c t e r i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h an - g l i d e .
1
knj;h
Janti
jsntu
ssmbha"!
smbndh
As i n S a n s k r i t , t h e r e i s an a l t e r n a t i v e method of
nasal consonants in t h i s c o n t e x t .
The ' s h o r t ' forms o f t h e v o w e l s
Examples:
representing
T h i s method i s d e s c r i b e d
and
are u s u a l l y w r i t t e n
w i t h t h e nusvar r e p r e s e n t i n g a n a s a l c o n s o n a n t ; e . g .
ling
cinta
sundor
1 . See a b o v e , l . b . R e a l i s a t i o n o f kar c o n s o n a n t
2 . See b e l o w , C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s 2 . i i .
later.
kumbhar
characters.
154
c.
GUJARATI
SECTION
When the o n u s v a r i s w r i t t e n on a c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d i n g an o n t o s t h
or an uusm c h a r a c t e r ,
a s i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s and l e a r n e d words
it
i s r e a l i s e d in various ways,
a c c o r d i n g t o t h e p o s i t i o n of a r t i c u l a t i o n of t h e f o l l o w i n g
ant.
The r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e o n u s v a r i n t h e s e c o n t e x t s hy
in v a r i o u s p a r t s of I n d i a i s d e s c r i b e d i n the S a n s k r i t
The u s u a l G u j a r a t i p r a c t i c e
nusvar b e f o r e
, r e a l i s e d as
nusvar b e f o r e
section .
1
examples:
, as in ^i^l,
> soyyog
> Polling
o t h e r n t s s t h and uusm c h a r a c t e r s ,
realised
, r e a l i s e d as
sfcttygl
; e.g.
speakers
*^C^l l
(j^
nusvar b e f o r e a l l
as
i s i l l u s t r a t e d by t h e s e
conson-
sevrskssi]
, as i n
<=tA<=lA
*HXi
^G^Ll
varsvvar
vj
hivsa
sivh
Reading examples-^
1.
onusvar r e a l i s e d a s i n n o t e
*]
tiH
5$
DMJM.
(HtH
\ b
a.
%l
clt'lV
HL
ULY
H&X
(LH
*bl
HtJSt
<=Ct<>i
2 . nusvar r e a l i s e d a s i n n o t e s b . and c .
*>U-l&
ii.
Vci
<m<
M.6
ZHPil
visorg
This m o d i f i e r ,
d e s c r i b e d i n the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n * , d o e s n o t
4-
o c c u r s m e d i a l l y i n a few S a n s k r i t
loanwords
and i s r e a l i s e d a s t h e d o u b l i n g of t h e f o l l o w i n g c o n s o n a n t , a s
%g*H. dukkh ( a l s o w r i t t e n
^"l^
, dukh) and
^H,rti^ft^l
occur
in
> ntskksr^.
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 3 . i . e .
2 . $1
r e p r e s e n t s k - j o i n e d w i t h -s . See C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s U. i . b .
3 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 6 9 .
U. See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 3 i i .
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
U. The Complete
Syllabary.
The t r a d i t i o n a l
order of
i s shown i n t h e f o l l o w i n g
the characters
155
i n the s y l l a b i c
series
table^-:
=^1
n
H
H
d
(H
<
4.
included in the
The t a b l e i n which t h e v o w e l c h a r a c t e r s
m o d i f i e r s added t o t h e c h a r a c t e r
(except
table.
) , and t h e
, a r e p l a c e d a t t h e head of a
s e r i e s of columns c o n s i s t i n g o f e v e r y c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i n t h e kar
form, w i t h each of t h e v o w e l s i g n s
and e a c h o f t h e m o d i f i e r s ,
1. Cf.
the
'twelve
is
characters'.
o f t e n r e c i t e d i n s c h o o l s by c h i l d r e n l e a r n i n g t o r e a d .
Devanagari t a b l e
i n S a n s k r i t ,Ch . 2 , U.
156
G U J A R A T I
S E C T I O N
e x c e p t t h a t words b e g i n n i n g w i t h
characters
w i t h t h e o n u s v a r a r e p l a c e d a f t e r words b e g i n n i n g w i t h t h e same
character withou t the onusvar, as i l l u s t r a t e d
Sanskrit:
ai
arrjy
arrjje
Gujarati:
ai
ak
akh . . .
5.
arrjho
below:
ako
akho
...
as
ah
arrjk
airjkh
...
Numerals.
The G u j a r a t i n u m e r a l s a r e w r i t t e n t h u s :
6.
Y H \
3
3
English prose.
Sanskrit
See
Hp
10
Punctuation.
In p r o s e w r i t i n g ,
1.
V3
t h e same s y s t e m of p u n c t u a t i o n i s u s e d as
in
The s y s t e m u s e d i n G u j a r a t i v e r s e i s t h e same as t h e
system.^
Sanskrit,Ch.2,6.
C H A P T E R
CONJUNCT
CHARACTERS
two or more
c o n s o n a n t s which a r e t o be r e a l i s e d w i t h o u t an i n t e r v e n i n g
Character s formed by j o i n i n g o t h e r c h a r a c t e r s
(soyyuktaksor)
by G u j a r a t i g r a m m a r i a n s or
t h e t e a c h i n g of w r i t i n g i n s c h o o l s .
of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s
Sanskrit s e c t i o n .
i.
*$tv5L^L^ ( j o q a k s e r )
in the Devanagari s c r i p t
s i m i l a r methods, w i t h t h e s e
Some c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s
s t r o k e of t h e f i r s t
i.
In G u j a r a t i w o r d s ,
as
upright
t h e r e m a i n i n g p a r t of t h e
in
than the f i r s t
, gg , Q U O ^ ,
in
first
part
bbo.
Gujarati.
in the f o l l o w i n g
contexts
t h a t i s , w o r d s n o t borrowed from S a n s k r i t
e.g.
vSl^
qahyu
See S a n s k r i t ,
, kko.
a r e f o r m e d by o m i t t i n g t h e
occur i n Gujarati
from modern l a n g u a g e s ;
1.
characters
s e p a r a t i n g space, as in
C o n t e x t s of C o n j u n c t C h a r a c t e r s
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s
the
c h a r a c t e r s a r e c o n s t r u c t e d by
c h a r a c t e r i s o f t e n w r i t t e n on a l o w e r l e v e l
1.
calligraphy
i s described in
a r e f o r m e d by w r i t i n g two
character^,
of the s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r ,
in
modifications'
tL^BciL^R.
are c a l l e d
The c o n s t r u c t i o n and
Gujarati conjunct
vowel.
Ch.3,1.
bsccu
H^l
&l
nkkii
ci-|;t
2.
ibid.,
n i i
Ch.3,1.ii.
or
158
ii.
G U J A R A T I
In S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , e i t h e r words u s e d commonly i n
Gujarati,
or l e a r n e d words u s e d o n l y i n t h e l i t e r a r y l a n g u a g e ;
e.g.
pustok
iii.
S E C T I O N
petr
iijvor
I n l o a n w o r d s from o t h e r l a n g u a g e s ;
rosto
gard^
e.g.
s^e/on
2 . R e a l i s a t i o n of C o n j u n c t C h a r a c t e r s i n
Gujarati.
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s are r e a l i s e d i n r e a d i n g as s y l l a b l e s
i n g o f two or more c o n s o n a n t s f o l l o w e d by a v o w e l .
When an okar c o n -
j u n c t c h a r a c t e r o c c u r s a s t h e f i n a l c h a r a c t e r of a w o r d ,
l y r e a l i s e d w i t h an o - g l i d e ,
as in
, jenm'
of s p e l l i n g .
in certain positions
it
is
, %tX|J^^ ,
consist-
i n words g i v e s r i s e
usual-
Jastr'.
characters
t o a problem
For i n s t a n c e , when a f o r m a t i v e p a r t i c l e b e g i n n i n g w i t h
a c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i s added t o a v e r b a l b a s e e n d i n g i n a
okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r ,
with zero^vowel.
the f i n a l
c h a r a c t e r of t h e b a s e i s
final
realised
T h i s r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e c o n s e c u t i v e c h a r a c t e r s
s i m i l a r to the r e a l i s a t i o n of a conjunct c h a r a c t e r .
Similar
a r i s e i n o t h e r c o n t e x t s , where an okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i s
is
problems
realis-
ed w i t h z e r o - v o w e l b e f o r e a f o l l o w i n g c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r , and i n
compound words i n w h i c h t h e f i r s t p a r t ends i n an okar
c h a r a c t e r and t h e s e c o n d p a r t b e g i n s w i t h a c o n s o n a n t
consonant
character.
of
characters.
1 . See a b o v e , C h . 2 , l . a . and b .
This g l i d e i s not r e p r e s e n t e d i n the
t r a n s c r i p t i o n of words t o w h i c h t h i s r u l e a p p l i e s .
CONJUNCT CHARACTERS
3 . C l a s s e s of Conjunc t C h a r a c t e r s
in
159
Gujarati.
The c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s u s e d i n w r i t i n g G u j a r a t i a r e
classified
i n t h i s c h a p t e r i n t h e same way a s t h e c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n
the S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n .
1
C o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s of a l l t h e c l a s s e s
i n G u j a r a t i , hut i n some of t h e c l a s s e s
are u s e d .
o n l y a few of t h e
in
occur
characters
in
sect-
in Gujarati
Class 1 . Two s i m i l a r c h a r a c t e r s
characters.
joined.^
Most of the c h a r a c t e r s o f t h e G u j a r a t i s y l l a b a r y o c c u r i n
c l a s s , as 'doubled' c h a r a c t e r s .
as
The c h a r a c t e r f o r
, the superscribed s t r o k e r e p r e s e n t i n g
-rre
r-
is
this
written
preceding another
consonant-3,
A c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t i n g an a s p i r a t e d c o n s o n a n t i s n o t
usually
w r i t t e n as t h e f i r s t p a r t of a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r i n t h i s c l a s s ;
, khkho , ^
in Gujarati w r i t i n g the c h a r a c t e r s
^Jd^ , dhdho
are o f t e n u s e d .
The c o m b i n a t i o n s
, "(; t
n
-nno
and
or ^
sommoti
n 9
but
a n <
-mmo
are
character
; e.g.
snnidhi
but
The f o l l o w i n g e x a m p l es i l l u s t r a t e
consecutive consonant c h a r a c t e r s ,
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 .
3 . See b e l o w , C l a s s 3 . i i i - a .
nn
t h e f i r s t b e i n g kar, are
2 . Cf.
Sanskrit,
realised
Ch.3,3.Class 1 .
i6o
G U J A R A T I
S E C T I O N
i n o r d i n a r y s p e e c h i n t h e same way a s c o n j u n c t
^WllvSl
niHHl
OUA^
<Hkddl
%
ag-gaq^ii
characters:
gam-ma
bhav-vu-'
behen-no
R e a d i n g examples^-
^tb>iX
'i/sSi
ygt
@ c l
^
Class 2.
P*L.
CHL
d A
a ^ j >
eSWi
^e>l
H>S&L ftbrut w
H-*
^Q*
C^Hd
Two v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s
joined.
Sanskrit
Those w h i c h a r e most f r e q u e n t l y u s e d i n w r i t i n g
G u j a r a t i a r e g i v e n "below, i n t h e same g r o u p s a s t h e c h a r a c t e r s
in the Sanskrit
u
ii.
given
section^.
6rl
-kto
-tko
cH
-pt
-tp
-bd
Most of t h e c h a r a c t e r s c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h o s e o f t h i s group
t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n , under i i . a . , a r e w r i t t e n i n l i t e r a r y
rati,
(fedl
The c h a r a c t e r s o f t h i s c l a s s o c c u r f o r t h e most p a r t i n
and o t h e r l o a n w o r d s .
u ^ v s
r e p r e s e n t i n g homorganic n a s a l c o n s o n a n t s .
in
Guja-
T h i s method of
is
g e n e r a l l y u s e d o n l y i n w r i t i n g S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s . An a l t e r n a t i v e
method, r e p r e s e n t i n g n a s a l c o n s o n a n t s of e a c h c l a s s by w r i t i n g
t h e nusvar on t h e p r e c e d i n g c h a r a c t e r , h a s b e e n d e s c r i b e d a b o v e ^ .
Of t h e c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n under i i . b . ,
, jn
and <?!,, - i n
i s not c a l l i g r a p h i c a l l y
1.
i+.
is
6.
occur i n G u j a r a t i .
The c h a r a c t e r
a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r and i s
only
^
often
Compound word.
2 . Noun w i t h s u f f i x .
3 . Verba l form.
For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . l 6 9 .
5. The s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r i n t h e s e words
formed from t h e D e v a n a g a r i c h a r a c t e r f o r d ; C f . S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 1 . i . .
See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C I . 2 .
7. See a b o v e , C h . 2 , 3 . i . b .
C O N J U N C T CHARACTERS
included i n the s y l l a b a r y .
In Gujarati
161
d i c t i o n a r i e s words b e g i n -
i n g w i t h 5[L a re p l a c e d a f t e r w o r d s b e g i n n i n g w i t h
o f t e n r e a l i s e d as
iii.
iv.
-gno
a literary
of t h i s
-ghn
Of t h i s g r o u p , o n l y
group occur in S a n s k r i t
-tmo
-dm
loanwords:
-pn
, -nm , o c c u r s i n G u j a r a t i ,
and l ^ H , , -nm
v^pi-L , -rjm?
^jL i s
gye .
Some of t h e c h a r a c t e r s
-kmo
though
may o c c u r i n l e a r n e d l o a n w o r d s
in
text.
The f o l l o w i n g e x a m p l e s
illustrate
consonant c h a r a c t e r s , when t h e f i r s t
junct c h a r a c t e r s :
the r e a l i s a t i o n
is
UCfel
SlScCl
Jskti
Jsk-tii
kar,
of
consecutive
i n t h e same way a s c o n -
^Vt
^Udl
gupt
ap-to
Reading examples^
(Ml&t
Class 3 . Characters
i.
joined w i t h ntsth
Characters j o i n e d w i t h f o l l o w i n g
All the characters
>L occur in t h i s c l a s s .
i n which the s u f f i x
^(X
Many o f t h e
.
syllabary,
characters
t h e v e r b a l b a s e by j o i n i n g t h e c h a r a c t e r
except
of t h i s s u f f i x ,
and
see
p.169.
forms
a r e added t o
2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n ,
Ch.3,3.Class 3 i .
M
^S*
occur in verbal
c h a r a c t e r of t h e b a s e .
1 . Verbal form.
3 . See S a n s k r i t ,
A&L
characters,
M.
of t h e G u j a r a t i
31c^>
final
i6z
G U J A R A T I
S E C T I O N
Reading e x a m p l e s ^
Q&AL
v^iej
dJ.Wl
^fe
^>cMl
^dHL
cHL
*IL*J
ai^i
16^
GfclL
ii.
^cu*4.
xClW
HvSHl
H**l
%^
OU<>*4
*foi
^
H-i^l
HlrMl
6mJ
8 ^
6ltfl
Hm^
iLeMl
Cl6i/rft
5H<S^l
.2
, and
The r e a l i s a t i o n o f a f i n a l
and cJJA , v a r , i l l u s t r a t e t h e r e a l i s a t i o n o f c o n s e c -
u t i v e c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s , when t h e f i r s t
i s o k a r , i n t h e same way a s
conjunct c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s ; e . g .
U&=Ll-*L
^6cllCs*i
pokvann
o^h'vad^iyu
* & H < m
cjak'vala
s o m ' v ar
J^Ll
budh'var
Reading examples-^
iii.
Characters
or f o l l o w i n g
v
a.
preceding another
character.5
r e p h , above t h e c h a r a c t e r b e f o r e w h i c h
ed a s t h e f i r s t
i s t o be r e a l i s -
o f two o r more c o n s e c u t i v e c o n s o n a n t s .
1. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . l 6 9 .
3 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . l 6 9 .
see Sanskrit, C h . 2 , 1 . i i i .
The p l a c e of
2. See S a n s k r i t , Ch.3j.3-CI.3. i i .
U. For t h e c h a r a c t e r * C , f ,
5. S e e S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C I . 3 . i i i *
C O N J U N C T CHARACTERS
163
t h i s s t r o k e on G u j a r a t i c h a r a c t e r s , w h e t h e r a k a r or w r i t t e n w i t h vowe l
s i g n s , corresponds with the p l a c e
characters,
of
t h e s t r o k e on t h e
and t h e o r d e r o f w r i t i n g
the s t r o k e s of c h a r a c t e r s
reph i s t h e same a s t h e o r d e r d e s c r i b e d
i n the Sanskrit
The c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s w h i c h o c c u r
i n t h e r e a d i n g example s g i v e n
Devanagari
with
section .
1
i n Gujarat i are
illustrated
below.
The f o l l o w i n g words i l l u s t r a t e
the r e a l i s a t i o n
consonant c h a r a c t e r s , when t h e f i r s t
is
junct c h a r a c t e r s w r i t t e n w i t h r e p h a r e
6dl
6*.dl
^LH
korta
kor-ta^
dharm
okar,
of
consecutive
i n t h e same way a s
con-
realised:
ghar-m3
dt
P&l^Ct
varn.
nisar'nii
Reading examples**"
dS
b.
<H?t
<=td-t
*H&
These c h a r a c t e r s a r e f o r m e d b y w r i t i n g a s h o r t , d i a g o n a l
stroke
*dOfd
f o l l o w i n g another
H*tl
\ d
character.
either a g a i n s t the u p r i g h t s t r o k e
c h a r a c t e r . 5 Two c h a r a c t e r s
oUit-t
similar
of a c h a r a c t e r ,
or b e l o w a rounded
t o t h e Devanagari c h a r a c t e r s
used i n forming t h e s e c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s :
Jo .6 The examples g i v e n b e l o w i l l u s t r a t e
for
do , and > i .
the characters of t h i s
which o c c u r i n G u j a r a t i , m o s t l y i n S a n s k r i t
and E n g l i s h
are
for
class
loanwords.
Reading e x a m p l e s 7
1.
3.
5.
7.
#i
Sid
V)i
W&l
V U S d *Ut
*H1?A&
d*l
Jty
URlL
See S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 - C I . 3 . i i i . a. C a l l i g r a p h y .
2 , Verbal form.
Noun w i t h s u f f i x .
L. F o r t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 6 9 .
Cf.Sanskrit,Ch.3,3.CI.3.iii.b.
6. i b i d . , C h . 2 , 1 . i . and i i i .
For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 6 9 .
164
G U J A R A T I
S E C T I O N
or f o l l o w i n g
.1
The c h a r a c t e r s o f t h i s c l a s s w h i c h a r e u s e d i n w r i t i n g
Gujarati
preceding.
Characters with preceding Q
e x c e p t i n a few S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s .
Some words a r e w r i t t e n e i t h e r w i t h
a conjunct c h a r a c t e r or w i t h s e p a r a t e c h a r a c t e r s , such as
bolke
, or <H<&>-t>al'ke.
In r e p r e s e n t i n g c o l l o q u i a l s p e e c h forms i n modern G u j a r a t i ,
character
for
b.
i s s o m e t i m e s w r i t t e n f o r (^J^ , a s
, loher
the
in
, and o t h e r s i m i l a r w o r d s .
following.
C h a r a c t e r s combined w i t h f o l l o w i n g
occur mainly i n S a n s k r i t
and E n g l i s h l o a n w o r d s .
The f o l l o w i n g w o r d s i l l u s t r a t e
the r e a l i s a t i o n of
c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s , when t h e f i r s t
j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s
bil'kul
Reading e x a m p l e s
i s o k a r , i n t h e same way a s c o n -
class:
voT/gonii
bod'lii
am'lii
ftti*t ae-L-ii
Me^is
consecutive
ate&
&AI
1 . Cf. S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C l . 3 . i v . a .
2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 6 9 .
*<=ieu
vsaiu
and b .
^euu
Kie-i
C O N J U N C T CHARACTERS
C l a s s U' v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r s
165
j o i n e d w i t h p r e c e d i n g or f o l l o w i n g uusm
characters.
i.
a.
vorgiiy characters
$X
> H
joined with
>
preceding a vorgiiy
*H. ^
character.
The c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s w h i c h o c c u r i n G u j a r a t i , m o s t l y
in
S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , a r e i l l u s t r a t e d b y t h e e x a m p l e s g i v e n b e l o w . The
f o r m a t i o n of t h e c h a r a c t e r s
is similar
n a g a r i c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s ,
u s i n g t h e form " C ^ 3 f
b.
or ^
o r
5^
u s i n g t h e form
when c o m b i n e d w i t h
following a vorgiiy
Only a few of t h e G u j a r a t i
which occur a r e i l l u s t r a t e d
characters
The c h a r a c t e r
when t h e f i r s t
often
Words b e g i n n i n g w i t h t h i s a r e
the realisation
is
akar
of
consecutive
, i n t h e same way a s
'
HlUdX
'lftwl_
fedUHl
n a s - t o 5
bhs-no6
dives-ma?
is written
the p r o n u n c i a t i o n i n modern G u j a r a t i
a n d ^ Y ,
Those
The c h a r a c t e r
a f t e r words b e g i n n i n g w i t h
The f o l l o w i n g words i l l u s t r a t e
nuk'san
a c o n j u n c t c n a r a c t e r and i s
i n c l u d e d i n t h e G u j a r a t i vornomala.^-
conjunct c h a r a c t e r s :
3 . 1 , and
occur i n t h i s c l a s s .
placed i n Gujarati d i c t i o n a r i e s
^ for
character.
consonant c h a r a c t e r s ,
sahej
o f s u c h words a s
represent
(d
S 9 n e l
(^Y).
1 . Cf. S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s k . i . a . and b .
2. i b i d . , C h . 2 , 1 . i i i .
3. i b i d . , C h . 2 , l . i . ca-vargah,
U. G f . n o t e on $t under C 1 . 2 . i i . b .
5.. Verbal form.
6. Noun w i t h s u f f i x .
7 . Noun w i t h p a r t i c l e .
i66
G U J A R A T I
S E C T I O N
Reading examples^
y^<a
W l
W l
SkCd
3I
GttfcSUl
fe-H^L
ii.
R.*rtl
<t*d,
*U3*l
Wfcd
(^Hil
^ H ^ L
^L^rd
g^t
a.
**Cl
characters .
2
preceding.
Two c h a r a c t e r s occur with preceding
(6 , i n the Sanskrit l o a n s
following.
The characters which occur with f o l l o w i n g
are i l l u s t r a t e d i n
and V( are sometimes
-<*l%
d ^ [tih]
U L ^ [*U&]
5*1 t*i
*dtWU
<tR r l d l
cl^lDl
M l VLv^d
^ I d ^ U s
U&4%A
&
&
rld^
*Y, ^iRdL
^ Y d R l - H
^ L L ^ =dil^
ctl i ^ d l M V
cldl
#ldl,
^ d r l Gdl^ld UeT y l R , ^ l
C d l R l - f l vlvS^Cl <d^l
dfe;
"ideOA
<dl<tdRt
1. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 6 9 .
2. C f . S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s U. i i .
3. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 1 7 0 .
k Sarpha Jodnikosh, by Maganlal
Prabhudas Desai, Uth e d . 19U9, p . 1 6 , pub. Navajivan Prakashan
Mandir, Ahmedabad.
C O N J U N C T
*k
ctU^-Cl >.
(k^vSl
<H*Adl
H^l.
SidlA
*d5to
fcQA
<=LR
5HUVrLLHl4l
^UAL-il
e>.
=i>id
Y d !
3d
*UR
e>
d M ^ & l A
Vldl&
rL VCVIHL
YtvS^d
W t d d
d R l
\<=Udl
fctftUH
Rd**U
Hl-H
@<Hvl
^HH^
(A&fcHt
^LaU^bd
R l 4 l
e>.
^ ( A
HfcF
(A^eildl
rlLC^lH-
^HdHL-H
<dA
(AHIH!
=*l(dlA
167
cHL 9lvS^dHL * d U Y 5 d l
(RlRlAl
Vto^QAl ^IL^iclHL
CHARACTERS
R e T aAdik
HUieiHl
*td-d
9ui>d
^HAHl-M-
H f c f Y L H >
* d A
V
Y
tR
"ORI
Ufc/l
d&l
<=txk
d l M ^ l
HO
d .
G U J A R A T I
S E C T I O N
T r a n s c r i p t i o n o f R e a d i n g Examples
Chapter 2.
1.1.
ghon
jho-j;
no
ch
pg
gho<^
nakh
dhon
bdn
jomer^
pk4
beged^
dhod^'por^
l.ii.
lecek
reved^
per
loy
res
lese^
helek
j e n _
mdd
dhemek
lekh
char
jheror^
yeven
poster
Je"|;h
sedh
seres
J e r ' b e t
bor
red^
rej
kol
rev
cay
vekhet
pelokh
led^'ken^
tor'tej
Jon,
hes
Jepeth
dej
semey
her'kot
ba^ad
dhevel
kernel
h&\.
2.1.
ao
is
uucek
uun
iya"t
mau
ek
uu~J;h
leii
ap
e
deph'ter
ser
Jet
phenes
veket ser
1
per'vel
. hel'ke-j;
eo
e<]h
ri^
e v s e d h ogh
geii
jeiie
d e i i
che
sev
vey
joy
;tereph
bhereri
heren^
.kes'ret
gomen
peahen
leg
bher
reten
peven
yoj
cjheg
pen_
gej'ken
sar'ke-j;
d e l
ke
teged^
bhejen
bherec[
corek
herekh
p h e X
2.1i.
khol
ver
ph1;
bed^'che !;
ch-|;h
jed^
hh.Qi{
phs^sk
tenekh
Dhe-fpo ];
ghor
jhol
veredh
leger;
kkh
ben
me^h
dom
cmn
depe^
cek'mek
leg'bheg
1. i i i .
s e m
jhecjep
nogod
cheler
vered
kel'ter
cec[
thed^
tok
bho-Ji'kon
roth
yov
dho
jo
Da
ghii
aj
ubheq
deiie
te
ev^h
iijf
leiie
ca
je
bhuu
dho
jii
Jejh
roj
t
duudh
lok
ruup
ciij
drdh
hit
jay
god
lav
nehi
behu
mehe
pechii
aje
uubho
uge
apo
rsi
rtu
seve
teo
bhaii
chiie
juo
boyrii
golo
varu
peyso
iriuke
rajii
pelo
divo krpa
vise
nijale
ujanii
ruupiyo
tabedarii
hojiyarii
bhaioe
n
P.1U9.
pay'Iii
cheter
peser
ek'tha
ap'ne
jem'rukh
c h e f re
pes'riine
bek'rii
pay'del
cheter-vii
pesor-vii
nek'jo
pog'lii
al'su
ko^'val
guj ratii
f
kos'bii
koseb'cor
peked^
pek'cjo
pekecj-vo
mok'lii
mokal-vii
TRANSCRIPTION
pa
badh
3.i.
ii.
169
hu
kii
bhoy
ph:k
khc
sSj
jhakh
tevaj
madu.
pehoc
vl^ii
anand
jsntu
vssant
msr^
endor
uugh
thau"
kenjus
slic
llba
gmba
bhes
somp
Chapter 3
Glass 1 .
nokkii
lokk&d^
cokkho l a g g u v s c c e
beccu i c c h a goccho
S9jj9d_
ujjhotli
chu-J;t
tt
citt
khsd^o p i t t g T , p o t t h g r muddgl buddhi
oddho grins cgppu bebbe h i m m 9 t
reyygt
chello
hSliii
hisso
D
h i i
Class 2.
jukti
bhgkti
rukmir^ii
sembgndh
jpan
t 9 t k a l
l 9 g n
C 9 m 9 t k a r
rgrjg
j 9 n m
gupt
sundgr
Jebd
argmbh
t 9 t p a r
pgnth
ygtn
pgrgntu
Class 3 - i kyare
/ 9 k y o
khyalu
fiakhyo
lagyu
sughyu
slicyo
puchyo
jyare
k h o j y u suujhyu
chu^yo
uuthyu
p9d_yo
kadjiyo bher|yo
jiityo
tya
athyu
vidya
/ o d h y o medhye manyo
nyay p y a r e
apyfl haphyo
dgbyCf thobhy u
gamyu s u u r y
kgryo b o l y o
avyu
bhavyu
9V9/y
piir'syu
monusy
kshyu"
rnelyu n i k g l y o
9drJ"y
Class 3 . i t .
settv
svgpn
prthvii
dve/
serv
dhvgni
ii/vsr
tottvsjjian
vi/vas
sv9bhav
Class 3 i i t
a. trk
muurkh
vidyarthii n i r
b.
krom
from
vorg
srjit
g e r j s n a v e r n o n puurr^ v a r t s n
9
erdhu rpgr^ d h s n n d 9 r m i y k h e r v puurve
hors
r t h
d 9 y
prarjii
trsri
irjgrejii
n 9 m
triiju
Jukrovar
prsmane
bhramor
Class 3 - i v .
phalgun
k 9
Jlok
klej*
Class
l p g n a
klas
kolha
glas
k 9 l h 9 i i
sv^lp
Jilp
pralhad
slet
U.i.
a. m e / k a r l i paj"cim
ce/ma
pejcattap
p u s k 9 \ duskorm r a s t r
vostu rssto
sthiti
tiroskar
sgrrjskrt
smeror^
a/cory
dust
P ?t
pustgk
Jastr s t r i l
stheT,
rast
b. p o r i i k s a
krs:q
r 9 k s 9 r ^
Qksar
Igksmoi;
9 p s 9 r a
insaph
170
GUJARATI
Class
SECTION
U.ii.
nhavu
samhe ( s a m e )
Gujarati prose
tamhe
(tome)
passage
jod^onii J a s t r o p u u t h o y , b o h o T i i J i s t ruuq^hine
bodhu
jeflu
e n u s e r o t i i hoy,
a j e ongre j i i b h a s a n i i
thaii
joc|onii bodhii r i i t e
to kehevayo j n e h i ; k e f l i i y e
jevii
j a y , e vodhare
sarvamany t h a i i c u k i i c h e ,
lakhan_ jad^ii ave c h e .
gaii e f l e
thaii
tethii
avojyok
che.
ty
angrejii bhasanii
jod^anii
ek v a r a r a j a k a t a - m S t h i i
vyavastha utpann
thaii
jay che.
sudharano p r a v a h a many v i k a l p o n i i moryada-mg j v a h i i
vakhot
j a t a v i k a l p o - m a amuk j a t - n i i
Joke c h e .
hoy
J a s t r o j u d d h che em
b a b o t - m a e cjhangadhacja. v a g a r - n i i
jocjonii-ma a r a j a k a t a p h e l a v a pami i n a t h i i .
BENGALI
PREPARED
IN
SECTION
COLLABORATION
WITH
MISS G. M. SUMMERS
formerly
Lecturer
School of Oriental
University
in Bengali
and African
of
London
in the
Studies
1.
C H A P T E R !
ARRANGEMENT
The B e n g a l i s c r i p t ,
OP
THE
SYLLABARY
a s a w r i t i n g s y s t e m , i s "based on t h e same
The c h a r a c t e r s of
the
s i g h t t o be very d i f f e r e n t
form from t h o s e of t h e D e v a n a g a r i s c r i p t ,
i n l i n e and
some o f them a r e
recognis-
a b l y of t h e same o r i g i n .
The same s y s t e m o f n o t a t i o n i s u s e d i n t h i s s e c t i o n f o r t h e
s c r i p t i o n of t h e B e n g a l i s c r i p t a s t h a t u s e d i n t h e S a n s k r i t
and i n t h e t r a n s c r i p t i o n o f t h e modern l a n g u a g e s w h i c h a r e
w i t h t h e Devanagari s c r i p t .
As i n t h e D e v a n a g a r i s c r i p t ,
c h a r a c t e r of t h e B e n g a l i s c r i p t r e p r e s e n t s a s y l l a b l e
in Bengali as in Sanskrit,
red t o i n E n g l i s h t e x t b o o k s a s t h e
'inherent'
vowel.
a consonant c h a r a c t e r o f t h e B e n g a l i s y l l a b a r y ,
section,
written
each
consisting
e i t h e r of a vowel or o f a c o n s o n a n t f o l l o w e d b y t h e f i r s t
vowel s e r i e s . This v o w e l ,
v o w el of
is usually
or i n r e c i t i n g
'o'.
In order to p r e s e r v e
the
refer-
In r e f e r r i n g
tran-
to
the
usually
uniform-
i t y i n t h e s y s t e m a t i c t r a n s c r i p t i o n t h r o u g h o u t t h i s work t h e symbol
T
i s used in t h i s s e c t i o n to r e p r e s e n t
t h e r e are v a r i o u s o t h e r d i f f e r e n c e s
t h e i n h e r e n t v o w e l , and a s
i n t h e q u a l i t y of vowel
used i n r e a l i s i n g t h e B e n g a l i c h a r a c t e r s , t h e s y s t e m a t i c
sounds
transcription
174
B E N G A L I
S E C T I O N
the
t e x t and i n t h o s e g i v e n f o r p r a c t i c e i n r e a d i n g , by a p h o n e t i c
scription.
The p h o n e t i c t r a n s c r i p t i o n i s g i v e n i n b r a c k e t s t o
trandis-
t i n g u i s h i t from t h e s y s t e m a t i c roman t r a n s c r i p t i o n .
I n t h e roman s y l l a b a r y g i v e n b e l o w , t h e s y l l a b l e s a r e
in the table i n the systematic t r a n s c r i p t i o n used in the
syllabary.
For t h e t r a n s c r i p t i o n o f c e r t a i n a d d i t i o n a l
w h i c h do n o t o c c u r i n t h e S a n s k r i t s y l l a b a r y ,
transcription,
Sanskrit
characters
and f o r t h e
phonetic
Roman N o t a t i o n , a r e u s e d i n t h i s
i.
represented
All-India
section:-
S y s t e m a t i c roman n o t a t i o n .
po and ph , f o r t h e r e t r o f l e x f l a p p e d c o n s o n a n t s , r e p r e s e n t e d
t h e s c r i p t b y m o d i f i e d forms of t h e c h a r a c t e r s
to
and
corresponding
cjh .
1
y , f o r t h e m o d i f i e d form of t h e c h a r a c t e r c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o
2
and r e a l i s e d i n v a r i o u s w a y s , d e s c r i b e d i n Chapter
nj , f o r t h e m o d i f i e r r e f e r r e d t o a s t h e
ii.
Phonetic
y ,
2.
nusvar.3
notation.
( o ) , f o r t h e r e a l i s a t i o n o f t h e i n h e r e n t vowel i n most
(as) , f o r t h e r e a l i s a t i o n ,
in certain contexts,
s c r i b e d i n roman n o t a t i o n a s
special contexts,
to represent
2.
of the vowel t r a n s c r i b e d as
o r a s z e r o - v o w e l , "in c e r t a i n
ibid.,
l.ii.
tran-
a ; and f o r t h e r e a l i s a t i o n ,
ntsth y.
in
e .
nasalisation.
t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e i n h e r e n t v o w e l ,
a s an - g l i d e ,
1 . See C h . 2 , l . i .
contexts.
of t h e v o w e l
in
medially,
positions.
3 . See
Ch.2,3.ii.
ARRANGEMENT OF T H E SYLLABARY
75
B e n g a l i S y l l a b a r y i n Roman N o t a t i o n
1
Velar
2
Palatal
Unaspirated
ka
ca
Aspirated
kha
cha
J
CQ
CD
>
H
Voiceless
CONSONANTS w i t h
CQ
H
O
>
Unaspirated
Aspirated
gha
Retroflex
Jha
5
Labial
Dental
ta
pa
tha
tha
pha
da
ba
dha
bha
na
ma
ra
la
va**
sa^
sa
dha
PH
Nasal
(p-o)
Semivowels
ya-'
Fricatives
jfa
ha
Aspirate
VOWELS
MODIFIERS
N a s a l - nj and
ii
uu
ay
av
Aspirated - h
table:
1 . The c h a r a c t e r s c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h e s e two s y l l a b l e s a r e m o d i f i e d
to represent th e medial and f i n a l
as f l a p p e d s o u n d s , w r i t t e n a s
pa
r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e s e
characters
and pha i n t h e t r a n s c r i p t i o n .
2. The c h a r a c t e r c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h i s s y l l a b l e i s n o t w r i t t e n a s a
s i n g l e character i n B e n g a l i , b u t only i n combination with
c h a r a c t e r s , i l l u s t r a t e d b e l o w i n Chapter 3.
other
176
3.
B E N G A L I
S E C T I O N
As t h e c h a r a c t e r c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h i s s y l l a b l e
i s always
i n t h e same way a s t h e c h a r a c t e r c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o
form o f i t
i s used to represent
of t h i s m o d i f i e d
character,
s c r i b e d i n t h i s work a s
h.
6.
in certain contexts.
r e f e r r e d t o a s 'ntsth y ,
to the s y l l a b l e
2.2.ii.
i s t h e same a s
syllabic
The c h a r a c t e r s
occurs only
of t h e Eengali s c r i p t
groups as the s y l l a b l e s
in
loanwords.
g i v e n i n t h e above t a b l e ,
by B e n g a l i grammarians i n d e s c r i b i n g
These t e r m s a r e S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s ,
t h e same c o n v e n t i o n s
r e a d i n g from a t e x t .
the characters
and t h e i r
the s i m i l a r i t i e s
somewhat d i f f e r e n t
and d i f f e r e n c e s
and i n s y s t e m a t i c
ksrm
lo) \m*.
section.
a r e o b s e r v e d a s t h o s e u s e d i n modern
t h e y are r e c o g n i s a b l e as loanwords.
of t e r m s , i n s c r i p t
^T^TR"
realis-
Bengali
from
B e n g a l i ^SJ^^f
viramoh
v|
The
ksr,,
(okkhor)
viram
(biram)
(borgo)
ontshsth
vs>|
antastha
^^"{T
uusman
^"^J
uusm
vyajijanam
^5$*7
T ^ R
two
transcription:
^FcT^ST
are
following
between the
and p h o n e t i c
vrg
read-
t h o u g h when t h e S a n s k r i t and t h e B e n g a l i t e r m s
p l a c e d s i d e by s i d e ,
examples i l l u s t r a t e
used
and when t h e y a r e r e a l i s e d i n
They s o u n d , t h e r e f o r e ,
same
and t h e t e r m s
Sanskrit
the
loanwords.
This v o w e l ,
sets
and t r a n -
b .
The c h a r a c t e r c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h i s s y l l a b l e
ing,
The u s e
The c h a r a c t e r c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h i s s y l l a b l e
Sanskrit
j , a m o d i f i e d
y , i s d i s c u s s e d i n Chapte r
character corresponding
5.
realised
(ontostho)
(u/J"8)
ARRANGEMENT OF T H E SYLLABARY
Bengali
177
Calligraphy.
In t h e modern t e a c h i n g o f B e n g a l i w r i t i n g ,
g e n e r a l l y u s e d , and c o n s e q u e n t l y l i t t l e
a t t e n t i o n i s paid to the b a l -
ance or d i r e c t i o n of t h e b r o a d and t h i n s t r o k e s .
Formerly,
however,
w r i t i n g was t a u g h t w i t h a b r o a d p e n s u c h a s t h a t d e s c r i b e d i n t h e
n o t e s on c a l l i g r a p h y i n t h e S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n .
1
position
of t h e b r o a d and t h i n s t r o k e s
Though t h e
relative
i s n o t s o s t r i c t l y adhere d t o
the
d i r e c t i o n of them i s t h e same a s t h a t i l l u s t r a t e d i n t h o s e
There i s a c o n v e n t i o n a l
character? the f i r s t
general
notes.
s t r o k e i n w r i t i n g m o s t of t h e
each
characters
b e g i n s a t t h e t o p l e f t hand s i d e and t h e l a s t s t r o k e b r i n g s t h e p e n
t o the t o p r i g h t hand s i d e s o t h a t i t
i s p o s s i b l e t o p a s s s t r a i g h t on
t o the b e g i n n i n g of t h e n e x t c h a r a c t e r .
I f a c h a r a c t er has a h o r i z o n -
t a l h e a d - s t r o k e , or i s c o m p l e t e d w i t h a s h o r t h o r i z o n t a l s t r o k e
t h e top r i g h t hand s i d e ,
t o the f i r s t
t h i s s t r o k e i s w r i t t e n l a s t and c a r r i e d on
s t r o k e of t h e n e x t c h a r a c t e r i n a word; when s u c h a
s t r o k e i s p l a c e d on t h e l e f t
first.
at
hand s i d e
of the c h a r a c t e r ,
This h e a d - s t r o k e i s r e f e r r e d t o as the
be l i f t e d as r a r e l y a s p o s s i b l e
'matra'.
it
is
written
The pen s h o u l d
i n w r i t i n g a c h a r a c t e r , or
consecutive
if
paper i s u s e d , and t h e r e g u l a r a l i g n m e n t i s by t h e t o p of
the
ruled
characters.
The p r i n t e d forms of t h e c h a r a c t e r s , g i v e n i n t h e t a b l e s
Chapter 2 , are n o t u s u a l l y u s e d i n m a n u s c r i p t .
The c o r r e s p o n d i n g
c u r s i v e forms of t h e c h a r a c t e r s , u s e d i n w r i t i n g ,
1 . See S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n ,
Introduction.
N
in
are g i v e n below
the
178
B E N G A L I
S E C T I O N
p r i n t e d f o r m s , w i t h n o t e s on c a l l i g r a p h y when n e c e s s a r y .
g i v e n "below i l l u s t r a t e
characters,
The e x a m p l e s
the g e n e r a l order of s t r o k e s i n w r i t i n g
differ-
e n c e s t o he n o t e d b e t w e e n c h a r a c t e r s w h i c h h a ve some s i m i l a r i t y
form.
\5
>
V
v5
&
m
the
of
C H A P T E R
CHARACTERS
OP
THE
SYLLABARY
The B e n g a l i c h a r a c t e r s a r e d e s c r i b e d i n t l j i s c h a p t e r under t h e
same h e a d i n g s a s t b e D e v a n a g a r i c h a r a c t e r s
in the Sanskrit
section:
c h a r a c t e r s , and uusm(uj*j6)
In t h e form i n w h i c h t h e y a r e g i v e n i n t h e
they are r e a l i s e d a s s y l l a b l e s
vorgiiy
c o n s i s t i n g o f an i n i t i a l
syllabary,
consonant
f o l l o w e d by t h e f i r s t v o w e l o f t h e v o w e l s e r i e s , r e p r e s e n t e d i n t h e
roman t a b l e a s
that i s ,
The c h a r a c t e r s a r e d e s c r i b e d a s 'kar'
(okar),
which i t r e p r e s e n t s , w i t h t h e a d d i t i o n o f t h e p a r t i c l e
example, k-kar, t - k a r , p - k a r .
When a c h a r a c t e r i s t o b e
This mark i s c a l l e d
9^
is
realised
i s w r i t t e n a t t h e f o o t of
'hsnt' ( h o / o n t o )
w r i t t e n w i t h t h i s mark a r e r e f e r r e d t o t h u s : ^5
(ko-e ho/onto)^,
for
a s t h e c o n s o n a n t e l e m e n t of
'-kar';
syllable
' g - e hsnt
is
the
the
, and c h a r a c t e r s
'k-e h o s s n t '
( g o - e h o / o n t o ) , and s o on.
In
r e a d i n g w o r d s , kar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s a r e r e a l i s e d i n v a r i o u s
1. Compare S a n s k r i t s e c t i o n , C h a p t e r 2 .
2 . ' e n d i n g i n a c o n s o n a n t ' . Cf. S a n s k r i t C h . 2 . 1 . v i r a m e h and hlnt.
3 . 'hsssnt i n k'.
See a l s o b e l o w , u n d e r i .
180
BENGALI
SECTION
i s assumed t h a t t h e
can r e c o g n i s e from a k n o w l e d g e o f t h e s p o k e n l a n g u a g e w h i c h
a r e t o b e r e a l i s e d i n t h i s way.
In some v e r b a l forms
reader
characters
, however,
the
hosonto i s o f t e n w r i t t e n w i t h c h a r a c t e r s t h a t are r e a l i s e d w i t h
v o w e l , and i t
zero-
script.
The a b s e n c e o f t h e h o s o n t o i n a c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r c a n n o t ,
e v e r , b e t a k e n t o i n d i c a t e t h a t t h e c h a r a c t e r i s t o be r e a l i s e d
howwith
t h e i n h e r e n t v o w e l . A l t h o u g h t h e w r i t i n g s y s t e m o f B e n g a l i h a s much i n
common w i t h t h e S a n s k r i t w r i t i n g s y s t e m , owing t o i t s o r i g i n , t h e u s e
of a system so c l o s e l y r e l a t e d t o the S a n s k r i t system f o r w r i t i n g a
modern s p o k e n l a n g u a g e makes n e c e s s a r y a number o f c o n v e n t i o n s b o t h o f
s p e l l i n g and of r e a l i s i n g t h e c h a r a c t e r s i n r e a d i n g .
Some of
these
c o n v e n t i o n s c o n c e r n t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s .
The
are
realised,
a s d e s c r i b e d a b o v e , i n t h e same way a s t h e S a n s k r i t
charact-
e r s . When t h e y o c c u r i n w o r d s , h o w e v e r , t h e y a r e r e a l i s e d i n v a r i o u s
ways: as consonants w i t h the inheren t vowel, as consonants w i t h
v o w e l , or a s c o n s o n a n t s w i t h a g l i d e - v o w e l .
Further, the
zero-
inherent
v o w e l , r e p r e s e n t e d i n t h e s y s t e m a t i c roman n o t a t i o n by o , i s
realis-
ed i n some c o n t e x t s a s ( o ) and i n o t h e r s a s ( o ) .
realis-
This varying
of
first
discussion
1 . These v e r b a l f o r m s a r e d i s c u s s e d b e l o w , under i i .
2 . R u l e s r e c o g n i s e d by t h e U n i v e r s i t y of C a l c u t t a c o n c e r n i n g t h e w r i t i n g of t h e h o s o n t o a r e g i v e n i n t h e B e n g a l i d i c t i o n a r y
1^4*1
( c o l o n t i k a ) , a p p e n d i x , page 3 8 , s u b - s e c t i o n 1+.
3 . See b e l o w , u n d e r i . , R e a l i s a t i o n of okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s .
t
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
of vowel c h a r a c t e r s and v o w el s i g n s ! . k t
u
181
reading a Bengali
text
determined
language.
C h a r a c t e r s of t h e v o r g i i y g r o up (
This group c o n s i s t s o f t w e n t y f i v e
consonant characters
i n g s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g o f an i n i t i a l
represent-
p l o s i v e c o n s o n a n t f o l l o w e d by
the i n h e r e n t v o w e l . These c h a r a c t e r s f a l l
vorg3, a c c o r d i n g t o t h e f i v e p o s i t i o n s
into five
classes,
of a r t i c u l a t i o n .
The t a b l e
of t h e s e f i v e c l a s s e s may be compared w i t h t h e S a n s k r i t t a b l e
vorgiiy consonant
of
characters.
Jko-vorg^
k
kh
gh
ch
3"
jh
th
a;
<th
th
5 c-vrg
I *f
t-vrg
t-vrg
ft
-ji
u
-n
*r
t
ph
1 . See b e l o w , under 2 , i i .
l.i.
3. (borgo).Cf. S a n s k r i t ,
*r
M
p-vrg
* f
dh
bh
2. ( b o r g i y o ) . C f . S a n s k r i t , Ch.2.
Ch.2,l.i.
U. ( k o - b o r g o , e t c . ) .
182
BENGALI
SECTION
The c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n i n t h i s t a b l e a r e t h o s e used, i n
The c o r r e s p o n d i n g c u r s i v e f o r m s , u s e d i n h a n d w r i t i n g ,
printing.
are g i v e n below.
to
j o i n e a c h c h a r a c t e r t o t h e f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r by means of a s m a l l
head-strokel.
The o r d e r o f s t r o k e s
i s g i v e n w i t h any c h a r a c t e r
w h i c h t h i s o r d e r i s n o t e v i d e n t from t h e form of t h e c h a r a c t e r
in
itself.
ko-vorgo:
a*
ce-vorge:
to-vorgo:
ta-vorgo:
<5
po-vergo:
Calligraphy
of
ko
characters:
jhe
~|
dho
<
<f
Calligraphy
f7
cho
Xho
<^
IVf
or
<
So
of words :
*fv5
T=f
The h o s o n t o i s n o t w r i t t e n w i t h
3V
C5
1.
khr]c}a teCkhoijcjo
See n o t e s on c a l l i g r a p h y ,
, k-
v JQ ,
\*) , t o . The c o n s o n a n t
a f o l l o w i n g v o w e l i s r e p r e s e n t e d as
'^fCS
to as
pe
\S
Ch.l.
^
to).
2.
Tjf , m- .
t-
. This c h a r a c t e r i s
without
referred
( k h o ^ o t o ) , 'broken
to'
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
The c h a r a c t e r
m e d i a l l y and f i n a l l y
183
rja , d o e s n o t o c c u r i n i t i a l l y , b u t i t
occurs
the h o s o n t o .
The c h a r a c t e r
, jia , o c c u r s o n l y i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s ,
combination w i t h o t h e r
The c h a r a c t e r
characters^.
"| , n e , i s r e a l i s e d a s ( n o ) , e x c e p t when i t
2
combined w i t h c h a r a c t e r s o f t h e t
l o a n w o r d s , and n e v e r
The c h a r a c t e r
is
initially.
3J , pho , i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d a s a b i - l a b i a l
f r i c a t i v e . When s t r e s s e d ,
The c h a r a c t e r
in
\5
it
i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d as a p l o s i v e .
, bho , i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d a s a p l o s i v e when
i n i t i a l , b u t a s a b i - l a b i a l f r i c a t i v e when m e d i a l or
The two c h a r a c t e r s
\5" , cLo
Modified forms of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s
and
Jy , djio
final.
occur only
initially.
o c c u r m e d i a l l y and f i n a l l y .
v5
and
These
vornomala,
]jf .
R e a l i s a t i o n of t h e i n h e r e n t v o w e l i n akar c o n s o n a n t
characters. k
The r e a l i s a t i o n of okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s i n v a r i o u s w a y s ,
according to the p o s i t i o n of t h e c h a r a c t e r
i n a w o r d , and i n
phonetic c o n t e x t s , f o l l o w s c e r t a i n g e n e r a l r u l e s .
special
Some of t h e s e c o n -
t e x t s can be d e f i n e d o n l y by a d e t a i l e d p h o n e t i c s t u d y of t h e spoken
l a n g u a g e , and numerous e x c e p t i o n s
occur.
however, g i v e some g e n e r a l g u i d a n c e f o r
The r u l e s s t a t e d below
will,
reading.
1. See Ch.3,3*Class 2 . i i . b .
2 . i b i d . , Class 2 . i i . a .
3. (dja-e /unno p o ) , ' i n 40 a d o t , p a ' , i . e . t h e
pa w r i t t e n by
adding a dot t o 40 .
U. F u r t h e r n o t e s on t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of okar
consonant c h a r a c t e r s i n s p e c i a l c o n t e x t s a r e g i v e n b e l o w , under
i i i . , and under 2 . i i .
184
a.
BENGALI
Initial
akar c o n s o n a n t
An i n i t i a l
vowel
characters.
akar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r
( o ) , as i n
character
SECTION
sf^
, g o c ( g o c ) , ^j^f
i s f o l l o w e d hy a f i n a l
the i n i t i a l
i s usually r e a l i s e d with
, kob(kob) , u n l e s s
the
the
n a s a l consonant c h a r a c t e r ,
when
okar c h a r a c t e r i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d w i t h t h e v o w e l
(o),
as i n \ g p ^ , jan( j o n ) .
b.
Medial akar c o n s o n a n t
i.
M e d i a l akar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s i n words o f t h r e e
.of w h i c h t h e f i n a l
(o),
ii.
characters.1
a s i n "^STpSl
is
characters,
, kadam(kodom) , ^ f l ^
vowel
> nagad(nogod) .
2
M e d i a l okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s a s t h e s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r o f a
a s i n ^^SXJ^?
okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s
, ckmk(cok'mok)3.
or w i t h
Two c o n s e c u t i v e
are not u s u a l l y b o t h r e a l i s e d w i t h
the
vowel ( o ) . . .
c.
P i n a l akar c o n s o n a n t
i.
zero-vowel,
ii.
Pinal
as i n
2.
3.
1+.
5.
"^x*
, ct(co{) ,
with
, kb(kob).5
w i t h the vowel
1.
characters.
(o).
This r e a l i s a t i o n
o c c u r s i n word s of
certain
T h i s n o t e r e f e r s t o w o r d s c o n s i s t i n g of kar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s
o n l y ; f u r t h e r n o t e s a r e g i v e n b e l o w , under 2 . i i . , f o r t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s i n words i n w h i c h v o w e l s i g n s o c c u r .
See S . K . C h a t t e r j i , v3t^t5J^K
"^hftcTf
<T5t^ T
bhasapreka/
bangala vyaksrsn, p p . 3 2 f f . ; pub. C a l c u t t a U n i v e r s i t y , 1939For t h e method u s e d i n t h e p h o n e t i c t r a n s c r i p t i o n o f m e d i a l and
f i n a l c h a r a c t e r s i n words t o w h i c h t h e s e n o t e s r e f e r , s e e a b o v e ,
C h . l . , and b e l o w , a f t e r n o t e c .
For t h e r e a l i s a t i o n o f kar c h a r a c t e r s i n compound w o r d s , s e e n o t e
c. below.
Final c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d with zero-vowel are not u s u a l l y w r i t t e n
w i t h t h e h e s s n t . T h i s mark i s u s e d i n n o t e s a. and b . t o s i m p l i f y
the t r a n s c r i p t i o n of examples o c c u r r i n g b e f o r e the r e a l i s a t i o n of
final characters i s discussed.
r
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
grammatical c a t e g o r i e s ,
s u m m a r i s e d later-*-;
185
and i n c e r t a i n
w o r d s , u s u a l l y words o f two c h a r a c t e r s , w h i c h c a n be
o n l y by a knowledge o f s p o k e n B e n g a l i ,
\S"5[
e . g . ^S"\5
other
recognised
, kote(koto).
, teme( t o m o ) . When s u c h w o r d s o c c u r a s t h e f i r s t p a r t of a
compound word, t h e f i n a l
character,
word, i s s t i l l r e a l i s e d i n t h i s
t h o u g h m e d i a l i n t h e compound
way.
, (moto),
> (mot),
'similar',
'idea',
'opinion ,
1
or
'purpose',
'like*.
As t h e r e a l i s a t i o n o f okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s w i t h t h e
vowels
( o ) and ( o ) v a r i e s n o t o n l y i n t h e c o n t e x t s d e s c r i b e d a b o v e , b u t
also
the f o l l o w i n g system i s
used
i n t h e p h o n e t i c t r a n s c r i p t i o n o f e x a m p l e s i n t h i s work:
a) I n i t i a l okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s a r e t r a n s c r i b e d w i t h ( o )
with ( o ) , accordin g t o n o t e a.
above.
b) Medial akar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d a s a s y l l a b l e
the inherent vowel are t r a n s c r i b e d w i t h (o)
according to note b.
w i t h an e - g l i d e
with
or w i t h (.0) ,
are t r a n s c r i b e d t h u s :
or
(k'),(p').
c) P i n a l okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l
t r a n s c r i b e d as f i n a l
or
are
c o n s o n a n t s ; t h o s e which are r e a l i s e d w i t h
186
BENGALI
SECTION
Reading examples-*1.
One c h a r a c t e r w o r d s , r e a l i s e d a s c o n s o n a n t s w i t h t h e v o w e l
^
2.
Tf
*t
T>
*t
n?
ii.
zero-vowel:
iii.
^ " v 5
Initial
Spl
rfl>
vSfvJ
s f v s
^T5?p
TSf^T^
T 5 " v 3
^*sj>
?FF^E
5f\5Si\5
W&^T
zero-vowel:
and
c.i.
and
c.i.
*T&3?
2+. Four c h a r a c t e r w o r d s ; r e a l i s e d a s i n n o t e b . i i .
F&'fTj
" ^ T T s
c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h (o),> f i n a l w i t h
Three c h a r a c t e r w o r d s ; r e a l i s e d a s i n n o t e b . i .
T F 1 > 3 5
ts^
tjfe
ii.
*t
Two c h a r a c t e r w o r d s .
1.
3.
(o).
*tT>*tT>
W W
C h a r a c t e r s o f t h e o n t o s t h group( ^
There a r e f o u r c h a r a c t e r s i n t h i s g r o u p , a s s o c i a t e d w i t h f o u r
t h e vrg, a s shown i n t h e roman s y l l a b a r y ^ .
t h e D e v a n a g a r i c h a r a c t e r s o f t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g group**.
y
Cursive forms:
Words:
1.
3.
pf
?r
of
*r
Zf^Jf
For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 2 6 .
2. (ontostho).
See roman t a b l e , C h a p t e r 1 .
U. S e e S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , l . i i .
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
The c h a r a c t e r
TJ , t r a n s c r i b e d i n t h e roman n o t a t i o n a s
i s r e a l i s e d as ( j o ) .
It corresponds,
group, t o t h e o n t e s t h o c h a r a c t e r
Z[
as the f i r s t
v5f , jo , r e f e r r e d t o a s
'vorgiiy
yo ,
character in
, y , i n t h e S a n s k r i t
It i s r e f e r r e d to as ' o n t o s t h o y o ' ( o n t o s t h o
from
187
this
syllabary.
j o ) , to distinguish
j'(bo.rgiyo j o ) .
it
The s e m i -
vowel c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h e S a n s k r i t c h a r a c t e r
If
i s represented
in
B e n g a l i by a m o d i f i e d form o f t h i s c h a r a c t e r .
|J
, r e f e r r e d to as
note^.
The c h a r a c t e r
r e a l i s e d as ( b o ) .
, t r a n s c r i b e d i n t h e roman n o t a t i o n a s
It corresponds,
group, t o t h e o n t o s t h o c h a r a c t e r
vo ,
syllabary.
to d i s t i n g u i s h i t ,
from t h e t h i r d c h a r a c t e r i n
in discussion,
' v o r g i i y b ' ( b o r g i y o b o ) . A l t h o u g h v o r g i i y b
the
is
this
I t i s r e f e r r e d t o i n t h i s work a s
po-vergo,
later
order
the
and
character
i s i n c l u d e d i n t h e s y l l a b a r y i n b o t h t h e vorgiiy' and t h e
ntssth
g r o u p s , and S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s w h i c h a r e w r i t t e n i n t h e D e v a n a g a r i
script with i n i t i a l
<|
, v , a r e p l a c e d i n B e n g a l i d i c t i o n a r i e s
a separate s e c t i o n f o l l o w i n g words w i t h i n i t i a l
in
, 1 . A know-
l e d g e of S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s i s n e e d e d i n o r d e r t o r e c o g n i s e w h i c h
words are t o be found among w o r d s b e g i n n i n g w i t h v o r g i i j f e b and which
among t h o s e b e g i n n i n g w i t h ntsth v . I n t h e more modern B e n g a l i
d i c t i o n a r i e s t h e t e n d e n c y i s t o p l a c e a l l words b e g i n n i n g w i t h
c h a r a c t e r i n one s e c t i o n , a f t e r w o r d s b e g i n n i n g w i t h
1 . See n o t e on ntsth y , u n d e r 2 . i i .
below.
, ph .
this
188
BENGALI
SECTION
a n t a s t h a va i s , h o w e v e r , r e c o g n i s e d a s d i f f e r e n t
when i t
i s combined w i t h a n o t h e r
Reading
examples
Of t h e o n t o s t h a c h a r a c t e r s ,
2.
Two c h a r a c t e r w o r d s .
ii.
3.
Pinal character
<jt??t
zero-vowel:
TO.vr*\
r e a l i s e d with
(o):
words.3
*t*R
sr^rif
i|. Pour c h a r a c t e r
words.^
^^3"^
^F^J^S?r
3^1^
C h a r a c t e r s o f t h e uusma group(
T h i s group o f c h a r a c t e r s
fricative
o c c u r s a s a word.
*pr
Three c h a r a c t e r
iii.
only
wm
^"SJ
)5
c o n s o n a n t s w i t h t h e vowel ( o ) ,
a s an a s p i r a t e w i t h t h e v o w e l ( o ) .
and one c h a r a c t e r
Words:
1.
3.
sa
sa
as
realised
The c h a r a c t e r s a r e a s s o c i a t e d
c
f o u r o f t h e v a r g a , a s shown i n t h e roman s y l l a b a r y .
Cursive forms:
ha
1.
i.
character.
from v a r g i i y a
with
o f t h e same g r o u p . ^
and
ha
*Wf
T^f
1!S
See C h . 3 , 3 . C l a s s 3 . i i .
2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 2 6 .
See a b o v e , n o t e s b . i . and c . i .
U. See a b o v e , n o t e s b . i i . and
c . i . and i i . ( c o m p o u n d s ) .
5. ( u j / o ) .
6. See C h . l .
7 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 1 . i i i .
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
The t h r e e c h a r a c t e r s
"*f
and
189
are r e a l i s e d , a s
(jo),
c e p t when t h e y a r e combined i n a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r w i t h c e r t a i n
charactersl.
They a r e d e s c r i b e d ,
for
instance,
in spelling,
exother
as
TFJ o c c u r s o n l y i n S a n s k r i t
The c h a r a c t e r
syllabary.
, ho , i s
presenting s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g
, kso
, jjia , e a c h r e -
They do n o t , h o w e v e r , p r o p e r l y b e l o n g t o t h e
and i n t h i s work t h e y a r e d i s c u s s e d l a t e r ,
of c o n j u n c t
and
Bengali
o f two c o n s o n a n t s f o l l o w e d by t h e
vowel ( o ) , are o f t e n p l a c e d a f t e r
okseromala.
loanwords.
t h e l a s t c h a r a c t e r of t h e
Two o t h e r c h a r a c t e r s ,
the
syllabary,
in the appropriate
classes
characters .
2
Reading examples-^
1 . Of t h e uusma c h a r a c t e r s o n l y
"*f
o c c u r s a s a word.
2 . Two c h a r a c t e r w o r d s .
i.
Pinal character r e a l i s e d w i t h
*r
ii.
"SR
"$\5
zero-vowel;
*r*r
Pinal character r e a l i s e d w i t h
*TV5
3.
t?-*t
(o):
"SIT
Three c h a r a c t e r words**
^\5F
^H**
^f*P
ii.
*r^F3
"SRvs^
^ ^ ^ ^
so
^FT^Sp ^ T ? ^ ?
1 . See C h . 3 . 3 . C l . U . i . a .
2 . i b i d . C 1 . 2 . i i . b . and C l . U . i . b .
3 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 2 6 .
k - R e a l i s e d a s i n n o t e s b . i . and
c . i . a b o v e. 5 . Words i n l i n e i . r e a l i s e d a s i n n o t e s b . i i . and
c . i . ; words i n l i n e i i . r e a l i s e d a s n o t e c . i i . ( c o m p o u n d s ) .
190
BENGALI
SECTION
R e a l i s a t i o n of okar consonant c h a r a c t e r s i n v e r b a l
The r e a l i s a t i o n o f m e d i a l and f i n a l
c e r t a i n grammatical c a t e g o r i e s
given below.
forms.
akar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s
i s made a c c o r d i n g t o t h e g e n e r a l
in
rules
No c o m p r e h e n s i v e s t a t e m e n t can b e made w h i c h c o v e r s
all
c a t e g o r i e s , b u t t h e s e r u l e s g i v e some g u i d a n c e i n r e a d i n g from t h e
script.
The o n l y c o m p l e t e g u i d e i s a k n o w l e d g e of t h e s p o k e n l a n g u a g e ,
a. V e r b al b a s e s e n d i n g i n an kar c o n s o n a n t
i.
Verbal b a s e s w i t h o u t
The f i n a l
character.
suffixes.
kar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r of a v e r b a l b a s e i s
e.g.
^7?T
35-3
bl(bol)
kr(kor)
F^T
?RS
cl(col)
baka(bok)
The form o f t h e v e r b d e s c r i b e d g r a m m a t i c a l l y a s t h e
person s i n g u l a r of the present imperative,
w r i t t e n i n t h e same
way
b a l a or b a l ( b o l )
ii.
Verbal b a s e s w i t h
'second
i n f e r i o r form'
is
a s t h e b a s e , and r e a l i s e d i n t h e same
real-
often
writ-
e.g.
k a r a or k e r ( k o r )
beka or b a k ( b o k )
suffixes.
When a s u f f i x b e g i n n i n g w i t h , or c o n s i s t i n g o f ,
c h a r a c t e r i s added t o a v e r b a l b a s e ,
the f i n a l
a consonant
c h a r a c t e r of
b a s e i s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l o r w i t h an a - g l i d e .
the
Examples
of
t h i s r e a l i s a t i o n a r e g i v e n b e l o w , under n o t e b .
The g r a m m a t i c a l f o r m s d e s c r i b e d a s t h e
simple present t e n s e '
perative'
'Second p e r s o n of
and t h e ' s e c o n d p e r s o n o f t h e p r e s e n t
the
im-
a r e w r i t t e n i n t h e same way a s t h e v e r b a l b a s e ; b u t
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
191
c h a r a c t e r w i t h t h e vowel ( o ) .
, bala(bolo) ,
^SjtJ , k a r a ( k o r o ) , ^|"^
realis-
Examples:
poro(poro)
This r e a l i s a t i o n o c c u r s w i t h s i m i l a r g r a m m a t i c a l forms o f a l l
which have o n l y okar c h a r a c t e r s
of the ' f u t u r e
imperative'
realised with ( o ) ,
s i g n of o' .
L
in the base.
in which the f i r s t
the f i n a l
In the verb
character
, boss
In the
w i t h t h e vowel ( o )
the c h a r a c t e r ,
as i n
<35$J
The v e r b a l s u f f i x e s
i s w r i t t e n w i t h the vowel
, the i n i t i a l
character
<^3?[
in
(bojo).
akar c h a r a c t e r of a v e r b a l
base
k a r e ( k o r i o ) , ^CS^T k a r o ( k o r o ) ! .
c o n s i s t i n g o f akar c o n s o n a n t
^5 , t a ( t o ) ,
, ba(bo)
ar e added t o v e r b a l b a s e s t o form v a r i o u s
t h e s e v e r b a l forms t h e f i n a l
ed as d e s c r i b e d i n n o t e a . i . ,
and
characters.
cT ,
'tenses' ,
and i f
the base c o n s i s t s
In
consonant c h a r a c t e r s t h e i n i t i a l
the vowel ( o ) .
is
i s s o m e t i m e s shown by w r i t i n g t h e mark * a f t e r
b . Verbal forms w i t h s u f f i x e s
la(lo)
'second person'
okar c h a r a c t e r
b o t h grammatical forms i s r e a l i s e d w i t h ( o ) ; e . g .
The r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e i n i t i a l
verbs
realis-
o f two akar
with
Examples:
^^\5
koro-bo(kor'bo)
35^5*1
kara-ta(kor'to)3
kara-la(kor'lo)^
1 . See b e l o w , 2 . i i , n o t e a . i i .
2 . S u f f i x e s of t h e t e n s e s d e s c r i b e d a s
' f u t u r e s i m p l e ' ( b o ) , ' p a s t h a b i t u a l ' ( t o ) and ' p a s t i n d e f i n i t e ' ( l o ) .
3 . In c o l l o q u i a l B e n g a l i t h e s e q u e n c e T^f^T , - r l - , a r i s i n g from t h e
a d d i t i o n of a s u f f i x b e g i n n i n g w i t h
e?| , or t h e s e q u e n c e 7 t K 5 * - r t a r i s i n g from t h e a d d i t i o n o f a s u f f i x b e g i n n i n g w i t h \ 5 , t o a v e r b al base ending i n ^
, a r e r e a l i s e d r e s p e c t i v e l y a s ( - 1 1 - ) and
( - t t - ) , as i n t h e v e r b a l forms
^S^cTf , ( k o l l o ) and
?|5j5"t5 ,
( k o t t o ) . This r e a l i s a t i o n w o u l d b e made i n r e a d i n g from a B e n g a l i t e x t
w r i t t e n i n t h e c o l l o q u i a l s t y l e . S e e f u r t h e r n o t e s on t h e r e a l i s a t i o n
of v e r b a l forms under 2 . i i , and l a t e r i n C h . 3 3 . C l . l .
N
192
BENGALI
SECTION
to
r e p r e s e n t s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g o f a v o w e l o n l y , and v o w e l s i g n s
are
added t o c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s t o r e p r e s e n t s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g o f
i n i t i a l c o n s o n a n t f o l l o w e d by one o f t h e v o w e l s i n t h e s e r i e s
below.
c h a r a c t e r s and v o w e l s i g n s , g i v e n i n t h e S a n s k r i t
i.
an
given
vowel
section.
Vowel C h a r a c t e r s .
r2
ii
5
ey
Cursive forms:
- uu
^3 <J
a S
o
'
av
v3
%*T
&
v3Si
The s u p e r s c r i b e d s t r o k e s i n t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s a r e w r i t t e n l a s t ,
start-
s v a r i i a ( J o r i o) and
a (.fori
\5f
a)->. The o t h e r v o w e l
and
and t h e c h a r a c t e r s
'long'.
are d e s c r i b e d as
and ^5
and t h e
, hrasva**,
a r e d e s c r i b e d a s y^^J
in
d i s t i n c t i o n o f q u a l i t y , b u t c e r t a i n words
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
are always w r i t t e n w i t h t h e
'short
193
v o w e l s and o t h e r s a l w a y s w i t h
'short'
or t h e
given
later.
and
are
The vowel
, syllahic r
is
'long' vowel,
i n which a c o r r e s p o n d i n g d i s t i n c t i o n m u s t h e made i n r e a d i n g ,
the
, o c c u r s o n l y i n some S a n s k r i t
, s y l l a h i c rr ,
loan-
<fo , s y l l a h i c 1 , and
, s y l l a h i c 11 , a r e u s e d i n p r i n t i n g S a n s k r i t t e x t s i n B e n g a l i
script.
The c h a r a c t e r
The c h a r a c t e r
r e a l i s e d as
(ri).
e , i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d as ( e ) , hut
varies
i n c e r t a i n c o n t e x t s w h i c h a r e d e s c r i b e d b e l o w , under Vowel S i g n s .
The c h a r a c t e r
the c h a r a c t e r
\^
tip
, y , i s r e a l i s e d a s t h e d i p h t h o n g ( o i ) ,
, v , i s r e a l i s e d a s t h e d i p h t h o n g
and
(ou).
Reading examples2
1 , Vowel c h a r a c t e r s
W|
only
^
i?
^rr&
V 3 v 5 ^ f
^"*T
characters
^ 1 > * T
ii.
\3
^mi
^TpF
^SH
v ? T 5
N ^ < 1
Pinal characters r e a l i s e d w i t h
VSv5
\s?i
(o):
V3^T
v^-q
\3^f
1 . See b e l o w , under i i . Vowel S i g n s , R e a d i n g e x a m p l e s .
2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n of e x a m p l e s , s e e p . 2 2 7 .
o
^T5
^sf
194
BENGALI
ii.
SECTION
Vowel S i g n s .
Vowel s i g n s , c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h e v o w el c h a r a c t e r s , a r e
h e l o w added t o t h e c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r
. As t h e v o w e l
given
is
i n h e r e n t v o w e l of e a c h o f t h e c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s i n t h e form
which t h e y are g i v e n i n the s y l l a h a r y ,
ponding t o the vowel c h a r a c t e r
ka
ki
kii
ku
t h e r e i s no v o w e l s i g n
in
corres-
\5f .
kuu
kr
ke
koy
S p e c i a l forms o f some o f t h e c h a r a c t e r s w i t h v o w e l
*P
gu
ru
ruii
added t o
J*u
ko
hii
, are
Vowel s i g n s w h i c h a r e p l a c e d on t h e l e f t
<^
kv
signs:
hr
The v o w el s i g n s c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h e c h a r a c t e r s ^
used in writin g S a n s k r i t ,
and ^
and <^> .
s i d e of t h e
o t h e r s i g n s a r e added a f t e r
the
The o r d e r of w r i t i n g t h e s t r o k e s
c h a r a c t e r s w i t h vowel s i g n s
is i l l u s t r a t e d in these cursive
3Tr ejpf
TV
*PnT
cWl~
gfl"
^trzfm
C*C
^rc-rcr
Of
The s i g n of s y l l a h i c
in
forms:
^nrw
C*fr
z m o s
thus:
, (go-e hroj/o
i s r e f e r r e d to as ( r i k a r )
or
the
consonant
(5T
consonant
c h a r a c t e r w i t h w h i c h t h e y a r e t o he r e a l i s e d a r e w r i t t e n h e f o r e
consonant c h a r a c t e r ;
the
ukar).
(riphola).l
1 . For e x a m p l e s o f s p e l l i n g w o r d s , s e e h e l o w , end o f C h . 3 .
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
i9S
Reading examples
\S^g
*Nfa
^rfC^t
c^rfSr f*ra
Tftvs
?jm
c^rr^ #f%^t
CF^
^tc^r
f^tft
^f*r
3 #
ftf^
YWWf%r
$?P
^fl
c^t^t
wrrf^*rr fSnF*rrfV
R e a l i s a t i o n o f okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s ,
characters in s p e c i a l
f ^ t
and c e r t a i n vowel
contexts.
In r e a d i n g B e n g a l i words from t h e s c r i p t ,
t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of
okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s i n w o r d s w h i c h have v o w e l c h a r a c t e r s or
vowel s i g n s p r e s e n t s c e r t a i n d i f f i c u l t i e s ;
and t h e r e a l i s a t i o n o f
contexts,
such as t h e o c c u r r e n c e o f c e r t a i n o t h e r v o w e l s i n f o l l o w i n g
syllables.
characters.
i . When an okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r o c c u r s a s t h e s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r
of a t h r e e c h a r a c t e r word p r e c e d i n g a f i n a l
sign,
c h a r a c t e r w i t h a vowe l
or w i t h an a - g l i d e ;
e. g.
amora(am'ra)
badale(bod'le)
jhagara(jhog'ra)
J;ukari( t u k ' r i )
m a m a l a ( m a m ' l a)
J"amane( Jam'ne)
1 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 2 7 .
2 . These n o t e s c o m p l e t e t h e d i s c u s s i o n o f t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of akar
c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s ; s e e a b o v e , n o t e s g i v e n on p p . 1 8 3 and 1 9 0 .
BENGALI
When t h e f i n a l
SECTION
c h a r a c t e r o f s u c h words i s o k a r , t h e m e d i a l
The
f o l l o w i n g e x a m p l e s i l l u s t r a t e t h i s r e a l i s a t i o n a f t e r an i n i t i a l
character w i t h a vowel
sign:
vSl^S
bhare.t ( b h a r o t )
f^\s*T
QFtFf
pitele(pitol)
kebola(kebol)
i t i s r e a l i s e d with
o , w i t h z e r o - v o w e l , o r w i t h an
according t o i t s p o s i t i o n in r e l a t i o n to characters
vowel s i g n s . The f o l l o w i n g e x a m p l e s i l l u s t r a t e t h e v a r y i n g
i s a t i o n of t h e se c h a r a c t e r s i n d i f f e r e n t
kamobe/(kom'be/)
ii.
real-
contexts:
g o l e j o g e ( g o l jog)
1
J"atokara( J o t ' k o r a )
with
m a r o p i { o ( m a r 'pi-j;)
The r e a l i s a t i o n o f t h e f i n a l
okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r of v e r b -
a l b a s e s h a s b e e n d e s c r i b e d a b o v e . The f o l l o w i n g v e r b a l f o r m s a r e
1
further
i l l u s t r a t i o n s of this
realisation:
*rr?re
wfsre
parebe(par'bo)
The s u f f i x e s
J*unele( J u n ' l o )
aseteCaJ"'to)
i n t h e s e f o r m s may be w r i t t e n w i t h t h e o k a r ; e . g .
parebo(par'bo)
Junelo(Jun'lo)
asato(aj'to)
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
197
the f i n a l c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d w i t h z e r o - v o w e l b y w r i t i n g
this
koro(koro)
koro(koro)
kore(koro)
koro(koro)
maro(mar)
maro(maro)
maro(maro)
lekho(lekho)
lekho(lekho)
okar
c h a r a c t e r of one o f t h e word s w i t h ( o ) , t h i s r e a l i s a t i o n i s
i n d i c a t e d by w r i t i n g t h e o k a r , a s i n t h e s e p a i r s :
'time',
^5"pf
(kalo)
or
^f(j^ft
(kalo) , 'black';
head',
\^\e?f
(bhalo)
or
\5tG*Tf
(bhalo) ,
<3*tc7f ( k a l ) ,
\5fc*f
(bhal) , ' f o r e -
'good'.
b . The r e a l i s a t i o n o f c e r t a i n v o w e l c h a r a c t e r s and s i g n s i s
by t h e o c c u r r e n c e o f o t h e r v o w e l s i n f o l l o w i n g
i.
The c h a r a c t e r
often
affected
syllables.
n3J , o r t h e i n h e r e n t v o w e l o f an akar c o n s o n a n t
c h a r a c t e r , i s r e a l i s e d a s ( o ) when i t i s f o l l o w e d by one o f t h e
c h a r a c t e r s , or c o r r e s p o n d i n g s i g n s ,
e.g.
\5ff3
ati(oti)
*pf|-
for
, ii
, u
or uu .
^3njc?I
dhonii( dhoni)
atula(otul)!
When t h e c h a r a c t e r "^3f r e p r e s e n t s
J"abu ja( J o b u j )
however,
^3T^7J,
iii.
adhiira(odhir) ,
The c h a r a c t e r
S\
^3f\JpT
, atula(otul) .
2
, or t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g s i g n , i n i n i t i a l
p o s i t i o n i s of t e n r e a l i s e d a s (ae) u n l e s s
1 . A proper name.
2.
i t i s f o l l o w e d by a
'incomparable'.
198
BENGALI
character with the vowels
SECTION
, ii
, u
or
uu ; e . g .
h e l a ( h s 3 l a )
nekFa(neek'pa)
emn(eemon)
emeni(em'ni)
ek(eek)
ekta(sek \a)
ek-|;ii( e k ' f i )
ek-J;u( e k -j;u)
The v e r h a l
t h e form d e s c r i b e d g r a m m a t i c a l l y a s ' s i m p l e p r e s e n t ,
third person'
it
i s r e a l i s e d as
Reading e x a m p l e s , i l l u s t r a t i n g
1.
(dekhe).
i.
above.
F i n a l kar c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h
fo-q
p
#f*t
cft^t
c^r
zero-vowel
ii.
(o)
. ^ S
F i n a l kar c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d w i t h
f%\5
C^tfe
*jsrr*r
c^rT^r
YF
^^fC^
CTffi
C*ft\5
2 . M e d i a l kar c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d a s d e s c r i b e d i n n o t e
st^Ti
3.
*tt*ta
*ITf*r
c*M.
0 ? ^
Verbal f o r m s , r e a l i s e d a s d e s c r i b e d i n n o t e a. i i .
Wv5
(7W
*IT^
*Th
WCSt
^BftfST
vgrt^
^ft^rC^Tt
vsffq
f^3fv5
%v5^
?t
^ft
^*j?r
b.i.
ift
^j^s
For t r a n s c r i p t i o n o f e x a m p l e s , s e e
p.227.
fl5F3CTt
Tg*R
U. kar c h a r a c t e r s r e a l i s e d a s d e s c r i b e d i n n o t e
1.
a.i.
TpTj^r
^f^R
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
R e a l i s a t i o n of the m o d i f i e d c h a r a c t e r
The c h a r a c t e r
, r e f e r r e d t o as
*99
, 'ontostho
yo'.
' o n t o s t h y ( o n t o s t h o o)
a m o d i f i e d form of t h e ntsth c h a r a c t e r
1J
, y .
This
is
modified
c h a r a c t e r has b e e n i n t r o d u c e d i n t o t h e B e n g a l i s c r i p t as a g r a p h i c
d e v i c e f o r r e p r e s e n t i n g s o u n d s w h i c h c a n n o t h e r e p r e s e n t e d hy t h e
ntssth c h a r a c t e r s
and
, since
i n modern B e n g a l i ntsth y
i s r e a l i s e d hy t h e same sound a s v o r g i i y
i s e d hy the same sound a s v o r g i i y
h.
j and ntsth v i s
The c o n t e x t s i n w h i c h t h i s c h a r a c t e r o c c u r s , and t h e
of i t i n r e a d i n g , are i l l u s t r a t e d i n t h e f o l l o w i n g
a. As the c h a r a c t e r
real-
realisation
notes,
of r e p r e s e n t i n g t h e B e n g a l i e q u i v a l e n t of t h e s e m i - v o w e l
occurs i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s b e c o m e s n e c e s s a r y .
loanwords
which are w r i t t e n i n t h e D e v a n a g a r i
Sanskrit
which
ZJ"_,
character
i l l u s t r a t e d i n t h e examples
given
below-^:
i,
r e a l i s e d a s an i n t e r s y l l a b i c
^tf^RS
mayiko(mayik)
deya(doya)
vocalic glide,
*rh|3r
in
TftSPP
mayur(mayur)
maya(maya)
as
niym(niyom)
dayk( dayok)
ayojn(ayojon)
200
BENGALI
ii.
][J
as
realised finally
as a v o c a l i c
g l i d e o f an e - l i k e
quality,
in
jy(;joy)
smy( Jbmoy)
visy(biJoy)
tf^r
^tn
35171
pricy(poricoy)
daye(day)
kays(kay)
<9
or r e a l i s e d a s an i n t e r v o c a l i c
vowel r e a l i s e d as ( o ) ,
om
deyo(deyo)
as
atn
rays(ray)
g l i d e f o l l o w e d by t h e
inherent
in
(Tin
c^tti
neyo(neyo)
q jeyo-(o j e y o )
b.
SECTION
(%n
peyo(peyo)
komoniiyo(komoniyo)
dheyo(dheyo)
vorgiiyo(borgiyo)
ontostho yo i s w r i t t e n t o r e p r e s e n t the B e n g a li e q u i v a l e n t
certain diphthongs
Bengali e q u i v a l e n t
such
i.
of
i n l o a n w o r d s from o t h e r modern l a n g u a g e s ,
characters
to represent
combined w i t h
and
the
y2
in
loanwords:-
The r e a l i s a t i o n
ey , i s
(oi).
i n modern B e n g a l i o f t h e v o w e l c h a r a c t e r
Loanwords from o t h e r l a n g u a g e s
nagari e q u i v a l e n t
of t h i s diphthong o c c u r s ,
character representing
i n which the
or i n w h i c h
,
Deva-
the
in these languages i s r e a l i s e d
with
with
ntssth y, a s i l l u s t r a t e d i n t h e e x a m p l e s g i v e n b e l o w .
1.
2.
3.
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
3>J , o k a r , r e a l i s e d m e d i a l l y
e-like quality,
as
20I
as a front v o c a l i c
g l i d e w i t h an
in
\SrtsrsiT
<
jayga(jayga)
kayada(kayda)
payesa(payj)
, ekar, r e a l i s e d m e d i a l l y
g l i d e , as
ayesa(aye/)
o n t o s t h o y i s w r i t t e n a l s o
i n some E n g l i s h l o a n w o r d s a s a
means of r e p r e s e n t i n g t h e E e n g a l i
i n such words a s
iii.
'chair' ,
When t h e c h a r a c t e r
consonant c h a r a c t e r
zero.
CS^Jl^
T[
pronunciation
of t h e
diphthongs
, y , i s combined w i t h an
in a conjunct
character^,
it
initial
is realised
as
Some l o a n w o r d s u s e d i n m o d e r n B e n g a l i a r e w r i t t e n i n H i n d i ,
i n the Devanagari s c r i p t ,
Class 3 i . j that i s ,
w i t h an i n i t i a l
with i n i t i a l
combined w i t h
Such w o r d s , as l o a n w o r d s
conjunct characters
in Bengali,
are w r i t t e n in Bengali
a vowel c h a r a c t e r i n a m e d i a l
or f i n a l
position.
in
and b e l o w ,
writing
This use
of
forms.
Ch.3,3.Class
y .
script
p e y a l a ( p e y a l a ) , C^jSJt^f p e y a r s ( p e y a r ) .
ntssth y i s w r i t t e n i n some w o r d s i n o r d e r t o a v o i d
1. See S a n s k r i t ,
of
e k ar c h a r a c t e r f o l l o w e d by ntssth y, as
vocalic
in
kayedo(koyed)
ii.
a s an i n t e r s y l l a b i c
3.i.
BENGALI
i.
SECTION
JJ i n w o r d s , r e a l i s e d a s an i n t e r s y l l a b i c v o c a l i c
glide
f o l l o w e d by t h e i n h e r e n t vowel o r t h e vowel r e p r e s e n t e d by t h e
vowel s i g n , as
in
OTOI
meye(meye)
koyeko(koyek)
Jiyoro( Jiyor)
ii.
photuya(photuya)
J*iya(jiya)
poyalo(poyal)
is written medially
w i t h a v o w e l s i g n r e p r e s e n t i n g t h e vowel o f a p a r t i c l e ,
when
"5J
, akar or e k a r ,
v o c a l i c g l i d e a f t e r t h e vowel
is
realised
and a f t e r
the i n h e r e n t v o w e l , which i n t h i s c o n t e x t i s r e a l i s e d as
a s i n t h e s e forms w h i c h a r e d e s c r i b e d g r a m m a t i c a l l y a s
participles',
o c c u r r i n g in the l i t e r a r y language
boliya(boliya)
dekhiya( dekhiya)
J"uiya( J u i y a )
'
(o);
'past
giya(giya)
giye(giye)
diye(diye)
hoye(hoye)
Verbal forms i n w h i c h f i n a l
g l i d e w i t h an e - l i k e
royo(roy)
"^1
peye(peye)
r e a l i s e d as a v o c a l i c
q u a l i t y , a s i n t h e s e forms w h i c h a r e d e s -
c r i b e d grammatically as
nsyo(noy)
Juye(juye)
'present tense ,
payo(pay)
third person'
janaye(janay)
beroye(beroy)
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
203
Noun forms i n w h i c h t h e
'genitive
added t o nouns e n d i n g i n a v o w e l ,
which t h e ' l o c a t i v e '
after a final
suffix
*rtan*
f%oj?r
mayero(mayer)
jhiyer(jhiyer)
in
i s w r i t t e n as o n t o s t h o yo
^fcsra
amayo(amay)
<| , vo
i%<m
g&kui
tomay(tomay)
, i s r e a l i s e d a s (bo)
i n modern
t h a t i s , i n t h e same way a s t h e v o r g i i y c h a r a c t e r
b , a g r a p h i c method o f r e p r e s e n t i n g word s t r u c t u r e
the semivowel
vo
i n loanwords becomes n e c e s s a r y .
This
as a back v o c a l i c g l i d e ,
haoya(haova)
poya(poova)
\3
is
, o ,
used
realised
t r a n s c r i b e d here p h o n e t i c a l l y as
d.akoyala( c|akovala)
(-v)
deoyali (deovali)
This method of r e p r e s e n t i n g a b a c k v o c a l i c g l i d e i s u s e d a l s o
v e r b a l forms i n w h i c h a s u f f i x
b e g i n n i n g with (a)
base c o n s i s t i n g of one c h a r a c t e r ,
hooya(hoova)
yaoyan(jaovano)
as
semivowel
f o l l o w e d by ntssth y. T h i s c o m b i n a t i o n o f c h a r a c t e r s i s
i n which
<|
involving
i s r e p r e s e n t e d i n B e n g a l i by w r i t i n g t h e v o w e l c h a r a c t e r
in the f o l l o w i n g examples of l o a n w o r d s ,
duiyer(duiyer)
wr^srm
thanayo(thanay)
As t h e o n t o s t h o c h a r a c t e r
Bengali,
is
buyer(bouyer)
srr^mr
payo(pay)
vi}<J , e r e ( e r )
v} , e ( e )
suffix
vowel; o n t o s t h o yo r e a l i s e d as a v o c a l i c g l i d e
^ru
d.
(deey)
in
i s added t o a
in
paoya(paova)
204
BENGALI
3.
SECTION
Modifiers.
Three m o d i f i e r s a r e u s e d i n w r i t i n g B e n g a l i .
These a r e marks
added t o c h a r a c t e r s t o r e p r e s e n t some m o d i f i c a t i o n o f t h e
it represents.
The f i r s t
two m o d i f i e r s r e p r e s e n t n a s a l i s a t i o n , and t h e
of the Devanagari
i.
a.
cendro-bindu
syllable
script .
1
v5pJ^f?T onus v a r a ,
VI/
When t h e mark
i s w r i t t e n above a c h a r a c t e r , t h e v o w e l of
s y l l a b l e whic h t h e c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t s i s r e a l i s e d w i t h
the
nasalisation.
T h i s mark c o r r e s p o n d s i n f o r m , t h o u g h n o t i n t h e way i n w h i c h i t
is
r e a l i s e d , w i t h t h e mark c a l l e d e n u n a s i k e i n S a n s k r i t ,
c e n d r e - b i n d u added t o v o w e l
vsrr
e
^
I
characters:
T5
uu
Ii
i?
a
e
ey
c e n d r e - b i n d u added t o t h e c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r
ke
ka
ki
w t
kii
kii
^3
6
ev
w i t h vowel s i g n s :
^ o ^ ^ o ^ r c ^ T
ke
KUU
key
ko
kev
spelling
ikar).
Readin g examples-^
I* "Ss
ft
^5
5tE
^sfw
editor
dr
ft
C^F
T5t v5
f$*r
1 . See S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 3 . i . and i i .
3 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e page 2 2 8 .
realised with zero-vowel.
r
C7lt&
-^tffen
% ctr
f Tpf
f*
C?C*f
fr^rfe
2. (condro-bindu).
F i n a l ekar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
b.
205
nusvar!
The term a n u s v a r a i s u s e d i n B e n g a l i
r e a l i s e d as ( n ) .
I t may o c c u r f i n a l l y ,
t o r e f e r t o t h e mark ,
or m e d i a l l y , w r i t t e n a s an
a l t e r n a t i v e t o t h e h o s o n t o form o f
the character
examples i l l u s t r a t e
the
ehorrj(ebon)
the w r i t i n g of
sim(jin)
\ , no .
These
onusvar:
arrjti( an-J;i)
irrjraj( i n r a j )
sarrj(jan)
rorrj(ron) or
ran(ron)
barrjla(banla )
banla(banla)
i n Devanagari as
r e a l i s a t i o n of t h e nusvar i n B e n g a l i ,
t h e v a r i o u s ways of r e a l i s i n g
or
as -n
Tflq
i n words w h i c h
, sm .
The
, may he compared w i t h
t h e nusvar of t h e D e v a n a g a r i s c r i p t
in
the same S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s i n o t h e r p a r t s o f
Examples:
India.
^f^C^jT^t
srrjyog( Jon j o g )
"ST^T^f
smrag( Jonrag)
^f^^tf
smyad( Jonhad)
v5f5"Sf
rr) J( on Jo)
Sfo'Sff^
smsar( Jon J a r )
f% ^
sirrjh( J i n h o )
Reading examples^
'Tv
fes
"SR^KS
its
^rtr
*TT$33
*f$H*r
T^^T-
*rs^rr
fefo
^ ^ 3 ^
1. ( o n u j j o r ) . In t h e t r a n s c r i p t i o n o f e x a m p l e s , i n roman n o t a t i o n , t h e
nusvar i s t r a n s c r i b e d a s rr) i n o r d e r t o d i s t i n g u i s h i t from t h e
character
^ , transcribed as
n .
2 . Cf. S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 3 . i . c .
3. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n of e x a m p l e s , s e e p . 2 2 8 .
2o6
ii.
BENGALI
"f^^^T,
visarg.
SECTION
The s i g n g w r i t t e n a f t e r a c h a r a c t e r r e p r e s e n t s a s p i r a t i o n
i n g t h e v o w e l of t h e s y l l a b l e w i t h w h i c h t h e c h a r a c t e r
is
follow-
realised.
I t o c c u r s m a i n l y i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , and i s w r i t t e n i n a few
Bengali exclamations
with a f i n a l
syllable.
t o e x p r e s s e m p h a s i s . When t h e v i s a r g e i s
character,
When i t
it
i s r e a l i s e d as a s p i r a t i o n a f t e r
occurs medially,
the f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r ,
it
a s i n TJg^T ,
written
the
final
i s r e a l i s e d a s t h e d o u b l i n g of .
duhkhe(dukkho).
Examples:
bah(bah)
uh(uh)
Reading e x a m p l e s
punah(punoh)
^TS
^wp?
f^rg^ran ^f%gc*m
*f\5ffs
U. The Complete
fto^T
^C5\5tg
wfrm
g i v e n on t h e f o l l o w i n g p a g e .
e
^STWRT
ijg^Ti
?rrgw?
t^g^m^f
ijg^
Syllabary.
The c o m p l e t e s y l l a b a r y ,
a r
atahpara( otoppor)
*f*T8
and ffc
arranged i n the t r a d i t i o n a l
order,
The S a n s k r i t v o w e l c h a r a c t e r s
i n c l u d e d in the s y l l a b a r y .
, "^Jj
This t a b l e , w i t h the
and b o t h p r e c e d e
the
consonant
character.
See a b o v e , u n d er
shows
characters
w i t h o u t t h e a n u s v a r or c a n d r a - b i n d u b u t f o l l o w e d by a n o t h e r
1 . ( b i j o r g o ) . Cf. S a n s k r i t , C h . 2 , 3 . i i .
2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 2 8 .
3.
order
characters
same c h a r a c t e r s w i t h t h e c a n d r a - b i n d u ,
is
2.ii.
CHARACTERS OF T H E SYLLABARY
^1
5f
5. Numerals
The B e n g a l i numeral s a r e w r i t t e n
6.
thus:
"i
tt
Kb
<l
lr
fc>
io
10
Punctuation
In B e n g a l i p r o s e w r i t i n g t h e e nd o f a s e n t e n c e i s marked hy an
u p r i g h t s t r o k e of t h e same h e i g h t a s t h e u p r i g h t s t r o k e o f a c h a r a c t e r . This mark i s r e f e r r e d t o a s "Cfff^j , d a r i .
marks are u s e d as i n E n g l i s h .
Other p u n c t u a t i o n
prose p a s s a g e a t t h e end o f t h i s s e c t i o n .
1
The s y s t e m o f
punctuation
used i n B e n g a l i v e r s e i s t h e same a s t h a t u s e d i n S a n s k r i t , h u t i n
2
much modern v e r s e t h e p r o s e s y s t e m i s
1 . See end of C h . 3 .
2 . See S a n s k r i t ,
used.
Ch.2,3.ii.
Reading e x a m p l e s .
C H A P T E R
CONJUNCT
CHARACTERS
C h a r a c t e r s formed i n t h i s way a r e r e f e r r e d t o
^SrPF.^
in
yuktak^orol.
C o n s t r u c t i o n of Conjunct
Characters.
B e n g a l i c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s a r e c o n s t r u c t e d t o some e x t e n t
by
t h e same m e t h o d s a s t h e D e v a n a g a r i c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s , d e s c r i b e d
2
in
combined.
The c h a r a c t e r w h i c h i s r e a l i s e d a s t h e s e c o n d c o n s o n a n t may b e
subscribed to the f i r s t
ii.
character;
e.g.
kko
nta
pte
hmo
The c h a r a c t e r s t o b e j o i n e d may b e w r i t t e n
without the usual i n t e r v e n i n g space;
m
ngha
iii.
If the f i r s t
echo
e.g.
*m
dgo
dhvo
c h a r a c t e r h a s a s t r o k e w h i c h c a n be u s e d a s p a r t
the second c h a r a c t e r ,
t h e c h a r a c t e r s may be j o i n e d a s i n
examples:
*5f
ddo
1.
(juktakkhor).
consecutively,
2.
bde
See S a n s k r i t ,
ndo
Ch.3. 1 .
bjo
these
of
C O N J U N C T CHARACTERS
i v . The form of e i t h e r t h e f i r s t
o r t h e s e c o n d c h a r a c t e r may "be m o d i -
f i e d i n o r d e r t o make p o s s i b l e
as one c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r .
t h e w r i t i n g of t h e two c h a r a c t e r s
the form of t h e c h a r a c t e r s t o be j o i n e d ;
tto
ttho
v. The c h a r a c t e r s
\5
>
kto
T\
209
Jlt^
, and
e.g.
^t*
18
, h a v e s p e c i a l forms w h i c h are
u s e d when t h e y a r e c o m b i n ed w i t h o t h e r c h a r a c t e r s ;
3*
tko
\^
tyo
rko
^
1
tpo
to
kya
e.g.
^
kro
v i . I f any c h a r a c t e r s c a n n o t b e c o m b i n e d by any o f t h e s e m e t h o d s ,
t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of them w i t h o u t an i n t e r v e n i n g vowel i s
ed by w r i t i n g t h e f i r s t
indicat-
c h a r a c t e r w i t h the hosonto.
are r e f e r r e d t o as the
and t h e p a r t i c l e
<Hj5TT
, yo-phola( jophola) ,
The m o d i f i e d forms of t h e c h a r a c t e r s
Tf
*|ir
syllable
, phola
vo-phola(bophola).
<S|
55|
, used i n
forming c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s , a r e a l s o r e f e r r e d t o i n t h i s w a y . ^
2 . C o n t e x t s and R e a l i s a t i o n o f C o n j u n c t
Characters.
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s i n B e n g a l i o c c u r i n t h e f o l l o w i n g
i.
In B e n g a l i w o r d s , t h a t i s , w o r d s n o t b o r r o w e d from S a n s k r i t or
from modern l a n g u a g e s ;
ba<^o(boa$o)
1.
contexts:
e.g.
potton(potton)
See a b o v e , C h . 2 , l . i . khan^o t o .
f e r r i n g to conjunct c h a r a c t e r s ,
mui^a(mur]DJ3)
210
ii.
BENGALI
SECTION
I n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s , e i t h e r words u s e d commonly i n B e n g a l i ,
words u s e d i n t h e l i t e r a r y l a n g u a g e o n l y ;
e.g.
3T>
n^r
pontha(pontha)
or
J*ebde( Jobdo)
ra^-J;re(ras"l;ro)
I n t h e c l a s s e s o f c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n b e l o w , under 3 . ,
conjunct c h a r a c t e r s are i n c l u d ed which are used o n l y i n w r i t i n g
Sanskrit.
Some o f t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s do n o t o c c u r i n B e n g a l i
t h o u g h words i n c l u d i n g them a r e f o u n d i n B e n g a l i
i i i . I n l o a n w o r d s from o t h e r l a n g u a g e s ;
khaji j a r a ( k h o n j o r )
texts,
dictionaries,
e.g.
ma^-(;ara(ma^-j;ar)
carbbi( corbbi)
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s a r e r e a l i s e d a s s y l l a b l e s c o n s i s t i n g of two
or more c o n s o n a n t s f o l l o w e d by a v o w e l .
The r e a l i s a t i o n of ekar c o n -
the
rules
a l r e a d y g i v e n f o r t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of e k a r c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s .
d e s c r i b i n g the r e a l i s a t i o n of i n d i v i d u a l c h a r a c t e r s ,
the
In
inherent
vowel i s p h o n e t i c a l l y t r a n s c r i b e d as ( o ) , as i n t h e t r a n s c r i p t i o n
the c h a r a c t e r s of the
syllabary.
of
or w i t h an e - g l i d e ,
g i v e s r i s e t o a problem of s p e l l i n g .
characters
in certain positions
i n words
T h i s r e a l i s a t i o n of s u c h
charact-
a d d e d , h a s b e e n i l l u s t r a t e d above^-. The r e a l i s a t i o n of
consonant c h a r a c t e r s w i t h zero-vowel
i n such c o n t e x t s
often
ekar
results
i n t h e s p e a k i n g o f two c o n s e c u t i v e c o n s o n a n t s i n a way s i m i l a r t o
r e a l i s a t i o n of a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r .
1 . See a b o v e ,
Ch.2.2.ii.
Examples of B e n g a l i words
in
the
C O N J U N C T CHARACTERS
211
which t h e r e a l i s a t i o n of s e p a r a t e c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s i s s i m i l a r
t h a t of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s a r e g i v e n b e l o w w i t h t h e v a r i o u s
3.
to
classes".
C l a s s e s of C o n j u n c t C h a r a c t e r s i n B e n g a l i .
The B e n g a l i c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s
in
the same f o u r c l a s s e s a s t h e D e v a n a g a r i c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n i n t h e
Sanskrit s e c t i o n . A l l the c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n in the Sanskrit
have e q u i v a l e n t s i n t h e B e n g a l i s c r i p t ,
section
and a l l t h e e x a m p l e s g i v e n
t h a t s e c t i o n can be w r i t t e n i n B e n g a l i s c r i p t .
in
The r e a d i n g e x a m p l es
g i v e n w i t h each c l a s s of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s i n c l u d e some l e a r n e d
loanwords which may be f o u n d i n l i t e r a r y
C l a s s 1 . Two s i m i l a r c h a r a c t e r s
joined.
texts.
1
These c h a r a c t e r s r e p r e s e n t s y l l a b l e s
c o n s i s t i n g of a
'doubled'
consonant f o l l o w e d b y a v o w e l .
-kko
-kkha
-ggs
-ggho
-cca
-echo
-JDS
-3
-q.dha
-tto
-ttho
-ddo
-ddha
jho
ft
t
-tt*
-ttha
-ppo
-ppho
-yyo
-bba
The c h a r a c t e r
-nna
-bbho
-lis
?j
-J Jo
i s r e a l i s e d as (nno).
r e a l i s e d as ( j j o ) , or when i t
-ssa
The c h a r a c t e r TJ3
is
i s a k a r , a s ( j j e e ) . The c h a r a c t e r >|>J
which o c c u r s o n l y i n l o a n w o r d s ,
1 . Compare S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 . 3 .
i s r e a l i s e d as
Class
1.
(sso).
212
BENGALI
When a s u f f i x w i t h an i n i t i a l
SECTION
c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i s added t o a
okar c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r ,
the r e a l i s a t i o n
t h e c o n s e c u t i v e c h a r a c t e r s i n t h e v e r b a l form i s s i m i l a r t o t h e
i s a t i o n of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s .
<P"^"v3
, korota(kotto) ,
Reading e x a m p l e s
fT^TT'^|
of
real-
Examples:
, parolama(pallam).
i f ^ t r i ? ^9fv5
Sttr \STsfhf *w?P3
^rasr
^rnr
ceK
C l a s s 2 . Two vorgiiy^o c h a r a c t e r s
f ^rfB^r
joined.^
The
of t h i s c l a s s , g i v e n in the S a n s k r i t
series
section,
The c h a r a c t e r s
o c c u r r i n g i n a S a n s k r i t t e x t p r i n t e d i n B e n g a l i s c r i p t c a n be
ed w i t h a k n o w l e d g e o f S a n s k r i t ; b u t i t
work t o i n c l u d e a l l
class.
i s beyond th e s c o p e of
t h e p o s s i b l e combinations of c h a r a c t e r s
in
recognis
this
this
The c h a r a c t e r s g i v e n b e l o w may o c c u r i n a B e n g a l i l i t e r a r y
i.
sir
-kto
-tko
-tkho
-gdo
-tpa
-tpho
-pto
ii.
text
W
-dgha
-dg
-gdho
"5
If
-dbo
-bda
-dbhe
-bdh
C O N J U N C T CHARACTERS
^1
ii.a.
-nke
-rjkh
-rjgh
nj
%
-nt
-iit 9
*f
2?
-J1C9
-jichg
-P-j
-nt9
-nth9
-nd9
3?
-jijh
*T
-ri^h
hs
213
-ndh9
S p e c i a l ukar form
-mph
-mp
-mbs
-mbh
ntu
The n a s a l c o n s o n a n t o f t h e k-vrg, i n t h e f i r s t
group a b o v e ,
may be r e p r e s e n t e d a l t e r n a t i v e l y b y t h e o n u s v a r .
The c h a r a c t e r
<p
(n-).
The c h a r a c t e r
<f
, j o i n e d w i t h a c h a r a c t e r of the
[o-vergo, i s r e a l i s e d as (n_-).
-cjio
jjio
The c h a r a c t e r
-tn
-dne
o c c u r s o n l y i n t h e S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d "SjnEfef
yacjia, r e a l i s e d a s ( j a c n a )
The c h a r a c t e r ^
or a s
(jacinga).
i s r e a l i s e d i n i t i a l l y a s ( g o ) ; and m e d i a l l y
as ( g o ) , w i t h n a s a l i s a t i o n o f t h e f o l l o w i n g v o w e l , a s i n
T^jpy
jjiano(gsen) , and ^ j
\o&f
, ajna(aggse).
This
character
i s n o t c a l l i g r a p h i c a l l y a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r , and i t i s
included i n the oksoromala a f t e r
in.
?f
*U
-kma
-gno
-gmo
The c h a r a c t e r
^
-ghn
T\f
as in
characters^.
If
-tmo
-dm
-pn
, tm, i s r e a l i s e d a s ( t t o ) ,
i s a t i o n of t h e f o l l o w i n g v o w e l ,
The c h a r a c t e r
the consonant
often
often with
nasal-
"^TTlfl" , a t m a ( a t t a ) .
, dm, i s r e a l i s e d a s ( d d o ) , w i t h
nasalisation
1. See a b o v e , C h . 2 , 3 . i . b .
2. Words b e g i n n i n g w i t h t h i s c h a r a c t e r
are p l a c e d i n d i c t i o n a r i e s a f t e r w o r d s b e g i n n i n g w i t h O^f .
214
BENGALI
of t h e f o l l o w i n g v o w e l ,
"*i>V|
l v
, pedmo(podd6,
<SJ
-nmo
The f o l l o w i n g
SECTION
e x c e p t i n words i n common u s e , s u c h a s
poddo).
**T
-nmo
-nmo
c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s , when t h e f i r s t
realisation
of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s
V e r b a l forms
^Pr^T
the r e a l i s a t i o n
i s ekar,
of t h i s
*|'MWf^b
consecutive
class:
^SFTOT*?
kapete(kap' to)
of
i n a way s i m i l a r t o t h e
^ftvS
kadebe(kad bo)
Other words
-mno
examples i l l u s t r a t e
Junetame( J"un'tam)
^TFS^rT
^Tv5^Tf^
panemeric e ( p a n m o r i c ) p a t e k u y a ( p a t k u y a ) h a t e c h a n i ( h a t c h a n i )
1
Reading
examples
i- " 1 % ^T^fT^
Tg^^R
%WTv5
^^TT
ii.-^jsfTO
*rni
Characters
All
except
*rsr
and fi
T^^T
^*JTv3
TSf^cff
*rr^rr
flr^n"
class
characters,
.2
, no . These c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s
$ , referred to as yephela(jophola)
character,
, k y e ,\*>^ , t y e ,^(3
1.
For t r a n s c r i p t i o n ,
^ f e ^
*rtffe
by a d d i n g t h e s t r o k e
thus: ^
F^i
*r^t
. ne
n^i
5 * ^ 3
t h e. c h a r a c t e r s
V
^Rgv5
^vfT^
^-^f
Class 3 . Characters
i.
s e e p .2 2 8 .
, p y e , **f$
2. Cf. S a n s k r i t ,
a r e formed
t o another
, /ye .
Ch.33.Class 3 . i .
C O N J U N C T CHARACTERS
215
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s may h e f o r m e d h y c o m h i n i h g t h r e e c h a r a c t e r s ;
t ktyo,
ntyo,
, ndhyo,
e.g.
, tmyo.
certain
vowels.
yophola.
When an i n i t i a l c h a r a c t e r i s w r i t t e n w i t h y o p h o l a i t i s r e a l i s e d a s
as z e r o - y o p h o l a and t h e v o w e l o f t h e s y l l a b l e ,
nyuuno(nun)
dhyey(dheyo)
When a m e d i a l or a f i n a l
character
e.g.
jyotiso(jotij)
i s written with yophola,
c h a r a c t e r i s r e a l i s e d a s t h e d o u b l i n g of t h e c o n s o n a n t
the
represented
by the c h a r a c t e r w i t h w h i c h y o p h o l a i s written.1; e . g .
vakkyo(bakko)
rajyo(rajjo)
puny-o(punno)
b . R e a l i s a t i o n of v o w e l s a f f e c t e d b y y o p h o l a .
An okar c h a r a c t e r p r e c e d i n g a c h a r a c t e r w i t h y o p h o l a i s
with the inherent vowel as ( o ) ,
^TO
realised
e.g.
M\53
vsr^ra
onye(onno)
sobhyo(Jobbho)
kolyo(kollo)
I f an i n i t i a l
talvy(talobbo)
real-
i s e d a s (ee) , u n l e s s t h e kar c h a r a c t e r i s f o l l o w e d by an i k a r or
an i i k a r c h a r a c t e r , when i t
vyotha(b8etha)
i s r e a l i s e d as ( e ) 3 ;
vythii(bethi)
v y s j i jn(bien jon)
e.g.
vytiit(betito)
216
BENGALI
SECTION
I f a c h a r a c t e r w i t h y o p h o l a i s a k a r , t h e vowel i s r e a l i s e d a s (ee) ,
nyayoCnsey)- 1
dhyane( dhsen)
vyakhyane(bffikkheen)
kenya(konnee)
In t h e word^C^T^T > u d y o g o , a S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d i n w h i c h t h e
c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r a r i s e s from t h e j o i n i n g o f t h e p r e f i x
, ut- ,
w i t h t h e word C^ft^T > y o g a
t h e word b e i n g r e a l i s e d a s ( u d j o g ) .
2
T h i s r e a l i s a t i o n may b e c o n -
t r a s t e d w i t h t h e r e a l i s a t i o n o f t h e c h a r a c t e r w i t h y o p h o l a i n f<Pf5T,
v i d y a ( b i d d e e ) . N o t e a l s o "Sf?^ , s o h y o ( Jo j jho) .
R e a d i n g examples-^
<TT^
yc&n
ii.
^Tv5
C^rfnS\5t
fs^T
gSv5
^raft
Characters with f o l l o w i n g
C5otf3
^rero
qsrr
CS^Jt
oth
"?f .h
This c l a s s of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s c o n s i s t s of c h a r a c t e r s
combined
w i t h o n t o s t h o v o , c o r r e s p o n d i n g w i t h t h e Devanagari c h a r a c t e r s
with the ontostho character
o n l y i n S a n s k r i t l o a n w o r d s . When
, vo . These c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s
<^ , o r i t s m o d i f i e d f o r m ,
as t h e s e c o n d p a r t o f a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r ,
vophola(bophola).
form,
dhvo,
1.
joined
occur
occurs
i t i s r e f e r r e d to as
I t i s w r i t t e n w i t h some c h a r a c t e r s i n t h e f u l l
j o i n e d t o t h e p r e c e d i n g c h a r a c t e r by t h e m a t r a , a s i n iffi
, hvo ; or i n t h e m o d i f i e d f o r m , added t o t h e f o o t of a
C O N J U N C T CHARACTERS
character, as i n
character
<f
, kv ,
, tv ,
217
, jv . The form of
, rvo , i s d i s c u s s e d , l a t e r , under
the
iii.a.
, ttvo
, ddhv ,
, ktvo.
In t h e c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s o f t h i s c l a s s , n t s s t h v i s
re-
garded as a s e p a r a t e c h a r a c t e r f r o m v o r g i i y b, a l t h o u g h i n t h e
s y l l a b a r y t h e two c h a r a c t e r s a r e t h e same. Words b e g i n n i n g w i t h an
i n i t i a l conjunct character of t h i s c l a s s are p l a c e d in
dictionaries
a f t e r words b e g i n n i n g w i t h c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s formed by c o m b i n i n g a
consonant c h a r a c t e r w i t h a f o l l o w i n g
When v o p h s l a i s w r i t t e n w i t h an i n i t i a l
character,
it is
real-
i s e d as zero.; e . g .
^t^t
svamii(jami)
w
jval(jal)
w r
tvkt(tokto)
dvadJ( d a d o j )
When vphla i s w r i t t e n w i t h a m e d i a l or a f i n a l
i s r e a l i s e d as the f i r s t p a r t of
it
z e r o - r e a l i s a t i o n of vphla, a s i n t h e f o l l o w i n g
nvh(onnoho)
character,
iiJvr(iJJor)
examples:
viJv(biJJo)
konv(konno)
The c h a r a c t e r "5^" , hv , i s r e a l i s e d a s a v - g l i d e f o l l o w e d by a
b i l a b i a l a s p i r a t e , as i n pj^qcTf
, bihvl(bivvhol).
In S a n s k r i t w o r d s , u s e d a s l e a r n e d l o a n w o r d s i n l i t e r a r y
Bengali,
In t h e c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r which
r e s u l t s , and i n t h e c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s w h i c h a r i s e from t h e
joining
2*8
BENGALI
SECTION
udvigno(udbigno)
The words
sodvyevohare(/odbebohar)
t^^ff*^
rgvedo(rigbed)
, udvano(uddan) , and f ^ ^ l , v i d v a n o ( b i d d a n )
are e x c e p t i o n s t o t h i s g e n e r a l
rule.
The r e a l i s a t i o n , o f v e p h o l a , i l l u s t r a t e d by t h e above e x a m p l e s ,
r e s u l t s i n a s i m i l a r i t y o f r e a l i s a t i o n o f two o r more words w h i c h a r e
t h e same i n t h e s p o k e n l a n g u a g e and d i s t i n g u i s h e d o n l y i n w r i t i n g ;
e.g.
, d h a n i i , and $fl<jp| , d h v a n i , r e a l i s e d a s ( d h o n i ) ,^
f*r3^T?T
*fJ
J i k a r o , and ^Wj.^ , s v i i k a r e , r e a l i s e d a s ( j i k a r ) ,
'^n<r
, J"oro,
, svoro , r e a l i s e d as ( / o r ) 5
, s o r a , and
Reading examples^-
iii.
a.
or w i t h f o l l o w i n g
character.5
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s o f t h i s c l a s s a r e formed b y w r i t i n g a s t r o k e
r e f e r r e d t o a s (,<j^p , r e p h s ( r e p h ) , above t h e c h a r a c t e r b e f o r e w h i c h
<J
i s t o be r e a l i s e d .
T h i s s t r o k e i s p l a c e d a t t h e r i g h t hand s i d e o f a n y o t h e r s u p e r -
s c r i b e d s t r o k e , and i s t h e l a s t s t r o k e o f t h e c h a r a c t e r t o b e w r i t t e n .
e,g
-rko
-rco
-v\o
The c h a r a c t e r s
\s
-rto
>F>\Sl 3,
T
Y
-rpa
,
a4
-rkii
F,^f,
-rke
T,^I
cf
-rkov
and ^
C O N J U N C T CHARACTERS
219
are o f t e n w r i t t e n i n t h e i r d o u b l e d f o r m w i t h r e p h l ;
, rtto,
, rggo,
*zf
, rmmo,
In some w o r d s , i n c l u d i n g v e r b a l f o r m s ,
consonant c h a r a c t e r s w i t h z e r o - v o w e l
r e a l i s a t i o n of
j^" before
rvvo
the r e a l i s a t i o n
in certain positions
of
okar
leads to
a n o t h e r c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r i n a way
t o the r e a l i s a t i o n of r e p h e ,
as i n t h e s e
the
similar
examples:-
e.g.
^sf^<f
^f^^t^f
, derobaro( dor'bar) ,
, mar 2v( m o l l o)
, s e r o k a r o ( Joir'kar)
Reading examples*r
*j*f
\54
?fl^v5
b.
^T*T
^jt^
^ifi
^pft
f%M*f
following another
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s
stfrta
character.3
of t h i s
class
a r e formed by s u b s c r i b i n g
stroke r e f e r r e d to as r o p h o l a ( r o p h o l a )
the
to a consonant character.
The
Sanskrit
l o a n w o r d s , a r e i l l u s t r a t e d by t h e r e a d i n g e x a m p l e s g i v e n b e l o w .
The f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r s
illustrate
e r s w i t h r o p h o l a , w i t h some s p e c i a l
e r s formed by j o i n i n g t h r e e
kro
1.
gro
jro
the calligraphy
of
charact-
f o r m s ; and some c o n j u n c t
charact-
characters:
tro
dro
pro
bhro
Jr
hr
-3T
"5
dru
dhruu
Jru
tru
-r)gr
-ndr
-ktr
-ndhr
The r u l e s of o r t h o g r a p h y o f
B e n g a l i d i c t i o n a r y T>*jf!^ ,
discontinued.
3*. C f . S a n s k r i t , C h . 3 , 3 . C I . 3 .
C a l c u t t a U n i v e r s i t y , given in the
p . 5 9 7 , recommend t h a t t h i s p r a c t i c e
2. For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 3 0 .
iii.a.
be
BENGALI
220
SECTION
Reading e x a m p l e s !
srm
fsv5
cm
tfrsfar
t$
^ 1
iv.
a.
cv|
preceding another
5 ^
^t3
c5|
^1*3
f[
, lgs
character.
*J
a r e formed hy w r i t i n g
c*f
or w i t h f o l l o w i n g
fSs
a t m
or b e l o w ,
, lp , ^
*f
the
, thus:-
, lm . Only a few of
of\
, and t h e s e
are
b.
following another
character.
These c h a r a c t e r s a r e formed by w r i t i n g
c h a r a c t e r a f t e r which i t
^
, kl ,
character
, gl
i s t o be r e a l i s e d ,
,
, pi ,
i s not combined w i t h
<f
5 f at the f o o t
thus
the
, ml ,
$f
, Jl .
thus
i t i s r e f e r r e d to as
but
When *f
i s added t o a n o t h e r c h a r a c t e r a s t h e
p a r t of a c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r ,
The
in a conjunct c h a r a c t e r ,
t h e two c h a r a c t e r s a r e w r i t t e n c o n s e c u t i v e l y ,
or a m o d i f i e d form of i t ,
of
second
laphala(lophola).
Only a few of t h e s e c h a r a c t e r s o c c u r , m o s t l y i n S a n s k r i t
loanwords.
Those w h i c h o c c u r a r e i l l u s t r a t e d b e l o w i n t h e r e a d i n g e x a m p l e s .
The r e a l i s a t i o n
first
of c o n s e c u t i v e c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s , when t h e
i s kar and i n c e r t a i n p o s i t i o n s ,
i n a way s i m i l a r t o t h e
i s a t i o n of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s of t h i s c l a s s i s i l l u s t r a t e d i n
1 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 3 0 .
2 . Cf. S a n s k r i t , Ch. 3 , 3 . C I . 3 . i v . a .
and b .
realthese
221
C O N J U N C T CHARACTERS
words : f^T<pYf
b i l 9 k u l 9 ( b i l
'kill) , " ^ p 3 c ^
matglgbgdnot'lob).
Reading examples-*-
3Fte
c s w
s r m
Class U. v o r g i i y g c h a r a c t e r s
a.
j o i n e d w i t h p r e c e d i n g or
C h a r a c t e r s combined w i t h p r e c e d i n g
*]" ,
or
"5f
"*]" , ^
preceding another
-Jc9
"*f
-Jch9
-Jna
~?t
~?t
Words w i t h c u r s i v e
"~ l
sr
~^P
:-
:-
-sph9 - s m 9
forms:
The c h a r a c t e r
combined w i t h t h e c h a r a c t e r s
, 'no , i s r e a l i s e d
the conjunct c h a r a c t er
sko , "^^j"
n s
Jmo
except with
following
or "9\
character.
C h a r a c t e r s which o c c u r w i t h p r e c e d i n g
-^ko
as
i s r e a l i s e d as
, sp9 , and
(so).
(jno).
of t h e \9-vorg9
When combined w i t h
The c h a r a c t e r s
i n o r d i n a r y s p e e c h , b u t may b e r e a l i s e d a s ( s k o ) ,
(spho)
i n formal s p e e c h .
For t r a n s c r i p t i o n ,
(spo)
"*J , Jno , i s u s u a l l y r e a l i s e d as
see p.230.
2.
Cf.
Sanskrit,
,
f(
"Sip"
, spho a r e r e a l i s e d as (Jko) , ( j p o )
(jpho)
1.
^rr?
^sffa
characters,
u u s m 9
i.
csrr^
a m
and
and
(sno).
C h . 3 , 3 , C l a s s h. i .
222
BENGALI
SECTION
"Sf
sko
skho
st
The c h a r a c t e r
sth
sn
sp
:-
"tr
sph
combined w i t h c h a r a c t e r s
of t h e t-vrg
r e a l i s e d a s ( s ) . N o t e t h e form of t h e c h a r a c t e r
The c h a r a c t e r s
realised initially
(josru)
, Jm , and ^
as
(J5)
sm
, stu
, sm , kar
or
.
akar,
is
These two c h a r a c t e r s ,
are
, JmJ*ru
and ^
sm , a r e r e a l i s e d m e d i a l l y and f i n a l l y a s ( / J o ) , a s i n t h e words
'^'"Q' , uusm(uJ".fo)
and \3~*t\ , bhsm(bho j Jo) .
Conjunct c h a r a c t e r s
of C l a s s e s 1 . , 2 . and 3 . may o c c u r w i t h
c e d i n g uusm c h a r a c t e r s ,
^
, -stv
such a s , -t
r s
> If
The f o l l o w i n g words i l l u s t r a t e
-str
a way s i m i l a r t o t h e r e a l i s a t i o n
" rr^|v5
Reading
b.
> asstsCaT'to)
examples
Characters
1.
3.
Verbal form.
Cf. S a n s k r i t ,
is
consecutive
kar i n c e r t a i n p o s i t i o n s , ,
of c o n j u n c t c h a r a c t e r s
f>*f*Tt
, ks ,
, -stv
of t h i s
in
class:
Three c h a r a c t e r s
^
the r e a l i s a t i o n of
c o n s o n a n t c h a r a c t e r s , when t h e f i r s t
!:3:
pre-
"5J or
"SJ . 3
, - t s and
loanwords:
, -ps . I n w r i t i n g S a n s k r i t i n
2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n ,
Ch.3,3.Class k.i.b.
see
p.230.
Bengali
C O N J U N C T CHARACTERS
223
s c r i p t , however, c h a r a c t e r s c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o a l l t h e c h a r a c t e r s
given i n the Sanskrit s e c t i o n a r e u s e d .
"^J" , - k s o ,
The c h a r a c t e r
occurs i n E n g l i s h l o a n w o r d s .
Cursive forms i n words
The c h a r a c t e r
< N >
i s not c a l l i g r a p h i c a l l y
a conjunct
and i t i s o f t e n i n c l u d e d i n t h e s y l l a b a r y a f t e r
characters.
character,
t h e consonant
I t does n o t , h o w e v e r , b e l o n g p r o p e r l y t o t h e s y l l a b a r y ,
as i t r e p r e s e n t s a s y l l a b l e c o n s i s t i n g o f two c o n s o n a n t s f o l l o w e d b y
the vowel
o . W o r d s b e g i n n i n g w i t h t h i s c h a r a c t e r are p l a c e d i n
d i c t i o n a r i e s a f t e r words b e g i n n i n g w i t h
, kvo . I t i s r e a l i s e d
i n i t i a l l y a s ( k h o ) and m e d i a l l y a n d f i n a l l y
ion o f t h e c h a r a c t e r s
a s ( k k h o ) . The r e a l i s a t -
, k s r j o , an d "^f , ksmo , i s i l l u s t r a t e d i n
these examples:
3j^r
kgnuto(khnuto)
tiiksno( tikkhno)
When an okar c h a r a c t e r i s f o l l o w e d b y
i s r e a l i s e d a s ( o ) , a s i n Jff^T
suuksmo( Jukkho)
^* , t h e i n h e r e n t
, J l o k s n o ( J l o k h n o ) j and i f
vowel
^
, r e k s a ( r o k k h a , rokkhse) ,
"SJ^JT
Reading examples 2
^nra
*rftftre
xs^fht^
*j*r
above.
*t*&?t
is
224
ii.
BENGALI
^
SECTION
characters .
1
Three o f t h e nunasik c h a r a c t e r s a r e j o i n e d w i t h
J^T
-hn
-hn
The c h a r a c t e r s
and
-hm
a r e r e a l i s e d a s ( n h o ) , and t h e
c h a r a c t e r "5Jf i s r e a l i s e d a s ( m h o ) .
Reading e x a m p l e s
^*rc*rt
^cafe
w(7Tt
^rrms csffisrar
t%^re3
ewer
IW
TO^TO
HJ*flN
r
&
*ri$
^n*rr
^srar f N n ^ ^c?r-
xsrera ^ c ^ r qc=?
m^cs?
*m?r etches i
f^Tra
smosh
^c?rfi
*Trf%c3ra
^c?rfSi
^rrftvsi
C^t\5S
of^ra
C^TQ3
^PT, v3*R
Tftft
c * r 5
vb ( s f t ^ ^ t
G5T<5ft ^3
a*RTS "R^TS-
TOUTS
\5T3
^f%v5
gsiws
* n f 5
OSWSiS
^ <
^ r r c ?
* r e f 5
*?ttow
1 . C f . S a n s k r i t , Ch. 3 , 3 . CI.
ii.
2 . For t r a n s c r i p t i o n , s e e p . 2 3 0 .
3 . R a h i n d r a n a t h T a g o r e , g i k s a n a V i k i r a n a , an a d d r e s s on u n i v e r s i t y t r a i n i n g , puh. U n i v e r s i t y of C a l c u t t a , 1 9 3 3 .
C O N J U N C T CHARACTERS
TO,
fl^f CT-^rtCT
c%5u
<7r^rf(7T
Examples of B e n g a l i s p e l l i n g t e r m s ,
225
^re^m
^^QJTT
including conjunct
characters:
d o n t o Joe h o j o n t o ,
donto
Joe akar)
( t o e h r o j j o i k a r , b o e b o p h o l a , khor]c(o t o )
( t a l o b b o J o , koe t o t a t e h r o j j o
( b o r g i y o j o e jioe a k a r ,
donto
ikar)
no)
TO
jopholae condrobindu t a t e
( d o n t o J o , d o n t o n o e dhoe
(dirgho i ,
jophols., t a te
t a l o b b o Joe b o p h o l a ,
( j o r i a, ontostho
joe
( h r o j j o u , coe c h o e r o p h o l a ,
reph ro)
reph)
ontostho
( t a l o b b o Joe l o p h o l a t a t e
okar,
(donto Jo, o n u j j o r ,
Joe ko t a t e
(noe h r o j j o i k a r ,
akar)
reph)
( d o n t o J o , boe b o p h o l a t a t e
akar)
donto
talobbo
0)
ko)
r i p h o l a , to)
Joe e o , o n t o s t h o
( d o n t o Joe t o e r o p h o l a t a t e d i r g h o
( t a l o b b o Joe h r o j j o i k a r , k h y o e
0)
ikar)
akar)
to)
226
BENGALI
SECTION
T r a n s c r i p t i o n of R e a d i n g E x a m p l e s
Chapter 2.
l.i.
kg
ko
ngdg
nod
che
cho
ngkhg
nokh
kgtg
koto
bofo
boro
bong
bon
ng
no
pg
po
T ^
-|;ok
9
ghong
ghono
jene
jon
dg
do
cjhg
c|ho
pgdg
pod
t
DO
khgrg
khor
pet
pofo
gotg
goto
mans
mon
kotgkg
kotok
jeget
jogot
ce^opg^g
cof'P !
ko^eke^
kof'kof
kgcgmgco
koc'moc
thekothgk
thok'thok
gepeggp
gor'gop
l.ii.
kglg
kol
ghgrg
ghor
kho
kho
gh"];
ghof
joro
joro
thg
tho
pgthg
poth
ngtg
noto
tg^g
to{
tgtg
toto
kene
kon
phe-(;gkg
phojjok
0
jhoro
jhop
poto
poto
tg
to
ghg-j;gkg
ghofok
cjhekemeke
djiok'mok
^gpg^opg
tgkgtgkg
tok'tok
TP'TP
malg
mol
pgrg
por
bglg
bol
rgkg
rok
khg^gkhg^g
kho-fkhot
dhopgdhgpg
dhop'dhop
dglg
dol
rgthg
roth
phol
phol
joto
joto
bodolg
bodol
golgdo
golod
kheretoro
khorotor
l.iii.
sohgrg
Johor
mlj
moloj
pholgkgrg
pholokor
nggorg
nogor
gglong
golon
kglgrgvg
kolorob
Jovg
Job
sgbg
Job
dojg
doj
sgkhg
Jokh
Jgtg
/oto
sgmg
Jomo
hgtg
hoto
hgrg
horo
sohoj
Johoj
sgrglg
Jorol
holgphg
holoph
1 . B r a c k e t s a r e o m i t t e d i n t h e p h o n e t i c t r a n s c r i p t i o n i n o r d e r t o make
i t p o s s i b l e t o p l a c e t h i s t r a n s c r i p t i o n i m m e d i a t e l y b e l o w e a c h word
in the systematic t r a n s c r i p t i o n .
TRANSCRIPTION
tsts
to/'toj
khoskhs
kho/'kho/
smtl
Jomotol
8hocore
/ohocor
i
i
2.i.
is
i/
elm
elora
ii/o
i/o
itlo
itol
otsn
oton
op
r
opo
oro
ib
ibo
2.11.
thu
thu
/i/u
/i/u
godhuli
godhuli
p. 198.
jut
juto
tomora
tom'ra
lekh
lekh
guurh
gurho
ki
koi
kuu
ku
go
go
iid
id
or
or-
niiti
niti
dagabaji
dagabaji
cokh
cokh
pagol
pagol
thak
thako
jagsl
jag'lo
nodii
nodi
jan
jan
jagolo
jag'lo
ydi
jodi
nirupadhi
nirupadhi
/rgal
Jrigal
sol
/olo
ggnbhela
gogon'bhela
jitob
jit'bo
b h i jt
bhij'to
boli
boli
mrt
mrito
devr
dehor
talpat
tal'pat
jan
jano
ysti
joti
motaleb
motaleb
dhsvt
dhouto
kv/l
kou/ol
mucoki
muc ki
novka
nouka
kopotika
kopotika
megho
megh
chi
chi
guru
guru
hur i i
huri
cuppi
cup pi
nr
nri
krpa
kripa
ruti
rufi
hrdi
hridi
niil
nil
os
0/0
mv
mou
/i
c|heu
djieu
mane
mane
duur
dur
thak
thak
khi
khoi
er
er
olo
olo
jhi
jhi
yui
jui
kamera
kam'ra
/unto
/un'to
uun
un
yk
oiko
pather
pathor
tukra
fuk'ra
lekh
lekho
rn
rin
kumarii
kumari
dudh
dudh
v
ou
oy
oi
ut
uto
dao
dao
sahss
Jaho/
/unot
/un'to
bi
boi
se
/e
ruupa
rupa
tin
tin
caker
cakor
e
e
jelsksr
jolokor
mdkt
modokof
itr
ist
utr
udk
ett
itor
i/ot
utor
udok
etot
evssdh
vrt
vsn
oujodh
ou/on
ourot
p
ogh
iit
ot
g
en
vm
ito
opo
ogho
oto
ogo
eno
oumo
jiivilca
jjbika
tit
tito
ghnkph
ghonokoph
am
am
alo
alo
rsi
ri/i
mot a
raofa
ghnrs
ghonoro/
ukh
ukho
ca
ca
otu
otu
cjhlcjhl
d h o l ' dhol
ut
t
it
it
it
ito
tltl
tol'tol
l
l
at
*t
227
jitobo
jit'bo
tulb
tul'bo
besi
bo/i
/unol
Jun'lo
so-lil
/olil
BENGALI SECTION
228
calita
col i t
sahito
Johit
polu
polu
ptu
pofu
3 . i . a.
jamidara
jomidar
madhura
modhur
ora
or
era
er
tusa
tuf
thai
thai
jaka
jaka
dari
dari
khopa
khopa
nam
nor)
t ]
t J
b.
samghata
Jorjghat
ii.
gam
gan
s n
co
arrjja
onJo
pamju
parjju
sarah
Joroh
ta
ta
Jarrjsa
Jorjja
havih Jesa
hobijjej
kudala
kudol
^ J i 9 r r j t ; h srrj
t 9t^
h o
avatarrjsa
o b o t o n Jo
bedhe
bedhe
vanavkah
bonoukah
narrjjuka
norj Juk
karrjsaha
korj Joha
atahpara
otoppor
nihsukha
niJJukh
duhsamaya
dujjomoy
vamjo
arjJo
o n
sairjghatika
Jarjghatik
sahah
Johoh
acetah
ocetah
bhui
bhui
hakapi
hakapi
samjodhana
Jorj Jodhon
nabhahsad
nobhoJJod
ro
ro
ghota
ghof
poci/o
pocij"
damJana
donjon
pun ah
punoh
bahut
bohut
dha
dha
d^ar^a
djar
sutararrj
Jutorarj
palita
polito
phatura
photur
t^
\v.
C O
cheka
chek
vamJadhara
borj Jodhor
nihkarana
nikkaron
ci
ci
galita
golito
baluka
boluk
dhudhula
dhudhul
3r
aruh
oruh
Jatayuh
Jotayuh '
ha
ha
caca
cac
samvit
Jorjbit
sarrjyamana
Jorj jomon
marut
morut
Ska
ak
yui
jui
abhidhana
obhidhan
bahsadana
bajJodon
nihkasana
nikkajon
duhsaha
dujJoho
Chapter 3
Class 1.
pakka
pokko
paggara
poggo
kakkhata
kokkhof
that t a
thatt
a
udjLiina
ucJdJLn
kaccara
koccor
uttara
uttor
utthana
utthan
cavdda
couddo
Joyya
Jo 0 d
phulla
phullo
manajjanti
monoj'janti
c h a b b i Ja
chabbiJ
ummeda
ummed
visani\a
bi-Jonno
sahayya
Jahajjo
saddara
Joadar
tibbat
tibbot
Class 2.
i . J a k t i - vagdana
J o k t i bagdan
udgamana
udgomon
udghata
udghat
utkara
utkor
l a j ja
l o j ja
sar^r^avata
Jonnoboto
chappara
choppor -
gupta
gup t o
iccha
iccha
utphulla
utphullo
utpanna
utponno
paricchanna
poricchonno
adbhuta
odbhut
camatkara
comotkar
kujjhatika
kuj jhofika
Juddha
Juddho
hissa
hijja,
vrddha
briddho
Jabda
Jobdo
kanna
kanna
utpatha
utp.oth
utkhata
utkhat
hissa
citta
citto
dagdha
dogdho
satkorja
Jofkon
TRANSCRIPTION
ii.
lankar
olonkar
jhQjijhato
jhonjhaj;
ndha
ondlio
iii.
J"nkh
/onkho
kon^okii
konjjoki
sompgdg
/ompod
/9kma
Jokka
ssngst
Jorjgoto
kon^ha
kor^fha
ssnghstsn
/onghofon
jicsl
oncol
parjcja. a^hur|dhitg
panc^a c]hur]c{hito
lgmphg
lompho
gmbgrg
ombor
sonlsgn
Jorjlogno
atma
attS
i v . unmogn
unmogno
229
sgmbhgvg
Jorabhob
nimnokt
nimnokto
cygvgng
cobon
Janti
/anti
jpang
gsen
jijsli
onjoli
panthii
ponthi
ninda
ninda
jijjiasa pgtnii
jiggee/a p o t n i
pgmkti
ponkti
vagmn
baggi
pna
pna
jonm
jonmo
lanchsna
lanchona
vanmey
banrjoy
ssnmas
JonmaJ"
Class 3 . i
vaky
bakko
khyat
kheeto
yogyota
joggota
thyan
qhyaqa
pur]y
punno
mitthya
mitthes
bhrtyer
bhritter
nyuune
nun
upsnyas
uponnse/
vyonjsn
bsenjon
Class
/yam
J*8=m
cyutg
cuto
ygtyacarg
jottsecar
ggdyg
goddo
gtyuttgmg
ottuttomo
dyumgni
dumoni
pyang
peen
rsvpy
rouppo
monusyo
monuJ"/o
syoda
Jod
jyoti
joti
gbadhyg
obaddho
gbhyasa
obbheaj
jyetha
jeatha
sgtyg
/otto
gtygyg
ottoy
dbyang
dheen
dhyey
dheyo
nyay
ntsy
myao
meeo
kglyano
kolleen
talovyg
talobbo
s s h y udyana
J o j j h o uddsen
sgndhya
/ondhss
sonkbyeyo
Jonkheyo
3.ii.
kvocit
kocit
iiJvoro
iJJor
pokvo
pokko
svocche
Joccho
ucchvaso
ucchaj*
jval
jal
nvesr[
onne/on
tvsra
tora
svode/e
/odej
tottvo
totto
sorosvotii
/oro//oti
dhvonsa
dhonfo
/vaso
/a/
vilvo
billo
jihva
jibha
Class 3 i i i .
a. terk
torko
muurkhe
murkho
vorgiiyo
borgiyo
diirghg
dirgho
varcc
barcco
muurcchong
raurcchon
s a r j j u vrn
/ o r j u borno
korttgvyg
kortobbo
podarthg
podartho
ssrp
/orpo
smrpn dhrm
/omorpon dhormo
msryyada
morjseda
durlgbh
durlobh
230
BENGALI
vghirbhutg
bohirbfruto
iii.b.
s s r v v a mgr/gng
/orbo mor/on
kruddbg
kruddho
bhrgmgrg
bhromor
vyggrg
beegro
hrita
hrito
g/ru
osru
Class
3.iv.
ulka
ulka
vglgita
bolgito
klanta
klanto
gramg
gram
prarthgna
prartbona
andhrg
andhro
ul-|;a
ulfa
plavong
plabon
ggrhgrjg
gorhon
vajrg
bojro
sgmra-J;g
J"omra{
phalgurjg
phalgun
glepgng
glepon
msrssr^a
mor/on
ghreyg
ghreyo
a/rayg
asroy
SECTION
putrg
putro
srutg
sruto
drgvyg
drobbo
prg:qamg
pronam
vgdhrg
bodhro
sarjkrantg
/orjkranto
gulpbg
gulpho
tablakg
toblok
visgrgg
biJorge
srmi
sm
ucchrgyg
ucchroy
gglpg
golpo
aryyg
arjo
mlang
mlan
priyg
priyo
vrgtg
brot
paktrg
poktro
prggglbhg
progolbho
Jlokg
Jlok
sgrddarg
Jordar
Jrii
sri
sgrjgrghg
/orjgroho
gulmg
gulmo
ulbg
ulbo
gjliilg
o/lil
hladg
hlad
p r a j n g n i s k r t g ngs"tg
p r o s n o n i / k r i t o noJ-J;o
jyesthg
jeJ"t
C l a s s U. i .
a. p o / c a t
pojcat
ni/ceyg
nijcoy
nip^n-urg
ni/fhur
krsng
krijno
n i / c h i d r g a/cgryg
nijchidro a/corjo
ni^pgtti
nifpotti
nisphglg
ni/phol
grii^mg
grij/o
skgndg
skondo
n o
skhglitg
skholito
stgbdba
stobdho
smgrgr^g
Joron
svasthg
Jostho
snano
snan
snigdhg
snigdbo
spgs"J;g
spoT^o
sphu-J;itg
sphutito
smrti
srlti
b.
gksarg
okkhor
pariksitg
porikkhito
tgtksgrjat
totkhonat
suuk^mg
Jukkho
C l a s s U. i i .
gpgrahng
oporanho
ahnikg
anhik
cihng
cinho
mgdhyahng
moddhanho
brghma
bromba
vismgyg
bi/Joy
strii
stri
arksg mgtsgrg
arkkho m o t / o r
gpsgra
op/ora
prahr]g
pranho
spor/g
spor/o
khinng
khinno
rasjro
rajfro
vipsa
bip/a
k^viiirjg
khinno
puurvvahng
purbbanho
TRANSCRIPTION
231
y e k h a n e amare J e k t i
j o k h o n amar
Jokti
chile
chilo
tekhene
tokhon
imreji
inreji
janetene s a v a i .
jan'ten
Jobai.
tavu
tohu
tara
tSra
s i ikar a karecena
fikar
korecen
s a h i t y e r a v a n i i bamlabha^aye t a d e r e mahe s e h e j e s a r a p e y e c e .
Jahitter hani banlabhajay
tader
mone J o h o j e Jara p e y e c e .
adhunika / i k ^ a i m r e j i h h a s a v a h i n i i
adhunik Jikkha i n r e j i h h a / a b a h i n i
tara
tar
anekakhani
onek'khani
mara y a y e .
mara j a y .
paddhati yara
a b h y a s t a nay
poddhoti j a r i o b b h o s t o noy
i m r e j i khanara { ^ b i l e
i r j r e j i khanar
-j^elslXe
emana b a i p l i i r e
gemon b a n a l i r
aharera
aharer
yakhana k h e t a b a s e
jokhon k h e t e b o j e
k e l e j i yejjiere kotha,
k o l e j i jogger kotha,
Pik^ara b h o j e o
fikkhar bhojeo
amare visoye"|;a s e r v v e s a d h a r o n e r e
amar b i / o y | ; a
J orb o / a d h a r o n e r
Jiksa
Jikkha
ache
ache
e ya b a l e c i
e ja b o l ' c i
e
e
neye.
noy.
Jiksare jalera
Jikkhar j o l e r
c a l a n o r o k o t h a n o y e , p a i p a y e k h a n e p a v c h a y e na s e k h a ne
calanor kotha noy,
paip
j e k h a n e p o u c h o y na Jekhane
vyavasthara kotha.
bsebosthar
kotha.
Jest na h e y e t e v e
J o s t o na hoy t o b e
takhana
tokho n
vi^aya e niye
bijoye e niye
niye.
niye.
debara
debar
je"|;herere d a v i i
jo{horer
dabi
e p e c e y e haye yaya.
opocoy hoye jay.
amara a j a k e r a a l o c y a
amar a j ' k e r
alocco
ja^ila
joj;il
t a r a pekpe
badhat a r pokkhe b a d h a -
g r a s t a b o l e i bheropuuro b h o j e r a m a j h a k h a n eo k s u d h i t e
grosto b o l e i bhor'pur
bhojer
majh'khaneo khudhito
s a v a i o t h e c a majhepathe a n e k a k h a n i
Jobi o t h o c o m a j h ' p o t h e o n e k ' k h a n i
vastuta
hostuto
chele b i l e t e pari
chele b i l e t e papi
amadera
amader
imreji
inreji
h a l e i amadera manera p r o v e J e p e t h e
h o l e i amader moner p r o b e J" ' p o t h e
sempuurne mi"|;0te c a y e n a .
Jompurno m i f ' t e c a y n a .
amare
amar
kala.
kol
paniiyera
paniyer